IBM® Sterling Gentran Gz OS66_Gentran_Viewpoint_User_Guide OS66 Viewpoint User Guide
User Manual: GzOS66_Gentran_Viewpoint_User_Guide user guide pdf - FTP File Search (14/20)
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 384
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS User Guide Release 6.6 2223-650-USER01-0001 This edition applies to the 6.6 Version of IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions. Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page N-1. Licensed Materials - Property of IBM IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® © Copyright IBM Corp. 1988, 2011. All Rights Reserved. US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp. Table of Contents Chapter 1 Product Description Executive Overview ................................................................................................. 1-2 Feature Summary ...................................................................................................... 1-5 Concepts and Terminology ..................................................................................... 1-12 System Architecture ............................................................................................... 1-16 System Operation ................................................................................................... 1-19 How To Get Help ................................................................................................... 1-22 Chapter 2 Implementation Process Overview of Implementation .................................................................................... 2-2 Develop a Configuration Strategy ............................................................................ 2-4 Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System ..................................................... 2-11 Operational Procedures .......................................................................................... 2-20 Optional Features .................................................................................................... 2-23 Chapter 3 Tutorial Exception Management Tutorial .............................................................................. 3-3 Determining Exception Management Business Requirements ................................ 3-5 Exception Management Tutorial Setup .................................................................... 3-8 Exception Setup ...................................................................................................... 3-11 Exception Management Tutorial Processing .......................................................... 3-29 Exception Inquiry ................................................................................................... 3-31 Requesting Exception Management Reports .......................................................... 3-45 Exception Management Housekeeping .................................................................. 3-47 Exception Management Tutorial Reset .................................................................. 3-48 Tracking Management Tutorial .............................................................................. 3-49 Determining Tracking Management Business Requirements ................................ 3-51 Tracking Management Tutorial Setup .................................................................... 3-52 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing ............................................................ 3-56 Requesting Tracking Management Reports ........................................................... 3-77 Tracking Management Housekeeping .................................................................... 3-79 Tracking Management Tutorial Reset .................................................................... 3-80 Chapter 4 Using the Online Facility Prerequisites ............................................................................................................. 4-2 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Options ........................................................................ 4-2 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users ........................................................................... 4-4 Function Keys ........................................................................................................... 4-4 Actions ...................................................................................................................... 4-5 Jump Codes .............................................................................................................. 4-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide i Table of Contents Chapter 5 Screen Descriptions EDIM600 – Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu .............................................. 5-3 System Options Screens System Options Navigation ...................................................................................... 5-5 EDIM685 – System Options Screen ......................................................................... 5-6 EDIM686 – Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory Screen ........................ 5-10 Extended System Management Screens Extended System Management Navigation ............................................................ 5-13 EDIM601 – Extended System Management Menu ................................................ 5-14 EDIM602 – Sterling Tracking Point Directory Screen .......................................... 5-16 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran ......... 5-19 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect .......... 5-25 EDIM604 – Tracking Point System Message Control Screen ............................... 5-30 EDIM605 – Tracking Point Status Control Screen ................................................ 5-32 EDIM606 – Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control Screen .......................... 5-34 EDIM607 – Functional Area Control Screen ......................................................... 5-36 EDIM608 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Screen ................................ 5-38 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen ............................... 5-41 EDIM610 – User Tracking Point Directory Screen ............................................... 5-56 EDIM611 – User Tracking Point Definition Screen .............................................. 5-59 Exception Management Screens Exception Management Navigation ....................................................................... 5-62 EDIM620 – Exception Management Menu ........................................................... 5-63 EDIM621 – Exception Profile Directory Screen .................................................... 5-65 EDIM622 – Exception Profile Definition Screen .................................................. 5-67 EDIM623 – Exception Capture Directory Screen .................................................. 5-70 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen ................................................. 5-73 EDIM625 – Exception Action Directory Screen .................................................... 5-86 EDIM626 – Exception Action Definition Screen .................................................. 5-89 EDIM627 – User Message Directory Screen ......................................................... 5-92 EDIM628 – User Message Definition Screen ........................................................ 5-94 EDIM629 – User Procedure Directory Screen ....................................................... 5-97 EDIM630 – User Procedure Definition Screen ...................................................... 5-99 EDIM631 – Usage Cross Reference Screen ......................................................... 5-101 Exception Inquiry Screens Exception Inquiry Navigation .............................................................................. 5-103 EDIM645 – Exception Inquiry Menu ................................................................... 5-104 EDIM646 – Recipient Directory Screen .............................................................. 5-105 EDIM647 – Recipient Detail Screen .................................................................... 5-107 EDIM648 – Exception List Screen ....................................................................... 5-109 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item ............................ 5-113 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item ............................ 5-119 EDIM650 – Exception Message List Screen ........................................................ 5-123 EDIM651 – Exception Data Display Screen ........................................................ 5-126 EDIM652 – Exception History Screen ................................................................. 5-129 EDIM653 – Exception History Screen – 2 ........................................................... 5-132 EDIM654 – Exception History Update Screen .................................................... 5-134 EDIM662 – User Message Display Screen .......................................................... 5-136 EDIM663 – User Procedure Display Screen ........................................................ 5-138 ii IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Table of Contents Tracking Management Screens Tracking Management Navigation ....................................................................... 5-140 EDIM700 – Tracking Management Menu ........................................................... 5-141 EDIM701 – Query Directory Screen .................................................................... 5-142 EDIM702 – Query Request Screen ...................................................................... 5-145 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen .................................................. 5-152 EDIM710 – Item Status History Screen ............................................................... 5-167 EDIM711 – Item Reference History Screen ........................................................ 5-171 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item ........................ 5-174 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item ....................... 5-182 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – User Item ........................................... 5-186 EDIM715 – Item Message List Screen ................................................................ 5-190 EDIM716 – Item Data Display Screen ................................................................. 5-193 EDIM718 – Item Exception Status Screen ........................................................... 5-196 Log Display Screens Log Display Navigation ....................................................................................... 5-199 EDIM688 – Online Log Display Screen .............................................................. 5-200 Sterling Gentran:Plus Screens Sterling Gentran:Plus Navigation ......................................................................... 5-204 EDIM402 – Interchange Detail Screen ................................................................ 5-205 EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen ........................................................ 5-208 Chapter 6 Report Descriptions Reporting Structure .................................................................................................. 6-2 User Reports ............................................................................................................. 6-3 Report Examples ...................................................................................................... 6-4 Appendix A Jump Codes Notices Trademarks .............................................................................................................. N-3 Glossary Index IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide iii Table of Contents iv IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 1 Product Description This chapter provides an introduction to IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6, including features and benefits, concepts and terminology, and system architecture and operation. Chapter One is organized into five sections: Topic Page Executive Overview .............................................................................................................. 1-2 Feature Summary ................................................................................................................... 1-5 Concepts and Terminology .................................................................................................. 1-12 System Architecture ............................................................................................................ 1-16 System Operation ................................................................................................................ 1-19 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-1 Executive Overview Executive Overview Many companies may have found the initial impact of introducing EDI into their business systems to be complex—increases in staff, time, and paper. The opportunities for more accurate information, faster turnaround, and reduction in errors are still there. You simply need a way to manage the process. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint not only addresses these challenges, but also provides the tools necessary to fully exploit the opportunities. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is an advanced set of tools that will help you automate the monitoring, control, and management of your EDI environment. Specifically, it allows you to more efficiently manage your day-to-day EDI operations and continuously increase your number of trading partners, messages, and applications. Improved access to critical information can enhance customer service and internal communications. The primary objective of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is to make the right information, about events which have occurred in EDI business operations, available to the right people at the right time. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint accomplishes this objective with two major capabilities: • Exception Management • Tracking Management Exception Management is a part of the base Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint product. It allows you to capture exception information, notify the appropriate users, and optionally take automated action for exceptions that are specific to their EDI business needs. An example of Exception Management is to capture outbound invoice errors, make the information available online for the appropriate payables people, and automatically send an e-mail to inform them that the exception has occurred. Tracking Management is an optional module for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint that allows you to query the status and history of a document as it moves through the entire end-to-end EDI environment. The user has the ability to query based on identifiers that they know and understand. An example of Tracking Management is a customer calling to inquire about their purchase order. Using the PO Number, the service person can determine online that the document was received but has failed compliance checking, and that the rejected acknowledgement was sent out to the customer. The context of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint within your environment is illustrated in Figure 1.1. Any System/Process (Tracking Point) that has been set up to communicate with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system can pass information to be monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Exception Management capabilities focus on IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® processes that are a part of the “Translation” box and Sterling Connect processes that are a part of the “Communications” box for IBM® Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS® installations. Also, the Network Reconciliation and Acknowledgment Reconciliation provide information from the “Networks” and “Trading Partners” boxes. With Tracking Management, you are able to track items in the “Business Applications” and “Communications” boxes by using User Gateways into Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 1-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Executive Overview Business Applications Communications Translation Networks Trading Partners Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint EDI Business Management and Support Figure 1.1 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Context Users of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint can realize many benefits: • Reduced operating costs resulting from automated business processes and faster provision of information • Reduced business risks through better controls, tracking, and auditing • Improved quality of EDI processing through the use of better EDI management tools Your business can quickly gain tangible benefits using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Some of the benefits are described below. Reduced operating costs through increased automation and greater efficiency • Less people time • Fewer paper reports • Faster information • Faster operation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-3 Executive Overview Reduced business risk through advanced controls, tracking, and auditing • Business/application-oriented detection of exceptions • User-defined Exception Capture and Notification • User-defined concise, understandable resolution information • End-to-end business process tracking Higher service levels - Quality • Responses to customers can be greatly enhanced. • Business users can easily access the information they require. • Problem notification is distributed to the right users with the right information. • Automated actions may be defined for responding to exceptions. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint combines with the strength and experience of the Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Connect product families to provide a powerful EDI management tool. 1-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Feature Summary Feature Summary Key features of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are summarized in this section. Features are described within the following categories: • System-Wide Features • System Management • Exception Management • Tracking Management (optional module) Note: Exception Management is included with the basic Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint product; Tracking Management is an optional feature to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint product. System-Wide Features The following are global features of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Online Facility - Real-Time System Access Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides user-friendly online capabilities, which enable you to quickly and easily perform all setup and operational functions. The online system is a seamless integration with the Sterling Gentran:Basic and IBM® Sterling Gentran:Realtime® online systems. Integrated Security All security features of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are completely integrated with the existing Sterling Gentran:Basic security system. This means one-time setup for the control and management of access to the entire EDI environment. Comprehensive User Documentation Complete user documentation is provided, which addresses both the technical and business user. User-defined Online Maintenance and Inquiry Criteria Maintenance and inquiry options that are required may be set up from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Online Facility. This option provides powerful selection capabilities. Sets of selection criteria can be saved and reused. This eliminates the need to manage batch control parameters and simplifies setting up maintenance and inquiry requests. "Prompt" Feature You can enter options quickly and accurately using selection lists provided by the prompt feature. Full Online Help Screen-level and field-level (context sensitive) help is provided for all screens and fields. CUA Compliant The Online Facility complies with current guidelines for Common User Access (CUA). Action lists Action lists simplify the use of the online functions and provide for quick screen navigation. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-5 Feature Summary Trading Profile Compatibility Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allows for the use of existing and new Sterling Gentran:Basic Trading Profile information in your exception capture set up. This means no duplication of Trading Profile information is necessary. System Image Feature The system image feature allows multiple Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Images to run concurrently in the same CICS region. Each system image has its own set of data sets, and operates independently of any other Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint image. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide “Appendix B” for more information. Program Image Feature The program image feature allows the first three characters of all CICS program IDs to be user defined. It allows different system images of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, on different releases of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint software, to be run in the same CICS region. Refer to IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide “Appendix B” for more information. System Management Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides online real-time control and management of all of its functions. Flexible/Dynamic System Configuration Extended System Management allows you to configure your Extended EDI System online from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. Users are able to monitor as much or as little of their Extended EDI System as they wish. Dynamic System Operation From the System Options screen the entire Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system, or selected portions of the system, may be dynamically deactivated or activated. A built-in trace facility allows Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint background CICS tasks to be monitored. An online Error User Exit may be invoked to respond to various system conditions. Powerful Maintenance and Inquiry Options Setup and management of system maintenance and reporting can be easily accomplished using the online Maintenance/Inquiry Options. Exception Management The Exception Management capabilities of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allow you to capture information, notify users, and take automated action for exceptions that are specific to your EDI business needs. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides several components that allow you to effectively manage exceptions. The emphasis in Exception Management is to provide you with the ability to define the extent of Exception Management you require. Exception Management features include: 1-6 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Feature Summary • User-defined exceptions • User-defined notification • User-defined automated response User-defined Exceptions An “exception,” within the context of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, is an event or series of events resulting from a process for which you want some action to be performed. For example, an event could be that a mapping error was encountered during creation of an outbound purchase order. The action to be performed could be that an end user, in order processing, is notified of the error and alerted with a procedure to follow. An exception does not have to be an error. For example, an exception could be defined that causes the Accounts Payable clerk to be notified when invoices are received. Components for defining exceptions include: Flexible Exception Capture Definitions Online screens simplify the definition of exception events and the data relevant to the event to be captured. The definition can be as general or as specific as you choose to make it. For example, you may want to define exception control in a general manner for all mapping errors and define additional detailed control for a specific system error message. Flexible User Messaging The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system provides the ability to attach user-written messages, and user-written procedures to an exception. This information is then available through exception inquiry screens, which aid in the resolution of the exception. Event-driven Exception Capture The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system provides the ability to capture exceptions in an event driven manner. Specifically, exceptions are only captured if a particular event or series of events has occurred. This can greatly reduce the amount of time required to resolve those critical problems that may impact business success. Multiple Exception Capture Levels Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allows for exception capture, and therefore Exception Management, at various levels including System (for example, Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Connect), Process (for example, Inbound Mapping and Mailbox), Trading Partner, Item (for example, batch, document, transaction, functional group, or interchange), or an Event (for example, acknowledgement status, document status, or envelope status). User-defined Notification Once an exception has been captured, the appropriate people need to be notified to resolve it. The following features are included within User-defined Notification: User-controlled Distribution The user can control who is responsible for an exception through the use of exception profiles and online screens. These distribution capabilities include: • Definition of exception recipients IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-7 Feature Summary • Transfer of exceptions to other recipients • Attachment of review notes to an exception • Closing of an exception Individual, Multiple, and Group Recipients The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system provides the flexibility to define one or more users as the recipients of an exception, or to define a group to be the recipient. This flexibility allows almost any operational setup to be accommodated. User-defined Order of Exception Presentation Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allows the user to specify the order in which exceptions are displayed. For example, a user can specify that all documents processed by the Inbound Mapper are to be ordered by application and partner. Powerful Inquiry Capabilities Exception Inquiry provides powerful capabilities to view and manage data and information that has been captured as specified by exception definitions. Inquiry capabilities include: • Summary lists at the recipient and exception levels • Lists of system messages at the exception level • Display of system messages in the document data to put the exception in context • Display of user written messages and procedures to aid in the resolution of an exception User-defined Automated Response Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides the ability to initiate automated responses for a captured exception. This response, or Exception Action, is associated with an exception definition and enables the user to achieve a high level of unattended operation. User Defined Automated Response includes the following features: Immediate Real-time Action Exception actions allow a user to be alerted immediately, via any system they have available in their environment (for example, E-mail, an auto-ops system) Interfaces to Batch and Online User Applications Both batch and online user applications can be automatically invoked to take action for an exception. Flexible Control of Data Passed The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system allows for both control and status data captured through exception definitions and user-defined data to be passed to the automated response application. 1-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Feature Summary User defined Triggers The automated response associated with an exception can be triggered at various levels of processing. An exception action can be initiated once at the end of processing or for each item that incurs an exception during processing. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-9 Feature Summary Tracking Management Whereas Exception Management provides information on exceptions occurring with documents moving through the EDI system, Tracking Management provides information on the status and history of documents (items) moving through the entire end-to-end EDI environment. The Tracking Management module is an optional add-on capability for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint product and requires the base Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system to be installed. The emphasis of Tracking Management is twofold: • Allow you to interface your online and batch applications with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. These Gateways, or APIs, provide the ability to track or obtain history for any item across the entire end-to-end EDI environment. • Provide a query-based dialog so that you can locate items travelling through their extended EDI system. This dialog provides process history and detailed information for the item. Tracking Management features include: • User gateways (APIs) • Trace ID • Tracking user exit • Basic queries • Extended search conditions • Query save/reuse, update and delete • Search limit/find limit • Process history • Process detail • Item messages display • Item data display User Gateways (APIs) User Gateways, or APIs, are provided for both online and batch user applications. These APIs allow you to connect your applications to the extended EDI environment for end-to-end monitoring of all EDI traffic. Trace ID Tracking Management assigns and manages a Trace ID for items being tracked by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID provides a link for an item between processes and also provides a means for you to reference the item. 1-10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Feature Summary Tracking User Exit A Tracking User Exit can optionally be invoked when an item has been processed for a tracking point. This feature allows you to populate your own database for subsequent inquiry. Basic Queries Basic Queries provide the ability to make simple queries against stored Tracking Information using preset criteria. Available criteria for a basic query are Item Type, Reference, Partner, and Date/Time. Extended Search Conditions For queries that cannot be performed using the basic query criteria, this feature allows you to extend the search condition up to a 7-expression condition with full Boolean logic and AND/OR connectors. Query Save/Reuse, Update and Delete For queries that are repeated frequently, you may save, reuse, and delete queries that you set up. Search Limit/Find Limit For queries that involve a lengthy search, you can limit the number of items that Tracking Management evaluates. Similarly, the query request can be limited to a user-specified number of items found that meet the criteria. Process History Process History provides you with a view of all processes that an item has been processed by and the status issued by each of those processes for the item. Process Detail Detailed information related to an item for a specific process is provided by Process Detail. Some of the details included are: whether exceptions have been captured for the item, the Application, Network, User, Partner, and other information that may be helpful in taking further action. Item Messages Display All messages issued for the item are listed by the Item Message display. This function is available for Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Connect, and User processes. From this list, for Sterling Gentran:Basic processes, you can select a message for Data Display. This causes all messages to be inserted into the data for the item and you will be positioned in the data at the selected message. Item Data Display For Sterling Gentran:Basic data items, the Item Data Display screen displays the data and all messages for the item. This function applies to data residing on the Sterling Gentran Databank Message Store files. For Sterling Gentran:Plus® users, Sterling Connect data items are displayed by the Interchange Detail screen. This function applies to data residing on the Sterling Connect data queues. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-11 Concepts and Terminology Concepts and Terminology The fundamental concepts and terminology of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are introduced in this section. For an explanation of specific terms used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, refer to the Glossary. Figure 1.2 illustrates the basic concepts and terminology of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Extended EDI Tracking Points Business Applications EDI Translation Communications Networks Trading Partners Exception Capture/Tracking Information Inquiry Notification/ Resolution Tracking Query “Auto” Actions Exception Management/ Tracking Management EDI Business Management and Support Figure 1.2 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Concepts The following major concepts are described: 1-12 • Extended EDI system • Exception Management • Tracking Management IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Concepts and Terminology Extended EDI System Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint introduces a concept in EDI processing called the Extended EDI System. The Extended EDI System encompasses all systems between your EDI-enabled applications and your partner's EDI-enabled applications (End-To-End). The primary component of the Extended EDI System is the Tracking Point. A Tracking Point is a system/process that has been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Tracking Points, which are defined in Extended System Management, form your Extended EDI System. Tracking points, currently enabled for use with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management, are the Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime (if installed) translation processes (for example, Inbound Editor, Inbound Mapper, Network Reconciliation), and the Sterling Connect processes (STOUTL) for Sterling Gentran:Plus installations. These same tracking points are also enabled for use with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management. In addition, as long as the application has the ability to call the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint gateway, any batch or online application can be enabled for Tracking Management. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides monitoring of all Tracking Points (Systems) that are defined to the Extended EDI System. Figure 1.2 shows how Tracking Points relate to the Extended EDI System. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides the Extended System Management functions to define and manage the Extended EDI System for your environment. From the Extended System Definition, you are able to optimize your Extended EDI System configuration. Major components, which could affect a business document traveling through the Extended EDI System, are defined in this functional area. Major components in the Extended EDI System are considered to be User Applications, EDI Translation Software, Communications, Networks, and Trading Partners. This does not exclude the addition of other components to the Extended EDI System, such as encryption or decryption. Exception Management The concept of Exception Management revolves around providing you with the ability to define which events (exceptions) in the Extended EDI System are relevant. You then need the ability to distribute and resolve these exceptions. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management provides automatic Exception Capture, Notification, and Action for exceptions you have defined in your Extended EDI System. From this functional area, you build Exception Profiles to automate the management of your exceptions. Exception Management capabilities are accomplished using the following functions and options: Exception Profiles An Exception Profile is a set of criteria you have defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for managing an exception. The Exception Profile provides the instructions needed to Capture an exception, provide the appropriate Notification for an exception, and initiate the correct Action for an exception. Exception Capture Definitions This function is used to define the exceptions you want captured. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-13 Concepts and Terminology Recipient Notification This option is used to define who should be notified about an exception that has been captured. Exception Action Definitions The Exception Action function allows you to define automated actions that can be initiated in response to an exception. Tracking Management Tracking Management provides the ability for you to track an item (for example, a document) as it travels through the extended EDI system. You can query the status and history of an item using a variety of criteria, including identifiers that are known to you (that is, user references). The focus of Tracking Management is on determining the current status or history of an item, whereas the emphasis of Exception Management is on automatic detection, notification, and resolution of exceptions or events that are relevant to you, and as they occur. The table on the following page lists the attributes of these two functional areas. Tracking Management capabilities are accomplished using the following functions and options: Tracking Points Tracking Points are processes enabled for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. You can define Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Connect, or User tracking points. Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime (if installed) translation processes are enabled to allow tracking of items as they are processed. These processes include the Mappers, Editors, Databank Extracts, and Network and Acknowledgement Reconciliation. For Sterling Gentran:Plus users, the Sterling Connect processes, Offline Utilities (STOUTL), and Sterling Connect Outbound and Inbound Interfaces are enabled for tracking communication batch items. In addition, you have the ability to define user tracking points, such as their application or communication systems. In this case, the application must be able to invoke a user gateway to pass information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Note: User Tracking Points are only available with Tracking Management. User Gateways User Gateways are programming interfaces (APIs) that can be used to pass tracking information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from your application. Both batch and online user gateways are provided. User Gateways allow complete end-to-end tracking of items. Tracking Management Query When the status information is stored in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, you have the ability to search or query on the status or history of an item by using the Tracking Management Query dialog. Both basic and extended queries can be performed, and queries can be saved and reused for frequent inquiries. 1-14 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Concepts and Terminology Comparing/Contrasting Exception and Tracking Management The following table summarizes Exception Management and Tracking Management. Exception Management Tracking Management Problem Detection Business Process Tracking Resolution (user defined) Document Status Current View Past and Present View Automated Responses Extensive Query Capability IBM Processes Any Processes IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-15 System Architecture System Architecture This section provides a brief description of the major components of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Figure 1.3 illustrates each of the major components and their relationships. Batch User Action Connect System Tracking Points User Batch Tracking Points User Online Tracking Points Sterling Gateways User Batch Gateways Gateway User Online Gateway Staging Area Repository TrackTracking ing User Exit User Exit Sterling Gateways Online Facility Gentran Databank • Extended System Management • Staging Files • Post Processor Online User Action Gentran System Tracking Points • Exception Management • Staging Temporary Storage Queues (CICS) Profiles • Exception Inquiry • Tracking Management • Communication Post Processor Connect Data Queues Master Index Batch Maintenance/Inquiry Reports Archive VIEWPOINT Figure 1.3 System Architecture 1-16 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide System Architecture Major Components Tracking Points Tracking points are processes in your Extended EDI System that are enabled for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Connect or User tracking points can be defined to pass data for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing via the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways provide the ability to pass data (or information) to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint that the user may wish to monitor. The data passing through Gateways is placed in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging Area. The following gateways are provided: Sterling Gateways Sterling Batch and Online Gateways are called from Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Connect system tracking points to pass both exception and tracking information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. User Batch Gateway The User Batch Gateway passes Tracking Management information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from user applications running in batch. The gateway is specific to the Tracking Management module, and cannot be used for Exception Management. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 4, “User Exits and APIs” for detailed information. User Online Gateway The User Online Gateway passes Tracking Management information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from online user applications running under CICS. The gateway is currently specific to the Tracking Management module and cannot be used for Exception Management. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 4, “User Exits and APIs” for detailed information. Staging Area Data that is passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint through Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways is processed through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging Area. The actual data from the Gateways reside on one or more Staging Files or Staging Temporary Storage Queues. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging Area provides filtering of the data and reorganization of the filtered data into the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository and Master Index files. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging Area Post Processor (a background online processor) is responsible for these functions. For Sterling Gentran:Plus users, the Communications Post Processor (a background, online processor) formats the Sterling Connect communications information into a Staging TSQ to be processed by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Post Processor. The Staging Area allows Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to minimize its impact to the processing throughput of Tracking Points. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles file stores all Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint definitions and profiles. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint definitions and profiles are maintained by the user from the Online Facility Extended System Management, Exception Management, and Tracking IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-17 System Architecture Management options. These definitions and profiles are used by the Staging Area to perform filtering and reorganization, as well as by the Online Facility to perform tracking queries. Maintaining definitions and profiles in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profile files may be performed from the Online Facility or from Batch. Inquiry reports may also be produced from Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles information. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository stores exceptions that have been captured, as well as tracking status and history information. End users, who are responsible for the management and control of business documents, manage the Repository information using the Online Exception Inquiry and Tracking Management Query functions. Maintaining data from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository may be performed from the Online Facility or from batch. Inquiry reports may also be produced from Repository information. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Master Index The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Master Index is used by the Tracking Management module to maintain the processing history for items being tracked. The primary purpose of the Master Index is to provide quick access to the data to show you the process history for an item. The Master Index also provides a link to exceptions that have been captured for an item. Online Facility Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Online Facility provides the tools you need to set up, control, and manage your EDI processing information. This includes Extended System Management, Exception Management, Exception Inquiry, and Tracking Management. The online facility is designed to work with both technical users and business users. For more information on Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint online facility, refer to Chapter 4, "Using the Online Facility". Batch Inquiry Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Inquiry processes provide inquiry reports. Inquiries can be made against Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles and Repository files. Parameters for controlling these processes are set up using the Maintenance/Inquiry options in Extended System Management of the Online Facility. Batch Maintenance Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance processes provide all the functionality necessary for maintaining Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles, Repository, and Master Index files. The Maintenance processes run in batch. Parameters for controlling these processes are set up using the Online Facility Maintenance/Inquiry Options function in Extended System Management. Options of Maintenance are to archive and restore data that has been purged. User Actions A user action is a user batch procedure or an online transaction that you defined in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint as an Exception Action. The User Action is automatically initiated by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Post Processor when an exception has been captured. Tracking User Exit A Tracking User Exit can be invoked by Tracking Management when an item has been processed for a tracking point. This feature allows you to pass information to your database for subsequent inquiry. 1-18 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide System Operation System Operation The following section describes the operational flow using the major components of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Figure 1.4 illustrates general activities that are performed using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint (both Exception Management and Tracking Management). Setup Operational Activities • User Activity • One-time Online Facility Extended System Management Implementation • As Required Capture/ Tracking • System Activity Tracking Point Viewpoint GATEWAY Tracking Exception Management Management Staging Area • Ongoing Filtering • System Activity Viewpoint Profiles Staging Area • Online Notification • System Activity • Ongoing Resolution/ Query Viewpoint Repository Master Index Online Facility Exception Inquiry Exception Management Online Facility User Tracking Management User Systems • User Activity • Ongoing User User Maintenance/ Inquiry • User Activity Online Facility Tracking Management • As Required Viewpoint Batch Control Parameters Archives Reports Viewpoint Repository, Profiles, & Master Index files Figure 1.4 Operational Activity Flow IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-19 System Operation Operational Activities Setup Perform the Setup activity to configure Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for your environment and information needs. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides three options in the Online Facility for performing this activity: Extended System Management, Exception Management, and Tracking Management. From the Online facility, define the systems and processes you wish to monitor. For Exception Management, define the information that is important to you and how you wish to be notified. For Tracking Management, define queries you wish to use repeatedly. Perform this activity "one-time," and as required by changes in your environment or information needs. Refer to Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions" for detailed information. Capture/Tracking Capture and Tracking are system activities in which data/information being processed by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint-enabled applications is passed through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint confirms that the application is a valid Tracking Point and passes the received data/information to the Staging Area. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint performs this activity on an ongoing basis. Refer to Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions" for detailed information. Filtering Filtering is a system activity that analyzes exception and tracking data/information received through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways. Using the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles created in “Setup,” Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint distributes the information to the appropriate people (for exceptions) and/or user systems (for exceptions or tracking information). For Tracking Management, the information is stored and is available for online query. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint performs this activity on an ongoing basis. For more details, refer to "Exception Management Screens" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". Notification Notification is the Exception Management system activity that builds resolution information and delivers that information to the right recipients and/or User "Auto Actions". Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint performs this activity on an ongoing basis. For more details refer to "EDIM626 - Exception Action Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". Resolution/Query Resolution/Query are user activities. Use the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Inquiry option to achieve resolution for Exception Management or use your own application support system that has been connected to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint through Auto Actions. Exception Inquiry provides powerful tools to manage and resolve the exceptions that have been captured. For Tracking Management, you have the ability to query the status and history for any item being 1-20 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide System Operation tracked through the extended EDI system. Queries may be saved and reused, and you can view any exceptions you may have captured for the item. Perform this activity on an ongoing basis. For more detailed information refer to "Exception Inquiry Screens" and "EDIM702 -Query Request Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". Maintenance/Inquiry Maintenance and Inquiry is a user-initiated activity performed by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options function of the Online Facility is used to define the control parameters for running Maintenance and Inquiries against the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository, Profiles, and Master Index. Maintenance options allow for archiving and restoring purged data. Perform this activity as required. For more details refer to “Extended System Management Screens” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions,” and to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 1, “Batch Program Descriptions”. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-21 How To Get Help How To Get Help IBM® Sterling Customer Center provides a wealth of online resources that are available around the clock to enrich your business experience with IBM® Sterling Gentran®. By using Sterling Customer Center, you gain access to many self-support tools, including a Knowledge-Base, Documentation, Education, and Case Management. Access Sterling Customer Center at http:// customer.sterlingcommerce.com. Once logged in, select Support Center from the top navigation menu, and then locate Sterling Gentran product-specific support information from the left navigation menu. Additionally, our Customer Support Reference Guide outlines our support hours, contact information, and key information that will enhance your support experience with us. For detailed information about Customer Support, please refer to the Customer Support Reference Guide accessible from the login page. (http://customer.sterlingcommerce.com) 1-22 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 2 Implementation Process This chapter describes the major steps to effectively implement Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint into your environment. This chapter is organized into the following sections: Topic Page Overview of Implementation.................................................................................................. 2-2 Develop a Configuration Strategy .......................................................................................... 2-4 Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System ................................................................... 2-11 Operational Procedures......................................................................................................... 2-20 Optional Features.................................................................................................................. 2-23 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-1 Overview of Implementation Overview of Implementation The instructions in this chapter assume that the user performing these activities has the following: • An understanding of the business requirements that Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint addresses. • Familiarity with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint features and functions. • A working knowledge of the environment into which Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will be installed. Refer to Chapter 1, “Product Description” and to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/ OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide “Installing Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint” chapter to fulfil these prerequisites. To implement your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system, complete the following major activities: Note: With the exception of the tasks outlined in the "Set up the System" section, you can perform the implementation process activities before, or in parallel with, the installation. However, you must perform System Setup after installation has been completed (including the verification test). 2-2 Develop a Configuration Strategy You can configure Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in a variety of ways to meet a wide range of requirements. The “Develop a Configuration Strategy” section focuses on how to implement Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to meet your requirements. In particular, you should analyze your EDI environment for exceptions that you would like to monitor. If you have Tracking Management, you should determine which end-to-end paths you would like to track. That is, which applications would you like to include in tracking. System Setup After establishing a configuration strategy, you need to set up various files and parameters. The “Set up the System” section describes the steps for completing system setup. Operational Procedures Based on the standards and policies of your environment, you may be required to establish certain procedures. The "Operational Procedures" section outlines these procedures. Optional Features Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides a number of optional features for managing the system, exceptions, and tracking. Depending on the capabilities of your environment, you may choose to implement these features. This activity describes these features, their benefits, and how to implement them. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Overview of Implementation Figure 2.1 illustrates the implementation process. Develop a Configuration Strategy Software Installation Operational Procedures Optional Features Viewpoint Installation Verification System Setup Implementation Test Production Figure 2.1 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Implementation Process IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-3 Develop a Configuration Strategy Develop a Configuration Strategy This section outlines decisions you need to make to configure Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Use these decisions as a guideline in setting up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. You may implement Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in a variety of ways to meet your specific requirements. The main considerations for your configuration strategy are as follows: Consideration Page Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users and security 2-4 Staging files 2-6 Tracking Points 2-7 Exception Management 2-8 Tracking Management (optional module) 2-9 Sterling Gentran databank configuration 2-10 These considerations are described in detail below. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users and Security Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users fall into two categories: The first category of users performs administrative tasks such as system set up and maintenance. The second category performs end user tasks, for example: resolving problems that can occur with a business document or performing a query on a particular document. To determine your requirements for defining Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users, refer to the following references in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions.” These references describe functions used for administrative and business purposes: Administrative Type User: System Options Screens Extended System Management Screens Exception Management Screens Tracking Management Screens Business Type User: Exception Management Screens Exception Inquiry Screens Tracking Management Screens Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users are defined using the Sterling Gentran:Basic Security Maintenance functions at the following four levels: • • • • 2-4 Division (data access) Access (product access) Authority Level (function access) Recipient (user access) IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Develop a Configuration Strategy Division Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint assigns a division to data captured for Exception Inquiry or Tracking Management from the Partner profile used to process the data. A division is also assigned to each User ID in Security Maintenance to control online access to data. The division of the User ID and the data is compared in the following manner: • Users with division 000 have access to all data. • Data with a division of spaces is visible to all users. • Users with a specific division (for example, 100) may only access data with the same division. Access Access controls which options display on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Menu for the User ID. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint options display on the security selection list. Authority Level When a User ID is granted access to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint subsystem, an Authority Level must also be specified to define the scope of view and update rights. The following Authority levels are provided: Level Has access to... Permitted to... System Administrator System Options Extended System Management Exception Management Exception Inquiry Tracking Management view and update EDI Coordinator Exception Management Exception Inquiry Tracking Management. view and update Business User Exception Inquiry Tracking Management view and update Business User (no update) Exception Inquiry Tracking Management view Recipient A User ID can also have access to the Exception Inquiry subsystem limited to a specific Recipient ID. This security level is used to limit access of sensitive data to only those staff members with a need to know. If this security level is not implemented, a User ID will have access to Exception data for all Recipient IDs. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem” for complete details about Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Security Options. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-5 Develop a Configuration Strategy Staging Files Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint uses staging files as temporary holding areas for data and information received from the Gateways. This data is then processed by the Post Processor, based on the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint profiles you defined (refer to Chapter 1, “System Architecture”). You must determine how you will configure the staging files. Use the following rules and guidelines to determine your staging area configuration. Rules • You must always define and enable at least one staging file for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to capture data. • Only one tracking point may access a staging file at one time. • A maximum of 20 staging files may be enabled. Recommended Configuration When setting up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, you should define and enable one staging file per Tracking Point. This single staging file will be used as the temporary holding area for both Exception Management and Tracking Management. The advantages of this configuration are: • It maximizes system throughput. • It allows critical processing to be isolated to a single staging file. The following table shows an example of this strategy: Direction Tracking Point Staging File Outbound Mapper 1 Outbound Editor 2 Inbound Editor 3 Inbound Mapper 4 n/a Ack Reconciliation 5 Chapter 2, “Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System,” provides the steps necessary for defining staging files. 2-6 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Develop a Configuration Strategy Tracking Points Decide which tracking points to monitor with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. For Exception Management and Tracking Management, the available tracking points are: Sterling Gentran Processes: EBDI001 Inbound Editor EBDI002 Outbound Editor EBDI041 Inbound Mapper EBDI042 Outbound Mapper EDID205 Outbound EDI Databank Extract EDID255 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound EDI Databank Extract EDID405 Inbound Application Databank Extract EDID455 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Application Databank Extract EDID510 Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor EDID515 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgement Reconciliation/ Monitor EDID850 Network Reconciliation/Monitor EDIR001 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Editor EDIR002 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Editor EDIR041 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Mapper EDIR042 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Mapper Sterling Connect Processes: MAILBOX Sterling Connect STOUTL Sterling Connect Offline Utilities EDIR314 Sterling Connect Outbound Interface EDIR316 Sterling Connect Inbound Interface For Tracking Management users only You may also enable user applications for Tracking Management by defining them as User Tracking Points, and by having the applications call the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint User Gateway. An important consideration for tracking is that in order to track an item from one tracking point to another (for example, business application to the Network), all tracking points in between must be enabled for tracking. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-7 Develop a Configuration Strategy Refer to “Tracking Management” below and the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter for more details on defining User Tracking Points. Exception Management The decisions you make for implementing Exception Management are at the heart of the implementation process. Identifying which exceptions should be captured, who should be notified, and how they should be notified will determine your initial configuration for managing exceptions. To simplify this portion of your configuration strategy, refer to the following guidelines: Identify Exceptions Identify the events occurring in your Sterling Gentran or Sterling Connect processing that you wish to monitor/manage with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint (example: Inbound Mapping Errors, a purchase order was just received from partner ABC). For complete details on the available processes and criteria for exception capture, refer to: • “EDIM624 - Exception Capture Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". • “User Exit Parameters Chart” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter. Identify Recipients You can directly notify the person or persons responsible for responding to exceptions. Identify these people as recipients and associate them with the exceptions for which they are responsible. Identify Automated Systems If your environment has automated systems available (for example, e-mail), you may also use these systems for responding to captured exceptions. Identify the systems and associate them with exceptions and/or recipients. Use the information derived from this guideline to complete the step, Build Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles in the “Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System” section of this chapter. Chapter 3, Tutorial, in this document also details the steps required for managing exceptions. Tracking Management (optional module) Tracking Management enables you to determine the status and history of an item (for example, a business document) as it travels through the extended EDI system. The more processes or applications enabled for tracking, the more complete will be the history for the item. Note: Use caution when deciding to track all documents or items, as this will require a significant amount of storage. 2-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Develop a Configuration Strategy Enable Tracking Management on the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint record in the Sterling Gentran Configuration file. Once enabled, all valid tracking points generate and pass information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. In order to limit the volume of data that is to be tracked, Sterling Gentran:Basic contains flags in the partner profile that indicates whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking is enabled. By default, tracking information is retained for all levels unless the indicator value is set to No. You can limit tracking communications information using remote IDs. Specify the remote IDs to be included or excluded from Tracking Management on the Tracking Point Remote ID Control screen (EDIM606). Refer to "EDIM606 -Tracking Point Remote ID Control Screen" in Chapter 5, Screen Descriptions, of this document. For deciding on applications to track, several options are available: Track using Sterling Gentran Tracking Points only This is the simplest approach to tracking, and involves the least amount of effort. By using the Sterling Gentran tracking points you could, for example, track a document (by the document user reference) through the outbound processes (Mapper, Editor, Databank Extract), when the Network processed it (Network Reconciliation), and when the trading partner validated it (Acknowledgment Reconciliation). You can track the same data by its EDI forms (for example, transactions, functional groups, and interchanges) as long as the identifiers are known. You can follow a similar approach for inbound data as well. Add Sterling Connect Tracking Points For Sterling Gentran:Plus users, communication items or batches can also be tracked for Sterling Connect, Sterling Connect Offline Utilities (STOUTL), and Sterling Connect Outbound and Inbound Interfaces. You can now track a document from user application, to the translation process, to communications. Add Business Applications as Tracking Points The next approach to Tracking Management is to add business applications to the tracking process. For example, you can enable a receivables system to call the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway so that a Tracking Management user would know when an invoice was generated in the receivables system. The invoice document can then be tracked through the entire EDI process. Adding applications as tracking points involves defining the tracking point, enabling the application to call the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway, and passing or accepting a fixed format Trace ID record. This Trace ID links the document, or item, throughout the tracking path. Add Other Operational Applications as Tracking Points Similar to adding business applications, you can enable other operational applications for tracking by having them call the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway. For example, you can add a communications package to the tracking path by having it call the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway from an exit. The application must be able to pass, or accept, the fixed format Trace ID record used with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management or a user program needs to be written to parse out this record prior to running the communications application. In this situation, the exit used in the application would need to reconcile the status information with the Trace ID information created by the parsing program prior to calling the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-9 Develop a Configuration Strategy More information on User Gateways can be found in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter. Sterling Gentran Databank Configuration Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint uses much of the data and information that is stored with the Sterling Gentran:Basic and/or Sterling Gentran:Realtime Databanks. Note: The Databank associated with any Sterling Gentran tracking point that is going to be monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint must be configured to have at least a Directory-level configuration. For example, if the Outbound Editor is going to be monitored, the Outbound EDI databank must be configured with Directory-level. If Exception Inquiry or Tracking Management users access the Data Display, the databank for the tracking point must be configured with Message Store-level. For more details about the Data Display, refer to Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". 2-10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System This section outlines the steps for setting up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. Use the information that was developed in the previous section, “Develop a Configuration Strategy” here. Note: This section assumes that the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Installation Verification has been completed for all Sterling Gentran products (that is, Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Gentran:Plus, Sterling Gentran:Realtime) that are enabled for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint monitoring. The steps required to set up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system are: Step Step 1 Action Page 1. Identify where Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will be set up initially 2-11 2. Re-allocate files for production space requirements 2-11 3. Review/Revise CICS Region 2-14 4. Set up Tracking Points 2-15 5. Revise Sterling Gentran JCL 2-15 6. Update the Sterling Gentran Configuration file 2-15 7. Define Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users 2-16 8. Build Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles 2-16 9. Build Tracking Management Queries 2-16 10. Set Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Options 2-17 11. Review/Revise Databank Configuration 2-17 12. Integrate communications monitoring 2-17 Identify where Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will be set up initially The first step in setting up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system is to identify where Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will reside initially. The alternatives are to set up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in a production environment immediately or set up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in a test environment and then migrate to production. Note: It is recommended that Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint be implemented in a test environment initially. Step 2 Re-allocate files for production space requirements Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint uses Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint-specific files, as well as the existing databank files for detailed status information and data. The following files are part of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system: IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-11 Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System File 2-12 Description Archive file The Archive file contains items removed from the Profiles, Repository, and Master Index files. Configuration file The Configuration file contains records to control system level features and options. JCL file The JCL file contains entries for JCL streams, which are submitted for execution through online functions. Profile file The Profile file contains the rules, which are used to control the system, as defined in Extended System Management, Exception Management, and Tracking Management. Prompt file The Prompt file contains system information which is used for online prompt requests. Repository file The Repository file contains information relating to exceptions detected by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The repository includes control/status information relating to the exception, system messages relating to the exception, as well as user entered exception management information relating to the exception. The Repository file also contains status and history information relating to items tracked by Tracking Management. Staging files The Staging files pass data from a Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint enabled system to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Staging files contain system messages issued by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint enabled system as well as control, status, and tracking information. Staging TSQs The Staging TSQs pass data from the Online Gateway, Online User Gateway and the Communications Post Processor to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Staging TSQs contain system messages as well as control, status, tracking and communications information. Master Index This file is only available with the Tracking Management module. The Master Index is used by the Tracking Management module, to store information about each item or document to be tracked. The Master Index provides fast access to information by providing "fast paths," or alternate keys, for common reference criteria such as User Reference and Partner. Trace ID file This file is only available with the Tracking Management module. The Trace ID file is used by batch processes to ensure the uniqueness of Trace IDs associated with items as they travel through the extended EDI system. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System File Description Online Trace ID file This file is only available with the Tracking Management module. The Online Trace ID file is used by online processes to ensure the uniqueness of Trace IDs associated with items as they travel through the extended EDI system. Sterling Connect Failure Codes file This file is only available for Sterling Gentran:Plus users. The Sterling Connect Failure Codes file contains the text messages associated to communications failure codes. Sterling Connect Cross Reference file This file is only available for Sterling Gentran:Plus users. The Sterling Connect Cross Reference file contains the record of which communications batch numbers were re-assigned after running the Sterling Connect maintenance utilities. Communications Queue file This file is only available for Sterling Gentran:Plus users. The Communications Queue file is used to pass Sterling Connect Communications Log file information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Trace ID Cross Reference file This file is only available for Sterling Gentran:Plus users of the Tracking Management module. The Trace ID Cross Reference file is used to store Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Trace IDs assigned to communications batch numbers. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system uses standard VSAM file sharing features between CICS and batch processing. All Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files are updated in either CICS or batch, and are defined with VSAM Shareoptions of 2,3 except for the Communications Queue file and the Trace ID Cross Reference file which have VSAM Shareoptions of 4,3. Multiple Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint enabled processes, which run concurrently, can not access the same Staging file. Each process, which may run concurrently, must have a unique Staging file. When performing maintenance, using the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry program, the files being processed must not be open for update access in CICS. Inquiry may be performed while CICS has update access. The following files will likely require re-allocation after installation verification to meet the space requirements for your implementation of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint: • Profiles file • Repository file • Master Index (Tracking Management only) • Staging file(s) • Communications Queue file (Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) • CICS Auxiliary Storage IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-13 Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Note: Staging Temporary Storage Queues (TSQs) are stored as CICS Auxiliary TSQs, which are created as entries on the CICS Auxiliary Temporary Storage (DFHTEMP) data set. Sterling Gentran:Realtime users should examine their requirements for CICS Auxiliary Storage. Enabling Exception Management and Tracking Management for all business activity uses a considerable amount of storage. This is especially true of Tracking Management as an item can travel through many processes and transforms several times. Review space requirements carefully and reallocate depending on the volume of transactions at your installation. Perform the following activities for each file: Step 3 1. Calculate the space requirements for each file. For detailed information on space calculations for these files, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Installation Guide “File Descriptions” chapter. 2. Define and initialize each file using the JCL supplied with the system. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide, Appendix A, “Library Descriptions” for a list of the JCL supplied with the system. Review/Revise CICS Region The CICS resource definitions and region JCL will most likely need to be revised to meet the standards of your environment. For detailed information regarding these activities, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “CICS Region Information” chapter. Perform the following activities to complete this step: 1. CICS Region JCL Add the necessary JCL statements to your CICS Region JCL. 2. File Resource Definitions Review the Resource Definitions for all Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files. 3. Transaction Resource Definitions • If you use an "Exception Action" Online Procedure (see "EDIM626 - Exception Action Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions"), add the necessary CICS Resource Definition for defining the transaction ID to initiate the Exception Action online procedure. • If you use a Tracking User Exit procedure (see “EDIM685 - System Options Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions”), add the necessary CICS Resource Definition for the transaction ID to initiate the Tracking User Exit procedure. 4. Program and Mapset Resource Definitions Review the Resource Definitions for all Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint programs. 5. 2-14 PLT Entry (optional) IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System If you initiate the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner at region start-up, add a CICS PLT entry for the Automatic System Start-Up (EDIVPLT) program. Step 4 Set up Tracking Points Use the Sterling Tracking Point Directory screen to enable the Sterling Gentran or Sterling Connect tracking points that are to be monitored (for exceptions and tracking) and disable the tracking points that will not be monitored. It is important to note that to track information along an end-to-end path (for example, the outbound path), all tracking points along the path must be enabled. Breaking the chain will prohibit the display of the complete history for an item. Refer to “EDIM602 - Sterling Tracking Point Directory Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions,” and Chapter 3, “Tutorial” for detailed information on enabling and disabling Tracking Points. For Tracking Management, you may also enable user applications for tracking. This involves defining the user tracking point, and enabling the application to support a fixed format Trace ID record and call the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway. Both online and batch applications are allowed for tracking. Refer to “EDIM610 - User Tracking Point Directory Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions”. Also, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter. Step 5 Revise Sterling Gentran JCL Any JCL you use for running programs that are defined as Tracking Points must be revised to include the JCL statements required by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The following JCL must be inserted: For Exception and Tracking Management: //EDIVP DD DSN=...,DISP=SHR - Viewpoint Profiles file //EDIVSF DD DSN=...,DISP=SHR - Viewpoint Staging file For Tracking Management: //EDIVT DD DSN=...,DISP=SHR - Trace ID file For Sterling Gentran:Plus users of Tracking Management: //EDIVPPX DD DSN=...,DISP=SHR - Trace ID Cross Reference file Only required for the following tracking points: Step 6 EBDI001 Inbound Editor EBDI002 Outbound Editor EDID205 Outbound EDI Databank Extract Update the Sterling Gentran Configuration file Update the Sterling Gentran system Configuration file to include the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint configuration entry. This adds the required Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint configuration information to your Sterling Gentran environment. Refer to “Update the Configuration file” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/ OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide “Installing Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint” chapter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-15 Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Step 7 Define Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users Based on the results from “Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users and Security” in the section, “Develop a Configuration Strategy,” define your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users using the Sterling Gentran Security Maintenance option. Step 8 Build Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles Based on the results from "Exception Management" in the section, "Develop a Configuration Strategy,” you may now build your initial Exception Profiles. Perform the following activities for each profile you wish to build: 1. Define the Exception Capture Definition Refer to "EDIM624 - Exception Capture Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions" and Chapter 3, "Tutorial" to complete this activity. Note that any Exception Profile that is created can use these Capture definitions. 2. Define the Exception Action Definition (optional) An Exception Profile may include Exception Actions for automating the response to an exception. Refer to the “EDIM626 -Exception Action Definition Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions,” and Chapter 3, “Tutorial”. For detailed information on implementing the required user interface for using Exception Actions, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter. Note that any Exception Profile that is created can use these Exception Action definitions. 3. Create the Exception Profile Use the Exception Profile to combine all the components you have defined for responding to an exception. The capture definition, recipient and, optionally, the action definition are all joined in the Exception Profile for automating the response to an exception. Refer to "EDIM622 - Exception Profile Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions" and Chapter 3, "Tutorial," for detailed information on defining an Exception Profile. Step 9 Build Tracking Management Queries Based on the results from "Tracking Management" in the section, "Develop a Configuration Strategy,” you may now build your initial Tracking Management Queries. These are queries that you know you will use repeatedly in monitoring your environment. Alternatively, you can perform queries in an ad hoc way on a day-to-day basis, and save them for when more knowledge of required tracking information is determined. Perform the following activities for each query you wish to save: 1. Establish the Query It may take a number of iterations of setting search criteria (both basic and extended) and analyzing the results before you have established a query that produces manageable results. Refer to "EDIM702 - Query Request Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". 2. 2-16 Save the Query IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Once you have established a query, you may save it using the Add function from the Query Request screens. Refer to Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions" for more details. Step 10 Set Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Options This step completes the options you need to set for configuring your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. Refer to "EDIM685 - System Options Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions," for detailed information regarding these options. You must set the following options: Step 11 • System Status • System Trace • Scan Interval • Error User Exit (Optional) • Error User Exit Data (Optional) • Tracking User Exit (Optional) • Staging file Control • Staging TSQ Full Review/Revise Databank Configuration Based on the results from “Sterling Gentran Databank Configuration” in the section, “Develop a Configuration Strategy,” you should now reconfigure your Databank Configuration. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide, Appendix A, “Implementing the Databank Facility,” for complete details. Step 12 Integrate communications monitoring For Sterling Gentran:Plus users integrating communications monitoring into their Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system, the following changes are required to the Sterling Connect and/or Sterling Gentran:Plus systems. Sterling Connect Changes Modify the Sterling Connect Options Definition File (ODF) to specify the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Log Exit program: XLOG=EDIVLX or EDIVLXU For more information about the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Log Exit programs, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “Batch Program Descriptions” chapter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-17 Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Add the following DD statement to the JCL for starting the online portion of your communications system (Sterling Connect:): //EDIVCQ DD DSN=GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.VSAM.EDI.EDIVCQ,DISP=SHR Include the load library for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Log Exit module by adding the following DD statement to the STEPLIB, or JOBLIB concatenation, in the JCL for starting the online portion of the communications system (Sterling Connect). // DD DSN=GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.CONNECT.LOAD,DISP=SHR Sterling Gentran:Plus JCL Changes In the JCL to execute the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities ADD function, change the DD statement for the SYSPRINT and REPORTS files to save the reports to cataloged data sets as follows: //SYSPRINT DD DSN=GENTRAN.V6X6.GPL.ADD.SYSPRINT, // DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE), // UNIT=DISK, // VOL=SER=XXXXXX, // SPACE=(TRK,(5,5),RLSE), // DCB=(RECFM=FBA,LRECL=133,BLKSIZE=1330) //REPORTS DD DSN=GENTRAN.V6X6.GPL.ADD.REPORTS, // DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE), // UNIT=DISK, // VOL=SER=XXXXXX, // SPACE=(TRK,(5,5),RLSE), // DCB=(RECFM=FBA,LRECL=133,BLKSIZE=1330) The SYSPRINT and REPORTS file data sets should be passed to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint STOUTL Report Processor program (EDIN110) as the EDIVOUXR and EDIVOURT data sets, respectively. Note: If using IBM® Sterling Connect:Enterprise® version 1.4 or higher, change the DCB parameter for the REPORTS DD statement to: DCB=(RECFM=FBA,LRECL=173,BLKSIZE=1730) In the JCL to execute the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities EXTRACT function, the DD statement for the REPORTS file should be changed to save the report to a cataloged data set as follows: //REPORTS 2-18 DD DSN=GENTRAN.V6X6.GPL.EXTRACT.REPORTS, // DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE), // UNIT=DISK, // VOL=SER=XXXXXX, IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Set Up the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System // SPACE=(TRK,(5,5),RLSE), // DCB=(RECFM=FBA,LRECL=133,BLKSIZE=1330) The REPORTS file data set should be passed to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint STOUTL Report Processor program (EDIN110) as the EDIVOURT data set. Note: If using Sterling Connect:Enterprise version 1.4 or higher, change the DCB parameter for the REPORTS DD statement to: DCB=(RECFM=FBA,LRECL=173,BLKSIZE=1730) All Sterling Gentran:Plus inbound and outbound translation JCL streams should be changed to execute the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint STOUTL Report Processor Program (EDIN110) immediately after the Offline Utilities (STOUTL). For a model of these JCL streams, refer to members INGPL (inbound) and OUTGPL (outbound) in the GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL data set. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 1, “Batch Program Descriptions” for more information about the “EDIN110 - STOUTL Report Processor”. The Sterling Gentran:Plus JCL member REORGDB should be replaced by the REORGDB member included in the GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL data set. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint version contains statements to run the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Communications Re-Org Program (EDIN120). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-19 Operational Procedures Operational Procedures Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is designed for automated operation. This section provides operational procedures for monitoring the system as well as maintaining your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files. The procedures documented are: Procedure Page Monitor System Activity 2-20 Perform File Maintenance Procedures 2-21 Dynamically Enable/Disable the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System 2-22 Dynamically Enable/Disable Tracking Points 2-22 Dynamically Enable/Disable Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles 2-22 Monitor System Activity Data captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is automatically processed in the background for the user. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides two methods for monitoring this activity: • The Online Log Display • System Options - Error User Exit The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system requires a minimal amount of human intervention under normal circumstances. Online Log Display The Online Log Display provides a real-time view of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint online system. As the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system runs (largely as background CICS tasks), it records errors and other critical events on the log. The Online Log can be displayed for immediate diagnosis of system conditions. Enable the Systems Options - System Trace feature to display additional detail on the log. For detailed information regarding the Online Log Display refer to “EDIM688 - Online Log Display Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions”. System Options - Error User Exit The System Options - Error User Exit feature allows the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system to report system errors to a user supplied program. The message is then forwarded by the user supplied program to a central automation system or an operator to be notified. Specify this option from the System Options screen. Refer to “System Options - Error User Exit” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter for detailed information on using this option. 2-20 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Operational Procedures Perform File Maintenance Procedures Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides flexible user control for maintaining the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files. Using the “Maintenance/Inquiry Options” screen in “Extended System Management,” you may create definitions for handling all of your file maintenance needs. Use the EDIN140 - Maintenance/Inquiry batch program to maintain the Profiles, Repository and Master Index files off-line. Perform housekeeping to remove items that are no longer required. An example of housekeeping would be to remove all exceptions from the repository that have been closed. The files that require periodic housekeeping are: • Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles • Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository • Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Master Index (Tracking Management only) Perform the following steps for each file: 1. Create the maintenance definition(s) required for maintaining the file. Refer to "EDIM609 - Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions,” for detailed information regarding the wide range of selection criteria available for file maintenance control. 2. Create the JCL required for running the Maintenance/Inquiry program (EDIN140). Sample JCL has been provided with the system. Refer to program “EDIN140 - Maintenance/Inquiry” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “Batch Program Descriptions” chapter for detailed information on setting up these control parameters. 3. Add this JCL to your operations processing schedule. Note: The batch program EDIN140 - Maintenance/Inquiry must have exclusive control of the file(s) while performing a Purge, Restore, or Archive operation. EDIN140 does not require exclusive file control while performing the Inquiry operation. The frequency for performing housekeeping against these files will be based on your volumes, space calculations, and retention requirements. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-21 Operational Procedures Dynamically Enable/Disable the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allows dynamic enabling or disabling of the entire system while the CICS region is running. To manually disable the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint online background processing system, use the System Options screen to change the System Status to disabled. Disabling the system causes the following state: 1. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner will shut down (that is, the staging area is not processed). 2. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway will still pass data from Tracking Points to the Staging Area. To automate the process, run a batch utility program that can start the CICS transaction EDIW to execute the System Status Toggle Program (EDIVTOGL). Note: The specific batch utility program used to automate the process is site dependant. You should consult your systems programmers to determine which utility to use. Dynamically Enable/Disable Tracking Points Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allows dynamic enabling or disabling of individual Tracking Points while the CICS region is running. To disable a Tracking Point, use the Tracking Point Directory screen to change the Tracking Point Status to disabled. While a Tracking Point is disabled, the Gateway rejects any requests from that Tracking Point (that is, data will not be passed through to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint). Exceptions that were captured prior to the tracking point being disabled are still available to Exception Inquiry Users. Dynamically Enable/Disable Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allows dynamic enabling or disabling of individual Exception Profiles while the CICS region is running. To disable an Exception Profile, use the Exception Profile Directory screen to change the Profile Status to disabled. While a profile is disabled data in the staging area for that profile will not be processed by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 2-22 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Optional Features Optional Features Optional Features are described in this section. These features enable you to take full advantage of the powerful functions Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides. The Optional Features described in this section are: Feature Page System Options - Error User Exit 2-23 Trading Profile Integration 2-23 Exception Actions 2-24 User Messages 2-26 User Procedures 2-26 Tracking User Exit 2-27 System Options - Error User Exit The System Options - Error User Exit provides the capability for a user-supplied program to be initiated when a severe condition occurs within Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. A System Options - Error User Exit may be specified from the System Options screen (EDIM685). Any severe condition occurring in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint (for example, staging file full) causes this exit to be initiated. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Error User Exit passes the system message ID to the user program. Any value entered in the Data field on the System Options screen (EDIM685) is also passed to the user program. Possible severe conditions are: • Staging file full • Post Processor cannot continue (I/O error) For detailed information on the use of the “Systems Options - Error User Exit” refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter. Trading Profile Integration Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint allows you to control the monitoring of documents based upon your Sterling Gentran trading profiles. You can control whether or not documents should be monitored (for exceptions and/or tracking status) by completing the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint options in Sterling Gentran:Basic Partner Maintenance. For Exception Management, the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint option can be specified on any or all three of the trading profile levels: Control Information, Group Information, and Transaction Information. It is recommended that all three levels be specified to provide the maximum coverage for exceptions. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-23 Optional Features For Tracking Management, you can also specify the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint option on any or all three of the trading profile levels: Control Information, Group Information, and Transaction Information. How it is specified is particularly important for Tracking Management as this module can generate a large amount of data depending on the volume of transactions. Use the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Trading Profile option for the following processes in Sterling Gentran: Tracking Points Description EBDI001 Inbound Editor EBDI002 Outbound Editor EBDI041 Inbound Mapper EBDI042 Outbound Mapper EDIR001 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Editor EDIR002 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Editor EDIR041 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Mapper EDIR042 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Mapper For both Exception Management and Tracking Management, there may be no need to make any changes to your trading profiles. The default for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in trading profiles is YES. This implies that even though the option appears as blank in your trading profile, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint still monitors that relationship based on your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles. You can override this default on the Configuration file so that a blank for Exception Management flags and Tracking Management flags can mean Yes or No. For detailed information regarding the use of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Trading Profile option, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide “The Partner Subsystem” chapter. Exception Actions Exception Actions enable you to fully automate your responses to exceptions that occur. An example of an exception action would be to send a FAX message to your trading partner notifying them that you have rejected their invoice. The user program, initiated by an Exception Action, may be a batch program or an online program. If the user program is an online program, you only need to perform steps 1 and 2. If the user program is a batch program, you must perform all of the following steps: 1. Prepare Interface IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter documents the “Exception Action” in detail, specifically the communications area that is passed to the user program from Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 2-24 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Optional Features Review this section to determine how the user program will receive data from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Action. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-25 Optional Features 2. Define the Exception Action Refer to "EDIM626 - Exception Action Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions," for details on how to define an exception action. Note: If the user program is a batch program, the Batch Procedure field must be specified as the actual program name of the user program. 3. Create Batch JCL Using the sample JCL provided for program "EDIN200 - Batch Action Processor," create the JCL necessary for running the user supplied batch program. 4. Load the Online JCL file Using the program “EDIG010 - Online JCL File Maintenance,” load the JCL created in step 3 into the Online JCL file. For detailed information on using the program “EDIG010 - Online JCL file Maintenance,” refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “Batch Program Descriptions” chapter. User Messages User Messages allow you to define messages which have explanations that are relevant and meaningful to you. User Messages may be associated with Capture Definitions. By attaching a User Message to an Exception Capture Definition, the User Message is available to you while you are working on exceptions. The User Message can be used online, at the time and place you require the information to resolve the exception. The User Message is displayed for the current exception from the "EDIM662 - User Message Display Screen". Refer to Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions" for detailed information. Refer to Chapter 3, "Tutorial" for an example of how to use User Messages. User Procedures User Procedures allow you to document actions, steps or procedures that should be followed when resolving an exception. User Procedures may be attached to Exception Capture Definitions. By attaching a User Procedure to an Exception Capture Definition, the User Procedure is available to end users while they are working on exceptions. The User Procedure can be used online, at the time and place the end user requires the information to resolve the exception. The User Procedure may be retrieved from Exception Inquiry on the "EDIM663 -User Procedure Display Screen". Refer to Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions" for more information. Refer to Chapter 3, "Tutorial" for an example of how to use User Procedures. 2-26 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Optional Features Tracking User Exit The Tracking Management module provides a tracking user exit that can be invoked each time an item is processed by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Post Processor. This provides the ability to post tracking information to an alternate repository, such as a database from which you can perform your own queries or reports. The Tracking User Exit must be an online program and is specified in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint System Options as a transaction ID. An online program is used to avoid the amount of overhead and possible system flooding that might occur if batch jobs are submitted as each item (for example, transaction or document) is processed by the Post Processor. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter for details on the communications area used with this user exit, and on how the user program receives data from Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-27 Optional Features 2-28 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial This chapter is organized into the Exception Management Tutorial and the Tracking Management Tutorial. It is designed to provide a new user with a basic understanding of setting up, managing exceptions and using Tracking Management with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Chapter 3 may be used in two ways: you can read and perform the tutorial from beginning to end (which is recommended for new users), or you can refer to the actions listed below for a quick reference to the specific tasks of using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Topic Page Exception Management Tutorial Determining Exception Management Business Requirements ....................................... 3-5 Sample 1 - Inbound Error Rejection ............................................................................... 3-5 Sample 2 - Outbound Mapping Errors ............................................................................ 3-6 Sample 3 - Overdue Acknowledgements from Trading Partners ................................... 3-6 Sample 4 - Alert when Specific Partner Sends Specific Document ............................... 3-7 Sample 5 - Alert when Communications Data is Received from a Specific Mailbox..... 3-7 Exception Management Tutorial Setup ............................................................................. 3-8 Set Up Logon .................................................................................................................. 3-8 Set Up Partners and Maps ............................................................................................. 3-10 Exception Setup ................................................................................................................. 3-11 Selecting Tracking Points ............................................................................................. 3-11 Defining User Messages and Procedures ...................................................................... 3-14 Defining Exception Capture .......................................................................................... 3-19 Defining Exception Action ........................................................................................... 3-22 Building Exception Profiles .......................................................................................... 3-25 Exception Management Tutorial Processing ................................................................... 3-29 Tutorial Batch Processing ............................................................................................. 3-29 Exception Inquiry .............................................................................................................. 3-31 Reviewing Exceptions ................................................................................................... 3-31 Transferring Exceptions ................................................................................................ 3-38 Closing Exceptions ....................................................................................................... 3-40 Deleting Exceptions ...................................................................................................... 3-44 Requesting Exception Management Reports .................................................................. 3-45 Creating an Inquiry Definition ...................................................................................... 3-45 Generating Reports ....................................................................................................... 3-46 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-1 Exception Management Housekeeping ............................................................................ 3-47 Creating a Maintenance Definition ............................................................................... 3-47 Performing File Maintenance ........................................................................................ 3-47 Exception Management Tutorial Reset ........................................................................... 3-48 Tutorial Reset Instructions ............................................................................................ 3-48 Tracking Management Tutorial Determining Tracking Management Business Requirements ....................................... 3-51 Tracking Management Tutorial Setup.............................................................................. 3-52 Tutorial Setup ................................................................................................................ 3-52 Tracking Setup .............................................................................................................. 3-52 Defining User Tracking Points ..................................................................................... 3-52 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing .................................................................... 3-56 Tutorial Batch Processing ............................................................................................. 3-56 Tracking Query Requests .............................................................................................. 3-57 Using Saved Query Requests ........................................................................................ 3-58 Ad Hoc and Extended Query Requests ......................................................................... 3-64 Reviewing Exceptions from Tracking Management .................................................... 3-72 Requesting Tracking Management Reports .................................................................... 3-77 Creating an Inquiry Definition ...................................................................................... 3-77 Generating Reports ....................................................................................................... 3-78 Tracking Management Housekeeping ............................................................................. 3-79 Creating a Maintenance Definition ............................................................................... 3-79 Performing File Maintenance ........................................................................................ 3-79 Tracking Management Tutorial Reset ............................................................................. 3-80 Tutorial Reset Instructions ............................................................................................ 3-80 3-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Management Tutorial Exception Management Tutorial This Tutorial will demonstrate how to perform the basic tasks required to use the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. By navigating through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint screens and performing common tasks, you will become acquainted with the functions used for managing exceptions. It is recommended that you read Chapter 1, "Product Description" before performing the tutorial. The Product Description will familiarize you with the features, concepts, and terminology of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. You may also refer to the Glossary. Using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to manage exceptions can be described in the following procedures: Determining Exception Management Business Requirements The first step in managing an exception is to identify what the exception is, and how the exception should be responded to. “Determining Exception Management Business Requirements” is an analysis task. A thorough analysis will simplify exception setup. The tutorial provides five sample business requirements that may be used as models for your own implementation. The sample business requirements are described later in “Determining Exception Management Business Requirements”. Exception Management Tutorial Setup Tutorial Setup provides information for setting up the tutorial. Exception Setup Exception Setup allows you to define which events are exceptions, and how they should be responded to. The Tutorial provides a complete walk-through for setting up the first sample business requirement. Setup can then be repeated for the other four sample business requirements. Exception Management Tutorial Processing Tutorial Processing provides instructions for the tutorial batch processing. Exception Inquiry Exception Inquiry provides you with the ability to respond to and resolve exceptions that have been captured. Exception Inquiry is the primary task you will perform daily using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The tutorial walks you through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint "review and response" capabilities. Exception Management Reports A wide range of reporting criteria and procedures for requesting and printing reports are provided. Exception Management Housekeeping Housekeeping provides operational flexibility for maintaining your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-3 Exception Management Tutorial Housekeeping procedures are described at the end of the tutorial. Maintenance procedures for deleting/archiving exceptions from Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are summarized. Exception Management Tutorial Reset Tutorial Reset provides instructions for resetting the tutorial. Detailed information for all Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint screens is provided in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". To integrate Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint into your EDI processing, refer to Chapter 2, "Implementation Process". Tips for setting up and using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. • Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides predefined tracking points for all of the Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime system processes. For Sterling Gentran:Plus or Sterling Gentran:Realtime installations, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint also provides tracking points from the Sterling Connect communications system. Your exception tracking will be from these predefined points. • Do your business requirements analysis first. You will determine what information you want to track - this should be matched to the predefined tracking points. Also, you will want to determine what response you require for notification when an exception occurs, both system action and human action. • It is a good idea to write several User Messages and User Procedures that clarify exceptions and enter them into the system. You can then select these messages and procedures when you are building new Exception Profiles. • It is recommended that the first exception that you set up parallels a manual process you already do. If you set up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to track something you do not currently track, it may be difficult for you to know if you have completed the setup properly. For example, you read printed Sterling Gentran reports every day looking for overdue acknowledgements. You can easily set up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to monitor this for you. You can use both Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint and the printed reports for a time to confirm your setup, before you move on to the next exception setup. 3-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Determining Exception Management Business Requirements Determining Exception Management Business Requirements Five sample business requirements are provided as examples of exceptions that a company may wish to monitor. These samples represent the kind of information that would be generated from your "Determining Business Requirements" analysis. The sample company sends purchase orders and receives invoices. In the course of doing business, your EDI staff wants to have some notification of certain exceptions that may occur during this process. The five samples provided monitor the following exceptions: Sample 1 - Inbound Error Rejection Sample 2 - Outbound Mapping Errors Sample 3 - Overdue Acknowledgements from Partners Sample 4 - Alert when specific partner sends specific document. Sample 5 - Alert when communications data is received from a specific mailbox. Sample 1 - Inbound Error Rejection The accounts payable department needs to be notified whenever an invoice that has been sent to them gets rejected during inbound EDI compliance checking. A FAX should be sent to the AP department as the alert when this event occurs. Also, a user message and procedure should be attached to the exception, for use by the AP clerk during resolution. Your analysis determines that to automate this process and track using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint you will need to set up the following: Recipient: AP Department User Message: “Critical Error - Rejected Invoice” User Procedure: 1. Identify Partner. 2. Get Envelope Control Numbers. 3. Notify Partner to have invoice sent again. 4. Transfer this exception to the recipient: &TEDIGRP (The EDI Department) who will close this exception out. Capture Condition: Acknowledgment Status = Rejected AND Transaction Set = 810 Action: Print FAX and send to AP Department to notify them to log on to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. This uses an Exception Action User Exit. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-5 Determining Exception Management Business Requirements Sample 2 - Outbound Mapping Errors Customer relations would like to contact their trading partner when an incorrect purchase order is sent to the trading partner. A user message and procedure should be attached to the exception for use by Customer Relations. An E-Mail should be sent to MIS to notify them that a mapping error has occurred. Your analysis determines that to automate this process and track using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, you will need to set up the following: Recipient: Customer Relations User Message: “Warning - Mapping Error Encountered” User Procedure: 1. Identify Partner. 2. Get Envelope Control Numbers. 3. Note Mapping Errors. 4. Notify Purchasing. 5. Check if order was transmitted. 6. Notify Partner if order was terminated. Capture Condition: Mapping Status GT 00. Action: Send E-Mail message to MIS. Sample 3 - Overdue Acknowledgements from Trading Partners The EDI Group wants to be notified when Acknowledgements are overdue from their trading partners. A user message and procedure should be attached to the exception for use by the EDI Group. Your analysis determines that to automate this process and track using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, you will need to set up the following: 3-6 Recipient: EDI Group User Message: “Warning - P.O. Func.Acknowledgment overdue” User Procedure: 1. Identify Partner. 2. Call Trading Partner if more than one day overdue. Capture Condition: Acknowledgment Status = O (Overdue). Action: No automatic process needs to be performed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Determining Exception Management Business Requirements Sample 4 - Alert when Specific Partner Sends Specific Document The EDI Group needs to be notified when an invoice is received from Vendor 3. A user message and procedure should be attached to the exception, for use by the EDI Group. Your analysis determines that to automate this process and track using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, you will need to set up the following: Recipient: EDI Group User Message: “Alert - Vendor 3 now sending Invoices via EDI” User Procedure: 1. Alert Accounts Payable that this partner sends invoices via EDI instead of paper. 2. Alert Purchasing that their copy of the invoice will be delivered via MIS reports and not from the vendor directly. Capture Condition: Transaction Set = 810 AND Partner = Vendor-3. Action: No automatic process needs to be performed. Sample 5 - Alert when Communications Data is Received from a Specific Mailbox This sample only applies to Sterling Gentran:Plus or Sterling Gentran:Realtime installations integrating communications monitoring into their Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management processing. The EDI Group is monitoring data from a newly installed mailbox, to confirm that the mailbox setup is correct. When data is extracted from that mailbox, the EDI Group wants to be informed through a user message. A user message should be attached to the exception for use by the EDI Group. Your analysis determines that to automate this process and track using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, you will need to set up the following: Recipient: EDI Group User Message: “Alert - Data has been received from new mailbox” User Procedure: No user procedures are required Capture Condition: Remote ID = TUTORVP AND Extracted Flag = Y. Action: No automatic process needs to be performed. Step-by-step instructions are provided in the tutorial for completely setting up the first sample. It is recommended that you repeat the tutorial for the remaining samples. Sample 5 may be omitted by users without Sterling Connect systems. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-7 Exception Management Tutorial Setup Exception Management Tutorial Setup Before you or your staff begin the tutorial, you need to perform the following tasks: • Set Up Logon • Set Up Partner Both tasks are described in detail below: Set Up Logon To perform the tutorial you will need to create a User ID. 1. Log on to Sterling Gentran. 2. Select Administrative Maintenance from the Main Menu. 3. Select Security Maintenance Menu from the Administrative Main Menu. 4. Select User ID Maintenance by typing 2 and pressing Enter. A blank User ID Maintenance-1 Screen is displayed. 5. Enter the following: 6. User ID: VPTUT Password: VTUT Division: 000 Initials: VPT Last Name: TUTORIAL First: VIEWPOINT MI: P Options Access Authority Level All N blank Press F9=Add The system will display a message to re-enter the password and to confirm the add. 7. Re-enter the password and press F9=Add. The system will display a message confirming that the user was added as displayed in the following example. 3-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Management Tutorial Setup EDIM201 4.1.2_____ USER ID MAINTENANCE-1 User Id..... VPTUT___ Password.. Division.. 000 Last Name.. TUTORIAL______________________ Last Update Date..: 06/01/11 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Initials.. VPT First.. VIEWPOINT______ MI.. P User..: XXX Options Partner Maintenance Standards Maintenance Databank Maintenance Mapping Integration Administrative Maintenance Security Maintenance Message Maintenance Configuration File Maintenance Global Parameter Maintenance USER ID ADDED Enter PF1=Help XXX Access N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) Authority Level 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) 6 (1/2/3/4/5/6) 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF5=More Opts PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF12=CANCL PF6=Nxt User 8. Press F5 to view more options. The User ID Maintenance-2 screen is displayed for the User Id VPTUT. 9. Enter the following: 10. Options Access Authority Level Plus N blank Control N blank Realtime N blank Databank Maintenance N blank Viewpoint Y 1 Press F10=Updt The system will display a message confirming that the User Id was updated as displayed in the following example. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-9 Exception Management Tutorial Setup EDIM202 __________ USER ID MAINTENANCE-2 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 User Id..... VPTUT Last Update Date..: 06/01/11 Options GENTRAN:Plus GENTRAN:Control GENTRAN:Realtime Realtime Databank Maintenance Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Recipient USER ID UPDATED Enter PF1=Help 11. User..: XXX Access N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) Authority Level 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) 3 (1/2/3) 6 (1/2/3/4/5/6) Y __________ (Y/N) 1 (1/2/3/4) (optional) PF3=Exit PF4=Prev PF10=Updt Press F3=Exit three times. You will be returned to the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. Set Up Partners and Maps The data for the Tutorial jobs is set up to use the same Partners and Maps that were used during the Installation Verification process that was performed during the Installation of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint product. If these Partners and/or Maps are not available, they must be reloaded before you can perform the Tutorial. Installation jobs LOADTPM and LOADTMPR load the Partners and Maps for Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes respectively. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide for instructions on how to execute these jobs. 3-10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup Exception Setup The tasks demonstrated in the tutorial for Exception Setup are: • Selecting Tracking Points • Defining User Messages and Procedures • Defining Exception Capture • Defining Exception Action • Building Exception Profiles The tutorial provides a complete walkthrough for setting up Sample 1. Each of these setup tasks should be repeated for the remaining samples, if applicable. Detailed information for each of the samples is provided in the tutorial. Please note that F1=Help may be used at any time during the tutorial to receive additional information. Also, some fields provide a prompt function F4=Prompt. You may use this function to display a selection list for completing the field. Selecting Tracking Points The system/process that will produce the events which form your exception must be defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint as a Tracking Point. All the Tracking Points used in the tutorial are delivered with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. The following steps show you how to review a tracking point and ensure that it is enabled. 1. Sign on to Sterling Gentran using User ID: VPTUT and Password: VTUT. 2. Select Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. EDIM600 9.0_______ VIEWPOINT MAIN MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. __ F1=Help F3=Exit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 99. System Options Extended System Management Exception Management Exception Inquiry Tracking Management Log Display F15=Logoff The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu options used for exception setup tasks are Extended System Management and Exception Management. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-11 Exception Setup 3. Select Extended System Management from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. EDIM601 9.2_______ EXTENDED SYSTEM MANAGEMENT MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. _ F1=Help 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. STERLING Tracking Point Directory STERLING Tracking Point Definition Functional Area Control Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition User Tracking Point Directory User Tracking Point Definition F3=Exit Select Sterling Tracking Point Directory from the Extended System Management. EDIM602 9.2.1____ STERLING TRACKING POINT DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable 06/01/2011 System CONNECT___ Process ALL_____ Status _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ System CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN F1=Help Process ALL EDIR314 EDIR316 MAILBOX STOUTL ALL EBDI001 EBDI002 EBDI041 EBDI042 EDID205 EDID255 F3=Exit Description CONNECT GENERAL TRACKING CONNECT OUTBOUND INTERFACE CONNECT INBOUND INTERFACE CONNECT COMMUNICATIONS PRODUCT CONNECT OFFLINE UTILITIES GENTRAN GENERAL TRACKING GENTRAN INBOUND EDITOR GENTRAN OUTBOUND EDITOR GENTRAN INBOUND MAPPER GENTRAN OUTBOUND MAPPER GENTRAN OUTBOUND EDI DATABANK EXTRACT REALTIME OUTBOUND EDI DATABANK EXTRACT F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Status E E E E E E E E E E E E F12=Cancel Note: All of the tracking points are predefined to simplify setup. 5. 3-12 Type a 5 in the Action Field next to GENTRAN EBDI001 and press Enter to view the Tracking Point definition for the Sterling Gentran Inbound Editor. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup EDIM603 9.2.2_____ STERLING TRACKING POINT DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete System . . . Process . . Description Item Type(s) Status . . . . . . . . . . . : . 06/01/2011 GENTRAN___ EBDI001_ GENTRAN_INBOUND_EDITOR_______________________ TRANSACTION, FUNCTIONAL GROUP, INTERCHANGE, RUN E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Tracking Point Control System Message A (A=All, N=None, D=Detail) Status . . . . A (A=All, N=None, D=Detail) Order By Control System . . . . Y (Y=Yes, N=No) Process . . . Y (Y=Yes, N=No) Values . . . . _______________ _______________ ______________ F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F10=FldDtl (F4=Prompt) F12=Cancel The tracking point for the Inbound Editor is displayed. Ensure the status for the tracking point is E Enabled. For detailed information on editing a Tracking Point Definition, refer to “EDIM603 Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen,” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions”. 6. Press F3=Exit twice to return to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-13 Exception Setup Defining User Messages and Procedures The following steps explain how to define User Messages and Procedures. Later in the tutorial, these user messages and procedures will be attached to exceptions for use during response and resolution. 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu select Exception Management. EDIM620 9.3_______ EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. __ F1=Help 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Exception Profile Directory Exception Profile Definition Exception Capture Directory Exception Capture Definition Exception Action Directory Exception Action Definition User Message Directory User Message Definition User Procedure Directory User Procedure Definition Usage Cross Reference F3=Exit Select User Message Directory from the Exception Management Menu. The User Message Directory is displayed. EDIM627 9.3.7_____ USER MESSAGE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 User Message ID U999999 A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ID User Message Text U999999 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM PARTNER VENDOR-2 FOR PURCHASE ORDE LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd 3-14 F8=Fwd Severity WARNING F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup 3. Type a 1 on any A (Action) line and press Enter to display a blank User Message Definition screen. 4. Enter the following information: 5. User Message ID: U003001 Severity: S Text: CRITICAL ERROR -- REJECTED INVOICE Explanation: AN INBOUND INVOICE WAS REJECTED BY THE EDI EDITOR FOR FAILURE TO PASS COMPLIANCE CHECKING. Type a 1 in the Action Field to add the information you have entered, and press Enter. A confirmation message will be displayed. Press Enter again to complete the Add. EDIM628 9.3.8_____ USER MESSAGE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage 06/01/2011 User Message ID U003001 Severity . . . S (I=Information, W=Warning, E=Error, S=Severe, F=Fatal) Text CRITICAL_ERROR_--_REJECTED__________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ Explanation AN_INBOUND_INVOICE_WAS_REJECTED_BY_THE_EDI_EDITOR_FOR_FAILURE_TO_PASS______ COMPLIANCE_CHECKING._______________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 6. F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit to return to the Exception Management Menu. To enter the user messages for samples 2, 3, 4 and optionally 5, repeat steps 2 through 6 using the following information: Sample 2 Outbound Mapping Errors User Message ID: U003002 Severity: W Text: WARNING -- MAPPING ERROR ENCOUNTERED IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-15 Exception Setup 7. Sample 3 Overdue Acknowledgments from Partners User Message ID: U003003 Severity: W Text: WARNING -- P.O. FUNC. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OVERDUE Sample 4 Alert when Specific Partner sends Specific Document User Message ID: U003004 Severity: I Text: ALERT -- VENDOR-3 NOW SENDING INVOICES VIA EDI Sample 5 Alert when Communications Data is received from a Specific Mailbox User Message ID: U003005 Severity: I Text: ALERT -- DATA HAS BEEN RECEIVED FROM NEW MAILBOX Select the User Procedure Directory screen from the Exception Management Menu. The User Procedure Directory is displayed. EDIM629 9.3.9_____ USER PROCEDURE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 Procedure @MODEL-JIT A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Procedure @MODEL-JIT Description PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING JUST-IN-TIME SUPPLIERS LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd 3-16 F8=Fwd F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup 8. Type a 1 on any A (Action) field and press Enter to display a blank User Procedure Definition screen. 9. Enter the following information: Procedure: UP3001 Description: HANDLE REJECTED INVOICES Procedure: 1. IDENTIFY PARTNER 2. GET ENVELOPE CONTROL NUMBERS 3. NOTIFY PARTNER TO HAVE INVOICE SENT AGAIN 4. TRANSFER THIS EXCEPTION TO THE RECIPIENT &TEDIGRP (EDI GROUP) WHO WILL CLOSE THIS EXCEPTION OUT 10. Type a 1 in the Action Field to add the information you have entered and press Enter. A confirmation message is displayed. Press Enter again to complete the Add. EDIM630 9.3.10____ USER PROCEDURE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage 06/01/2011 Procedure UP3001____ Description HANDLE_REJECTED_INVOICES_____________________ Procedure 1._IDENTIFY_PARTNER________________________________________________________ 2._GET_ENVELOPE_CONTROL_NUMBERS____________________________________________ 3._NOTIFY_PARTNER_TO_HAVE_INVOICE_SENT_AGAIN_______________________________ 4._TRANSFER_THIS_EXCEPTION_TO_THE_RECIPIENT_&TEDIGRP_(EDI_GROUP)_WHO_WILL__ ___CLOSE_THIS_EXCEPTION_OUT________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 11. F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit once to return to the Exception Management Menu. To enter the user procedures for samples 2, 3, and 4, repeat steps 7 through 11 using the following information: Sample 2 Outbound Mapping Errors Procedure: UP3002 Description: HANDLE MAPPING ERRORS Procedure: 1. IDENTIFY PARTNER 2. GET ENVELOPE CONTROL NUMBERS IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-17 Exception Setup Sample 2 Outbound Mapping Errors 3. NOTE MAPPING ERRORS 4. NOTIFY PURCHASING 5. CHECK IF ORDER WAS TRANSMITTED 6. NOTIFY PARTNER IF ORDER WAS TRANSMITTED Sample 3 Overdue Acknowledgments from Partners Procedure: UP3003 Description: HANDLE OVERDUE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Procedure: 1. IDENTIFY PARTNER 2. CALL TRADING PARTNER IF MORE THAN 1 DAY OVERDUE Sample 4 Alert when Specific Partner sends Specific Document Procedure UP3004 Description: HANDLE NEW EDI INVOICE PARTNER Procedure: 1. ALERT ACCOUNTS PAYABLE THAT THIS PARTNER SENDS INVOICES VIA EDI INSTEAD OF PAPER 2. ALERT PURCHASING THAT THEIR COPY OF THE INVOICE WILL BE DELIVERED VIA MIS REPORTS AND NOT FROM THE VENDOR DIRECTLY You may now continue with Defining Exception Capture. 3-18 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup Defining Exception Capture The conditions that define your exception must be defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. An Exception Capture Definition needs to be defined to complete this task. 1. From the Exception Management Menu, enter a 3 to select the Exception Capture Directory. EDIM623 9.3.3_____ EXCEPTION CAPTURE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 System . . CONNECT___ Process EDIR314_ Capture ID @MODEL-CMO A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ System CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN F1=Help Process EDIR314 EDIR316 MAILBOX STOUTL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL EBDI001 EBDI002 EBDI041 F3=Exit Capture ID @MODEL-CMO @MODEL-CMI @MODEL-CM @MODEL-OU @MODEL-DS @MODEL-GS @MODEL-IS @MODEL-TS @MODEL-16 @MODEL-IE @MODEL-OE @MODEL-IM F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Description CONNECT OUTBOUND INTERFACE ERRORS CONNECT INBOUND INTERFACE ERRORS CONNECT ERRORS CONNECT OFFLINE UTILITIES ERRORS ALL DOCUMENT SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL GROUP SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL INTERCHANGE SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL TRANSACTION SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL FATAL ERRORS INBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS OUTBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS F12=Cancel The Exception Capture Directory lists a number of models that are provided with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. 2. Type a 1 on any A (Action) field and press Enter to display the Exception Capture Definition screen to add an exception capture definition. 3. Enter the following information: System: GENTRAN Process: EBDI001 Capture ID: &TEDIREJ Description: CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES User Message: U003001 User Procedure: UP3001 Item Type: TRANSACTION Capture Condition: COMPLIANCE STATUS GT 00 AND TRANSACTION SET EQ 810 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-19 Exception Setup 4. Type a 1 in the Action Field to add the information you have entered and press Enter. A confirmation message will be displayed. Press Enter again to complete the Add. EDIM624 9.3.4_____ EXCEPTION CAPTURE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage System . . . Process . . Capture ID Description GENTRAN___ EBDI001_ &TEDIREJ__ CAPTURE_REJECTED_INVOICES____________________ User Message U003001 Item Type 06/01/2011 (F4=Prompt) User Procedure UP3001____ (F4=Prompt) TRANSACTION_____ (F4=Prompt) Capture Condition (F4=Prompt) Field Op Value Connector COMPLIANCE_STATUS________ GT 00_________________________________ AND TRANSACTION_SET__________ EQ 810________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 5. F4=Prompt F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit to return to the Exception Management Menu. To enter the exception capture definitions for samples 2, 3, 4, and optionally 5, repeat steps 1 through 5 using the following information: 3-20 Sample 2 Outbound Mapping Errors System: GENTRAN Process: EBDI042 Capture ID: &TERROM Description: CAPTURE OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS User Message: U003002 User Procedure: UP3002 Item Type: DOCUMENT Capture Condition: MAPPING STATUS GT 00 Sample 3 Overdue Acknowledgments from Partners System: GENTRAN Process: EDID510 Capture ID: &TOVRDUE IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup Description: CAPTURE OVERDUE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS User Message: U003003 User Procedure: UP3003 Item Type: FUNCTIONAL GROUP Capture Condition: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATUS EQ O Note: Capture Condition value is O - Overdue Sample 4 Alert when Specific Partner sends Specific Document System: GENTRAN Process: EBDI001 Capture ID: &TNEWEDI Description: CAPTURE NEW EDI INVOICES FROM A CUSTOMER User Message: U003004 User Procedure: UP3004 Item Type: TRANSACTION Capture Condition: TRANSACTION SET EQ 810 AND PARTNER EQ VENDOR-3 Sample 5 Alert when Communications Data is received from a Specific Mailbox System: CONNECT Process: STOUTL Capture ID: &TCOMMIN Description: CAPTURE INCOMING COMMUNICATIONS DATA STATUS User Message: U003005 User Procedure: N/A - No user procedure required Item Type: BATCH Capture Condition: REMOTE ID EQ TUTORVP AND EXTRACTED FLAG EQ Y You may now continue with Defining Exception Action. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-21 Exception Setup Defining Exception Action An automatic action (user system) may, optionally, be initiated using an Exception Action. The sample 1 exception action used in this tutorial requests that a FAX be sent to Accounts Payable. Note: For the purposes of the tutorial, the above batch action produces a hard copy printout, not a FAX. This report lists all the data that is passed by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to user applications like FAX, EMail, and other systems if present in your operations. Note: For detailed information about implementing Exception Actions, refer to “Optional Features” and to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 4, “User Exits and APIs”. 1. From the Exception Management Menu, select the Exception Action Directory. EDIM625 9.3.5_____ EXCEPTION ACTION DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 Action @MODEL-BAT Type _ (B=Batch, O=Online) Status _ (E=Enable, D=Disable) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Action Description @MODEL-BAT SAMPLE BATCH ACTION @MODEL-ONL SAMPLE ONLINE ACTION LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Type Status BATCH D ONLINE D F12=Cancel The Exception Action Directory lists a number of models that are provided with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. 3-22 2. Type a 1 on any A (Action) field and press Enter to display the Exception Action Definition screen. 3. Enter the following information: Action: &TBTCHFAX Description: FAX TO ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DUE TO REJ INVOICE Type: B Status: E Batch Procedure: EDIVBACT IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup User Data Area: AN INVOICE WAS RECEIVED THAT HAS BEEN REJECTED DURING INBOUND EDI COMPLIANCE CHECKING. LOGON TO STERLING GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT FOR DETAILS. Note: The above Batch Procedure will produce a hard copy printout, not a FAX. This report lists the parameters that can be passed to other applications like FAX, E-Mail, and other systems that are available in your operations. 4. Type a 1 in the Action Field to add the information you have entered and press Enter. A confirmation message will be displayed. Press Enter again to complete the Add. EDIM626 9.3.6_____ EXCEPTION ACTION DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage Action . . Description Type . . . Status . . . . . . . . . . 06/01/2011 &TBTCHFAX_ FAX_TO_ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_DUE_TO_REJ_INVOICE___ B (B=Batch, O=Online) E (E=Enable, D=Disable) Batch Procedure EDIVBACT Online TransID ____ User Data Area AN_INVOICE_WAS_RECEIVED_THAT_HAS_BEEN_REJECTED_DURING_INBOUND_EDI_____ COMPLIANCE_CHECKING._LOGON_TO_VIEWPOINT_FOR_DETAILS.__________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 5. F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit to return to the Exception Management Menu. To enter the exception action definition for sample 2 repeat steps 1 through 5 using the following information: Sample 2 Outbound Mapping Errors Action: &TEMAIL Description: E-MAIL MESSAGE SENT TO MIS Type: O Status: D (DISABLED - for demonstration only) Online Trans ID: MAIL User Data Area: AN ERROR WAS ENCOUNTERED MAPPING OUTBOUND DATA. CHECK LATEST EDI RUN AND CALL THE EDI GROUP TO INVESTIGATE IF MAPPING NEEDS ADJUSTMENT. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-23 Exception Setup You may now continue with Building Exception Profiles. 3-24 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup Building Exception Profiles Exception Profiles are used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to coordinate and perform the activities you require for an exception. Defining the Exception Profile identifies to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint what the exception is, who should be notified, and what action, if any, should be performed. In sample 1, you are capturing rejected inbound invoices, informing the Accounts Payable Department, and generating a FAX that will alert Accounts Payable to log onto Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint and resolve the problem. 1. From the Exception Management Menu, select Exception Profile Directory (EDIM621). EDIM621 9.3.1_____ EXCEPTION PROFILE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable 06/01/2011 Profile @MODEL-AR_ Status _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Profile @MODEL-AR @MODEL-CM @MODEL-CMI @MODEL-CMO @MODEL-DS @MODEL-GS @MODEL-IE @MODEL-IM @MODEL-IS @MODEL-OE @MODEL-OEX @MODEL-OM @MODEL-OU F1=Help Description ACKNOWLEDGEMENT ERRORS COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS (CONNECT INBOUND API) COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS (CONNECT OUTBOUND API) ALL DOCUMENT SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL GROUP SUSPENSE ERRORS INBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS ALL INTERCHANGE SUSPENSE ERRORS OUTBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS OUTBOUND EDI EXTRACT ERRORS OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS (STOUTL) F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Status E E E E E E E E E E E E E F12=Cancel The Exception Profile Directory lists a number of models that are provided with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. 2. Type a 1 on any A (Action) field and press Enter to display the Exception Profile Definition screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-25 Exception Setup 3. 4. Enter the following information: Profile: &TEDIREJ Description: REJECTED INVOICES Status: E Capture: &TEDIREJ Recipient: &TAPDEPT Description: ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DEPARTMENT CC Recipient: blank Description: blank Action: &TBTCHFAX Trigger Level: EXCP Type a 1 in the Action Field to add the information you have entered and press Enter. A confirmation message will be displayed. Press Enter again to complete the Add. EDIM622 9.3.2_____ EXCEPTION PROFILE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 06/01/2011 Profile . . . . &TEDIREJ__ Description . . REJECTED_INVOICES____________________________ Status . . . . E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Capture . . . &TEDIREJ__ (F4=Prompt) Description : CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES Recipient . . . &TAPDEPT__ (F4=Prompt) Description . . ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_DEPARTMENT__________________ CC Recipient . __________ (F4=Prompt) Description . . _____________________________________________ Action . . . . &TBTCHFAX_ (F4=Prompt) Description : FAX TO ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DUE TO REJ INVOICE Trigger Level EXCP ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 5. F4=Prompt F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit to return to the Exception Management Menu. To enter the exception profile definitions for the remaining samples, repeat steps 1 through 5 using the following information: 3-26 Sample 2 Outbound Mapping Errors Profile: &TERROM Description: OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Setup Status: E Capture: &TERROM Recipient: &TCUSTRLS Description: CUSTOMER RELATIONS SPECIALIST CC Recipient: blank Description: blank Action: &TEMAIL Trigger Level: EXCP Sample 3 Overdue Acknowledgments from Partners Profile: &TOVRDUE Description: OVERDUE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Status: E Capture: &TOVRDUE Recipient: &TEDIGRP Description: EDI DEPARTMENT CC Recipient: blank Description: blank Sample 4 Alert when Specific Partner Sends Specific Document Profile: &TNEWEDI Description: NEW EDI INVOICES FROM A CUSTOMER Status: E Capture: &TNEWEDI Recipient: &TEDIGRP Description: EDI DEPARTMENT CC Recipient: blank Description: blank IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-27 Exception Setup Sample 5 Alert when Communications Data is received from a Specific Mailbox. Profile: &TCOMMIN Description: INCOMING COMMUNICATIONS DATA Status: E Capture: &TCOMMIN Recipient: &TCOMMNTR Description: COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR CC Recipient: blank Description: blank You have now completed all the exception setup tasks required for managing the five sample exceptions. 3-28 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Management Tutorial Processing Exception Management Tutorial Processing Tutorial Batch Processing The steps provided here will cause the exceptions you have defined in Exception Setup to be produced. You will then be able to use Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint's Exception Inquiry capabilities for reviewing and responding to the exceptions created. In normal system operation, the processing performed by these steps would be an integrated part of your every day processing. For complete details about integrating Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint into your system operations, refer to Chapter 2, "Implementation Process". 1. Configure JCL Member VPTUT200, in GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL, to your site naming standards. This is the tutorial JCL for executing the FAX exception action you defined. 2. Configure, then submit JCL VPTUT010. This will load the JCL member VPTUT200 into the VSAM Online JCL (EDIJCL) file. This will complete your batch setup for the batch procedure EDIVBACT, which corresponds to the exception action &TBTCHFAX. 3. For users without the Sterling Connect system, the JCL in member VPTUTOUT, from the GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL library, should be configured and submitted. This runs the outbound processes in Sterling Gentran using the tutorial data. Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file. Also, you need to modify the second parameter record in SYS001 for EBDI042 to assign “YOUR COMPANY” as the Default User ID starting in position 40. For users with Sterling Connect, the JCL in member VPTUTOPL from the GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL library should be configured and submitted for processing. This runs the outbound processes in Sterling Gentran and the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities using the tutorial data. Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file. Also, you need to modify the second parameter record in SYS001 for EBDI042 to assign “YOUR COMPANY” as the Default User ID starting in position 40. 4. For users without the Sterling Connect system, the JCL in member VPTUTIN from the GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL library should be configured and submitted for processing. This runs the inbound processes in Sterling Gentran using the tutorial data. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-29 Exception Management Tutorial Processing Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file. For users with Sterling Connect, the JCL in member VPTUTIPL from the GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL library should be configured and submitted for processing. This runs the inbound processes in Sterling Gentran and the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities using the tutorial data. Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file. Note: In order to run the VPTUTIPL job, ensure that the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint tutorial data has been added successfully to the Sterling Connect Data Queues using the LOADVPPL JCL member. If the data is not available, JCL member LOADVPPL should be submitted for processing prior to running VPTUTIPL. 5. After these jobs finish, data from Sterling Gentran and optionally Sterling Connect will now reside in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging area. 6. From CICS, enter the task code EDIV to start the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint scanner. This will trigger the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Post Processor to move the data from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging area to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository. Note: The response “Viewpoint Scanner Started” is displayed by EDIV. To verify the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint scanner start up, select Log Display from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. Note: If you are using system image, replace EDI with your system image characters. You may now continue with the tutorial at Exception Inquiry. 3-30 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry Exception Inquiry The system has been set up and now you are ready for the daily tasks. Exception Inquiry tasks provides you with an idea of the direct benefits provided by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. This tutorial example will walk step-by-step through sample 1. The following tasks should be performed: • Reviewing Exceptions • Transferring Exceptions • Closing Exceptions • Deleting Exceptions These tasks demonstrate how to use Exception Inquiry to review and respond to exceptions that have been captured for you by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Reviewing Exceptions At selected times during the day, you will check to see if you have any exceptions. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint can be configured to actively notify you by using the Exception Action User Exit. This user exit is particularly useful when combined with E-Mail or paging systems. In sample 1, “Inbound Error Rejection,” you are a staff accountant in Accounts Payable who receives a FAX. This FAX was initiated by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system and indicates that an inbound invoice has been rejected by Sterling Gentran. FAX INITIATED BY VIEWPOINT FAX TO: ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DUE TO REJECTED INVOICE AN INVOICE WAS RECEIVED THAT HAS BEEN REJECTED DURING INBOUND EDI COMPLIANCE CHECKING. LOG ON TO VIEWPOINT FOR DETAILS. SEE RECIPIENT &TAPDEPT. Note: The above figure is a simulated FAX. Sample 1 in the tutorial was set up to initiate the batch procedure EDIVBACT. Check this batch output for a complete list of the information that is available to user batch and online systems when the rejected inbound invoice was rejected for sample 1. Sample programs are provided with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system for passing information to a batch or online system, like a FAX or E-Mail system. For detailed information about implementing Exception Actions, refer to “Optional Features” and to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 4, “User Exits and APIs”. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-31 Exception Inquiry 1. Select Exception Inquiry from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. EDIM645 9.4_______ EXCEPTION INQUIRY MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. _ F1=Help 2. 1. Recipient Directory 2. Exception List F3=Exit Select the Recipient Directory. This directory displays the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint recipients. EDIM646 9.4.1_____ RECIPIENT DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 5=Select 6=ExcpList 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Recipient &TAPDEPT__ A Recipient Description Excp Count _ &TAPDEPT ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DEPARTMENT 00001 06/01/2011 12:00 _ &TCOMMNTR COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR 00000 06/01/2011 12:00 _ &TCUSTRLS CUSTOMER RELATIONS SPECIALIST 00000 06/01/2011 12:00 _ _ _ &TEDIGRP EDI DEPARTMENT @ACKREC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCILIATION ERRORS @COMM-ERRS COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR 00000 06/01/2011 12:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 _ _ @EDITORS @FATAL EDI COMPLIANCE MONITOR FATAL ERRORS 00002 06/01/2011 12:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 _ @MAPPERIN INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS 00002 06/01/2011 12:00 _ _ _ _ @MAPPEROUT OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS @SUSPENSE SUSPENSE ERRORS LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Last Activity Date Time 00001 06/01/2011 12:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 Enter=Refresh All active Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint recipients are displayed with the number of exceptions currently being monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for them. 3-32 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry 3. Select the &TAPDEPT recipient by typing 5 in the Action Field and pressing Enter. The Recipient Detail Screen is displayed for recipient &TAPDEPT. Refer to the Status fields on the Recipient Detail Screen. This screen tells you that there is one Open exception for recipient &TAPDEPT. EDIM647 __________ Type Action, press Enter. _ 6=ExcpList Recipient . . &TAPDEPT__ RECIPIENT DETAIL 06/01/2011 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DEPARTMENT Last Activity: 06/01/2011 - 12:00 EXCEPTIONS Status OPEN REVIEW TRNSFR CLOSED Count 00001 00000 00000 00000 TOTAL 00001 F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel From this screen you may request further details about your active exceptions by selecting the Exception List. 4. Type 6 in the Action Field, and press Enter. The Exception List Screen is displayed. EDIM648 9.4.2_____ EXCEPTION LIST 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 5=Select 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip Recipient . . &TAPDEPT__ ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DEPARTMENT Date From . . __________ To __________ Excp Status A (A=All, O=Open, C=Closed, R=Reviewed, T=Transferred) A System __ GENTRAN __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Process EBDI001 Reference 000000237 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd /000000091 /000025056 S Date O 06/01/11 F12=Cancel This screen displays all exceptions for a single recipient. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-33 Exception Inquiry 5. Select the exception by typing 5 in the Action Field and pressing Enter. The Exception Detail Screen will be displayed for the exception. EDIM649 __________ EXCEPTION DETAIL 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. __ 4=Delete 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip. Recipient . . : &TAPDEPT ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DEPARTMENT Excp Status . : OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 Excp Tag . . : 0000000047 User Reference: 000000237 /000000091 /000025056 System/Process: GENTRAN Excp. /EBDI001 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Capture ID. . : &TEDIREJ Description . : CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES Application Network . . . Direction/Set Partner . . . Qual . . . . F1=Help : : : INBOUND /810 : VENDOR-1 : F3=Exit F6=Next Action: &TBTCHFAX Action Dt-Tm: 06/01/2011-12:00 Databank: GENTRAN Interchange: 000000237 Group: 000000091 Trans: 000025056 F12=Cancel This screen displays important information about the exception, its status, when it occurred, what the system did in response, when it responded, and other information. From this information you can determine the basic information about the exception: • Who is the partner? • What document? • What went wrong? In this part of the example, you are the Accounts Payable staff accountant. You can tell that the problem is definitely EDI related and you need to know what steps to follow next. 3-34 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry 6. Enter an 8 in the Action Field and press Enter. The User Message Display screen is displayed. EDIM662 __________ USER MESSAGE DISPLAY Type Action, Press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=Data 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist Reference : 000000237 /000000091 Excp Tag : 0000000047 Description: CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES 06/01/2011 /000025056 Message U-003001 CRITICAL ERROR -- REJECTED Explanation AN INBOUND INVOICE WAS REJECTED BY THE EDI EDITOR FOR FAILURE TO PASS COMPLIANCE CHECKING. F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel This screen contains a message that was created to explain the exception. This message was set up by you or someone on your staff when setting up the exception profile for this exception, in order to make it easier to understand and respond to this exception. These messages are not created by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. 7. Enter a 9 in the Action Field and press Enter. The User Procedure Display is displayed. EDIM663 __________ USER PROCEDURE DISPLAY Type Action, Press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=Data 9=UserMsg 10=ExcpHist 06/01/2011 Procedure : UP3001 Description: HANDLE REJECTED INVOICES Procedure 1. IDENTIFY PARTNER 2. GET ENVELOPE CONTROL NUMBERS 3. NOTIFY PARTNER TO HAVE INVOICE SENT AGAIN 4. TRANSFER THIS EXCEPTION TO THE RECIPIENT &TEDIGRP (EDI GROUP) WHO WILL CLOSE THIS EXCEPTION OUT F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-35 Exception Inquiry This screen contains a procedure which is made up of a series of steps that you will need to follow to respond to the exception. This procedure was set up by you or someone on your staff to make it easier to understand and respond to this exception. These procedures are not created by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. The procedures listed do not represent any system action by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. These procedures require human action, not system processing procedures. 8. Enter a 7 in the Action Field and press Enter. The Exception Message List is displayed. EDIM650 __________ EXCEPTION MESSAGE LIST Type Action, press Enter. 6=Excp 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist System : Process : Desc. : Reference: GENTRAN EBDI001 CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES 000000237 /000000091 /000025056 A Message __ U-003001 CRITICAL ERROR -- REJECTED __ 62 16 BIG 1 MENT. __ 63 19 REF 1 NVALID CODE WAS FOUND. __ 62 21 N1 1 MENT. __ 63 25 IT1 3 QQ NVALID CODE WAS FOUND. __ 62 28 CTT 1 MENT. F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F7=Bkwd 06/01/2011 F8=Fwd MISSING INDICATED MANDATORY ELE IN THE IDENTIFIED ELEMENT, AN I MISSING INDICATED MANDATORY ELE IN THE IDENTIFIED ELEMENT, AN I MISSING INDICATED MANDATORY ELE F12=Cancel This screen displays the messages produced by Sterling Gentran for the exception as it was being processed by the Inbound Editor (EBDI001). 3-36 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry 9. Enter 7 in the Action Field, in the first line of the message list, and press Enter. The Exception Data Display screen is displayed for the exception. EDIM651 __________ EXCEPTION DATA DISPLAY Type Action, press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist System : Process : Desc. : Reference: GENTRAN EBDI001 CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES 000000237 /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 Exception Data *U-003001 CRITICAL ERROR -- REJECTED ST*810*000025056? BIG**INV56*20020731*PONUMBER-056? * 62 16 BIG 1 MISSING INDICATED MANDATORY ELEME * NT. NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW? NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID? NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.? NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? REF* *00547? F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel This screen displays the actual data for the exception. All messages generated for the exception from the message list are inserted into the data. The messages inserted in the data are indicated with an "*" in the first position of each line on the display. If necessary, you can examine the data using this screen to determine what the specific problem was and how to correct it. For this example, a "missing indicated mandatory element" caused the error. You may use the F8=Fwd key to page through the data or skip through the messages using the F6=Next key. You will find that a missing mandatory element (BIG01 - Invoice Date) caused the error. 10. Press F3=Exit to return to the Exception Inquiry Menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-37 Exception Inquiry Transferring Exceptions As staff accountant in Accounts Payable, you have now determined from the steps followed above what went wrong and discovered that the problem is EDI related (not accounting). You want to transfer the exception to the EDI staff for them to resolve the problem. 1. From the Exception Inquiry Menu, enter a 1 to select the Recipient Directory. 2. Find recipient &TAPDEPT and type 6 in the Action field for this recipient. Press Enter. The Exception List screen will be displayed. 3. Position your cursor to the exception you wish to transfer, type 10 in the Action Field for the exception, and press Enter. The Exception History screen will be displayed. EDIM652 __________ EXCEPTION HISTORY Type Action, Press Enter. _ 6=Excp 7=Data 8=MsgList 9=HistUpdt Reference . . : 000000237 Current Status : OPEN Date-Time /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . : Update Initials: Date-Time . . : Recipient . . : - Note . . . . . : LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F8=Fwd F12=Cancel From this screen you may scroll through a running history for the exception. 4. 3-38 Type 9 in the Action Field, and press Enter to display the Exception History Update screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry 5. Type T in the Status Field and type &TEDIGRP in the Recipient field. Type the following note in the NOTE field: HAVE ASKED PARTNER TO RESEND INVOICE. NOTIFIED EDI DEPARTMENT OF REJECTED INVOICE. Type a 2 in the Action Field and press Enter to update the exception. The system will display a confirmation message. Press Enter again to complete the update. EDIM654 __________ Type Action, Press Enter. _ 2=Update EXCEPTION HISTORY UPDATE Reference . . : 000000237 Current Status : OPEN Date-Time /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . . T (C=Close, R=Review, T=Transfer) Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Recipient . . . &TEDIGRP__ (F4=Prompt) Description . . EDI DEPARTMENT Note . . . . . . HAVE_ASKED_PARTNER_TO_RESEND_INVOICE._____________________ NOTIFIED_EDI_DEPARTMENT_OF_REJECTED_INVOICE._____________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ UPDATE COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 6. F4=Prompt F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit to return to the Exception Inquiry Menu. This process will transfer the exception from Accounts Payable to the EDI Department. The next steps would be followed by the recipient that the exception was transferred to, EDI Group (&TEDIGRP). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-39 Exception Inquiry Closing Exceptions When you are satisfied the exception has been clearly identified and resolved, you are ready to close the exception. 1. From the Exception Inquiry Menu, enter a 1 to select Recipient Directory. EDIM646 9.4.1_____ RECIPIENT DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 5=Select 6=ExcpList 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Recipient &TAPDEPT__ A Recipient Description Excp Count _ &TAPDEPT ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DEPARTMENT 00000 06/01/2011 12:00 _ &TCOMMNTR COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR 00000 06/01/2011 12:00 _ &TCUSTRLS CUSTOMER RELATIONS SPECIALIST 00000 06/01/2011 12:00 _ _ _ &TEDIGRP EDI DEPARTMENT @ACKREC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCILIATION ERRORS @COMM-ERRS COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR 00001 06/01/2011 12:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 _ _ @EDITORS @FATAL EDI COMPLIANCE MONITOR FATAL ERRORS 00002 06/01/2011 12:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 _ @MAPPERIN INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS 00002 06/01/2011 12:00 _ _ _ _ @MAPPEROUT OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS @SUSPENSE SUSPENSE ERRORS LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Last Activity Date Time 00001 06/01/2011 12:00 00000 00/00/0000 00:00 Enter=Refresh From this display you will notice that the recipient &TEDIGRP has 1 active exception with a last activity date and time that reflects the transfer that was just performed for the rejected invoice exception. Also, notice that the recipient &TAPDEPT no longer has any outstanding exceptions. 3-40 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry 2. Type 6 in the Action Field, next to the &TEDIGRP recipient, and press Enter. The Exception List Screen is displayed for recipient &TEDIGRP. EDIM648 9.4.2_____ EXCEPTION LIST 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 5=Select 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip Recipient . . &TEDIGRP__ EDI DEPARTMENT Date From . . __________ To __________ Excp Status A (A=All, O=Open, C=Closed, R=Reviewed, T=Transferred) A System __ GENTRAN __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Process EBDI001 Reference 000000237 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd /000000091 /000025056 S Date T 06/01/11 F12=Cancel From this display you will notice that this recipient now has the exception which has a status of T (transfer) 3. Position your cursor at the transferred exception, type 10 in the Action Field, and press Enter. The Exception History screen is displayed for the exception. EDIM652 __________ EXCEPTION HISTORY Type Action, Press Enter. _ 6=Excp 7=Data 8=MsgList 9=HistUpdt Reference . . : 000000237 Current Status : TRANSFER Date-Time /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . : TRANSFER Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Date-Time Recipient . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 . . : &TEDIGRP EDI DEPARTMENT Note . . . . . : HAVE ASKED PARTNER TO RESEND INVOICE. NOTIFIED EDI DEPARTMENT OF REJECTED INVOICE. LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F8=Fwd F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-41 Exception Inquiry This screen displays the current status for the exception and any note that was entered on the last history entry. 4. Type 9 in the Action Field, and press Enter to display the Exception History Update screen. 5. Type C in the Status Field to close the exception and type the following note in the Note field: CLOSED EXCEPTION - PROBLEM RESOLVED 6. Type 2 in the Action Field and press Enter to update the exception. The system will display a confirmation message. Press Enter again to confirm the update. EDIM654 __________ Type Action, Press Enter. _ 2=Update EXCEPTION HISTORY UPDATE Reference . . : 000000237 Current Status : TRANSFER Date-Time /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . . C (C=Close, R=Review, T=Transfer) Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Recipient . . . __________ (F4=Prompt) Description . . Note . . . . . . CLOSED_EXCEPTION_-_PROBLEM_RESOLVED_______________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ UPDATE COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 3-42 F4=Prompt F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry 7. Press F12=Cancel to return to the Exception History screen. EDIM652 __________ EXCEPTION HISTORY Type Action, Press Enter. _ 6=Excp 7=Data 8=MsgList 9=HistUpdt Reference . . : 000000237 Current Status : CLOSED Date-Time /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . : CLOSED Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Date-Time Recipient . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 . . : Note . . . . . : CLOSED EXCEPTION - PROBLEM RESOLVED F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F8=Fwd F12=Cancel The exception is displayed with a status of Closed. The User Initials of the person who closed the exception and the Date-Time it was closed is also displayed. 8. Press F8=Fwd to view the previous history entries for the exception. EDIM653 __________ EXCEPTION HISTORY Type Action, Press Enter. _ 6=Excp 7=Data 8=MsgList 9=HistUpdt 06/01/2011 Status . . . . : TRANSFER Date-Time: 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Recipient . . : &TEDIGRP EDI DEPARTMENT Note . . . . . : HAVE ASKED PARTNER TO RESEND INVOICE. NOTIFIED EDI DEPARTMENT OF REJECTED INVOICE. Status . . . . : Update Initials: Recipient . . : Note . . . . . : LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next 9. Date-Time: F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd - F12=Cancel Press F12=Cancel to return to the Exception List screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-43 Exception Inquiry Deleting Exceptions From the Exception List screen you may mark exceptions for deletion by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry Program. 1. From the Exception List screen, position your cursor to the exception that has a status of Closed. Type 4 in the Action Field and press Enter. A confirmation will be displayed. Press Enter to mark the exception for deletion. The exception will be deleted/archived by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint when you run the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry Program. EDIM648 9.4.2_____ EXCEPTION LIST 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 5=Select 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip Recipient . . &TEDIGRP__ EDI DEPARTMENT Date From . . __________ To __________ Excp Status A (A=All, O=Open, C=Closed, R=Reviewed, T=Transferred) A System __ GENTRAN __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Process EBDI001 Reference ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd S Date F12=Cancel Note: This exception has now been marked for deletion. It will be removed from the system when you perform scheduled maintenance purges (refer to "Exception Management Housekeeping" later in this chapter). This completes the Exception Inquiry tasks for the first sample. You may use these steps to review, transfer, close, and delete the other exceptions generated by the tutorial data. These exceptions can be used to explore the system and exercise the functions of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. 3-44 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Requesting Exception Management Reports Requesting Exception Management Reports Although Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint automates the tasks of monitoring your EDI processing, there may still be instances when reports will need to be generated. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry feature allows you to specify the type of information you want reported. For detailed information about the wide range of selection criteria available, refer to the "Selection Criteria Reference Chart" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". In this example, the EDI manager wants to know how many Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exceptions are outstanding. Creating an Inquiry Definition 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu, select Extended System Management. 2. From the Extended System Management Menu, select Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory screen will be displayed. EDIM608 9.2.4_____ MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY OPTIONS DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable 06/01/2011 File . . . _ (R=Repository, P=Profile) Identifier @MODEL-MT1 Status . . _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Identifier @MODEL-MT1 @MODEL-MT2 @MODEL-MT3 @MODEL-MT4 @MODEL-MT5 @MODEL-P @MODEL-R @MODEL-TP @MODEL-TR Description REPOSITORY MAINTENANCE - EXCEPTIONS REPOSITORY MAINTENANCE - TRACKING PROFILE MAINTENANCE - EXCEPTIONS PROFILE MAINTENANCE - TRACKING PROFILE MAINTENANCE - SYSTEM LIST ALL EXCEPTION PROFILES LIST EXCEPTIONS FOR PARTNER VENDOR-1 LIST ALL USER TRACKING POINTS LIST ALL TRACKED ITEMS FOR VENDOR-2 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd File Status REPOSITORY E REPOSITORY E PROFILE E PROFILE E PROFILE E PROFILE E REPOSITORY E PROFILE E REPOSITORY E F12=Cancel The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory lists a number of models that are provided with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. 3. Type a 1 on any A (Action) field and press Enter to display the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen. 4. Enter the following information: Identifier: &TACTVEXCP Description: EXCEPTIONS ACTIVE (NOT CLOSED) IN VIEWPOINT Status: E IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-45 Requesting Exception Management Reports 5. File: REPOSITORY Mode: INQUIRY Class: EXCEPTIONS Report Level: BOTH Selection Criteria: EXCEPTION STATUS NE CLOSED Type a 1 in the Action field and press Enter. The system will display a confirmation message. Press Enter again to confirm the ADD. EDIM609 9.2.5_____ MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY OPTIONS DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 06/01/2011 Identifier &TACTVEXCP Description EXCEPTIONS_ACTIVE_(NOT_CLOSED)_IN_VIEWPOINT__ Status . . . E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Operation (F4=Prompt) File . . . REPOSITORY Mode . . . INQUIRY Class . . . Report Level EXCEPTIONS BOTH__ Selection Criteria (F4=Prompt) Field Op Value EXCEPTION_STATUS____ NE CLOSED_______________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 6. F4=Prompt Con. ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit twice to return to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint main menu. Generating Reports The report is generated by running the batch procedure, Maintenance/Inquiry (EDIN140), and specifying the Inquiry Definition Identifier &TACTVEXCP that was just created. This job may be included in your daily job stream. Refer to Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions” for detailed information about “EDIM609 Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen” and to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 1, “Batch Program Descriptions” for detailed information about the “EDIN140 - Maintenance/Inquiry” batch program. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is delivered with several models for Maintenance/Inquiry. You may want to review these from the Maintenance/Inquiry Directory and build maintenance criteria and special reports for your specific needs. 3-46 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Management Housekeeping Exception Management Housekeeping Periodic maintenance should be performed on your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. For example, you may decide to delete exceptions that have been closed for five days or longer. Creating a Maintenance Definition Follow these steps to create a definition that purges closed and deleted exceptions. When the scheduled processing of the maintenance JCL occurs, the purge will occur. 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu, select Extended System Management. 2. From the Extended System Management Menu, select Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition screen will be displayed. 3. Enter the following information: Identifier: &TCLITMDLT Description: DELETE EXCEPTIONS CLOSED OVER 5 DAYS Status: E File: REPOSITORY Mode: PURGE Class: EXCEPTIONS Report Level: BOTH Selection Criteria: AGE CLOSED GT 005 OR ONLINE DELETES EQ YES 4. Enter a 1 in the Action field and press Enter. The system will display a confirmation message. Press Enter again to confirm the ADD. 5. Press F3=Exit twice to return to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. Performing File Maintenance The exceptions will be purged, and optionally archived, by running the batch procedure Maintenance/Inquiry (EDIN140) and specifying the Maintenance Definition Identifier &TCLITMDLT that was just created. This job may be included in your daily job stream. Refer to Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions” for detailed information about “EDIM609 Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen” and to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 1, “Batch Program Descriptions” for detailed information about the “EDIN140 - Maintenance/Inquiry” batch program. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is delivered with several models for Maintenance/Inquiry. You may want to review these from the Maintenance/Inquiry Directory and build maintenance criteria and special reports for your specific needs. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-47 Exception Management Tutorial Reset Exception Management Tutorial Reset Tutorial Reset Instructions You may reset the tutorial by using the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry feature to purge the tutorial data from the repository. EDIM609 9.2.5_____ MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY OPTIONS DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 06/01/2011 Identifier ANYNAME___ Description PURGE_TUTORIAL_DATA_FROM_REPOSITORY__________ Status . . . E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Operation (F4=Prompt) File . . . REPOSITORY Mode . . . PURGE__ Class . . . Report Level EXCEPTIONS BOTH__ Selection Criteria (F4=Prompt) Field Op Value RECIPIENT_NAME______ EQ &TAPDEPT_____________________________________ RECIPIENT_NAME______ EQ &TCUSTRLS____________________________________ RECIPIENT_NAME______ EQ &TEDIGRP_____________________________________ RECIPIENT_NAME______ EQ &TCOMMNTR____________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ F1=Help 1. 2. F3=Exit F4=Prompt Con. OR_ OR_ OR_ ___ ___ ___ F12=Cancel Create an Online Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition with the following information: File: REPOSITORY Mode: PURGE Class: EXCEPTIONS Selection Criteria: RECIPIENT NAME EQ &TAPDEPT OR RECIPIENT NAME EQ &TCUSTRLS OR RECIPIENT NAME EQ &TEDIGRP OR RECIPIENT NAME EQ &TCOMMNTR Run the batch job EDIN140, specifying the Maintenance definition identifier just created. This will delete the tutorial data from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository. Note: The definitions and profiles defined in the Exception Setup portion of the tutorial are still enabled for capturing exceptions. To remove these, you should mark them for deletion using the Exception Management Menu options. Caution to the EDI Coordinator: Use caution running any tutorial or practice data in a production environment. It is a good idea to use the tutorial naming convention (&T...), used in the tutorial, to ensure that sample data will not interfere with live data. 3-48 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Tracking Management Tutorial This Tutorial is only available if the Tracking Management module is installed. This Tutorial will demonstrate how to perform the basic tasks required to use the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management functions. By navigating through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint screens and performing common tasks, you will become acquainted with the functions used to track items through the extended EDI system, as well as how Tracking and Exception Management may be used together. It is recommended that you read Chapter 1, "Product Description" before performing the tutorial. The Product Description will familiarize you with the features, concepts and terminology of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. You may also refer to the "Glossary". Also, if you have not already performed the tutorial for Exception Management, it is recommended that you complete that tutorial up to the point of transferring or closing any exceptions. You will close an exception during the Tracking Management Tutorial. Refer to the "Exception Management Tutorial" at the beginning of this chapter. Using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to track items (for example, documents) can be described in the following procedures: Determining Tracking Management Business Requirements The first step in determining how you will use Tracking Management, is to analyze how you operate in respect to day-to-day tasks, determine those situations where you need to find out what happened to particular documents (that is, their status and history), and how you identify those documents. An example may be that you have a customer help desk where you try and answer customer questions about particular documents, such as purchase orders or invoices. This is similar to the sample scenario that is presented in this tutorial. Tracking Management Tutorial Setup Tutorial Setup provides instructions for setting up the tutorial. Tracking Setup Tracking Setup involves the steps needed to implement tracking for business requirements that you have determined. This may include enabling user applications to pass information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Tutorial Processing provides instructions for the tutorial batch processing. Tracking Query Requests The Query Request function, with Tracking Management, provides the user with an interactive approach to finding and displaying the status and history of items as they move through the extended EDI system. Tracking Management Reports A wide range of reporting criteria and procedures for requesting and printing reports are provided. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-49 Tracking Management Tutorial Tracking Management Housekeeping Housekeeping provides operational flexibility for maintaining your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files. Housekeeping procedures are described at the end of the tutorial. Maintenance procedures for deleting/archiving tracking information from Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files, are summarized. Tracking Management Tutorial Reset Tutorial Reset provides instructions for resetting the tutorial setup. Detailed information for all Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint screens is provided in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". Chapter 2, "Implementation Process" describes strategies for implementing both Tracking Management and Exception Management in your environment. Tips for setting up and using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management. 1. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides predefined tracking points for most of the Sterling Gentran:Basic system processes. For Sterling Gentran:Plus or Sterling Gentran:Realtime installations, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint also provides tracking points from the Sterling Connect communications system. Tracking Management is automatically enabled for these processes. This may be appropriate for your site and means you can immediately start tracking items within the translation, communications, network, and trading partner portions of the extended EDI system. 2. Do your business requirements analysis first. You will need to determine what information you want to track, including information from user applications. Enabling user applications for tracking requires changes to those applications and therefore programming resources. 3. Setting up meaningful user references, through the Sterling Gentran system, is recommended so that you may query on identifiers that are known to your users, such as a purchase order number. This involves identifying these references on application definitions, and with the message standard tables. IMPORTANT Prior to completing the entire tutorial, the following steps must be performed: 3-50 1. Review "Determining Tracking Management Business Requirements" provided below. 2. Perform the Exception Management Tutorial up to the point of transferring or closing exceptions. You will not need to run the batch processes for the Exception Management Tutorial again, but you must ensure that the Exception Profiles are set up as shown in that tutorial. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Determining Tracking Management Business Requirements Determining Tracking Management Business Requirements The objective of Tracking Management is to provide immediate information (that is, status and history) about items as they move through the extended EDI system. The term "item type" refers to the form of data as it proceeds through processes. For example, an outbound "document" item type becomes a "transaction," which is part of a "functional group," which in turn is part of an "interchange," which is then part of a communications "batch". A typical use of the Tracking Management function is in a customer service role. This tutorial describes this scenario. Tracking Management can also be used in an operational manner, such as ensuring that documents were received and processed from a particular partner every Tuesday afternoon. As a background for this tutorial, the following description is provided: • Your company trades with a company called VENDOR-1. You purchase goods from them and receive invoices. Your company automatically pays the bills upon receipt of the invoice, and there is usually no gap in payments unless there is a problem with the invoice. • You have installed Tracking Management in addition to Exception Management. You have already set up Sterling Gentran and Sterling Connect Tracking Points, Captures, and Profiles to handle your business needs. You have decided to include your outbound Purchase Order application, outbound communications, inbound communications and inbound Invoice application in the Extended EDI stream to be tracked. These User Applications can be monitored with Tracking Management only. To summarize, the Tracking Management tutorial details sample customer service situations and provides information for the following concerns: • Sample 1 - View all orders sent in a given time period • Sample 2 - View the history of an outbound purchase order • Sample 3 - Verify acknowledgement with reject status was sent to customer • Sample 4 - Verify inbound invoice rejected and pinpoint error for customer In addition, procedures to create reports and file maintenance jobs are also presented. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-51 Tracking Management Tutorial Setup Tracking Management Tutorial Setup Tutorial Setup Before you or your staff begin the tutorial, you need to perform some simple setup tasks. These tasks may have already been completed with the Exception Management tutorial. Please refer to "Exception Management Tutorial Setup" earlier in this chapter. As described in the Exception Management Tutorial Setup, there are two tasks to complete: 1. Set Up Logon Logon Setup creates a "tutorial user" which may be used to perform the tutorial. 2. Set Up Partners and Maps Partner Setup ensures that the required Partners and Maps are available. You must ensure that this setup is completed in order for the tutorial data to process. Tracking Setup Tracking Setup covers the task of defining and enabling user tracking points, or user applications. A detailed explanation of enabling user applications to pass information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management is provided in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 4, “User Exits and APIs”. Please note that F1=Help may be used at any time during the tutorial to receive additional information. Also, some fields provide a prompt function F4=Prompt. You may use this function to display a selection list for completing the field. Defining User Tracking Points Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management provides a mechanism to display pertinent data from User Applications on an Item Process Detail screen. There are 3 "process status" fields and 3 "user fields" that can be displayed. Field labels for this data, when it is displayed, can also be created. In addition, you can pass messages, from your application to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, which can be displayed on an Item Message List screen. Four User Tracking Points have been provided for the tutorial, corresponding to the 4 applications you want to include in Tracking Management: @COMMIB Sample Inbound Communications Application @COMMOB Sample Outbound Communications Application @INVSYSTEM Sample Inbound Invoice Application @POSYSTEM Sample Outbound Purchase Order Application The IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 4, “User Exits and APIs,” explains the process of calling the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways to pass application information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. In addition, User 3-52 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Setup Tracking Points must be set up online, and be enabled in order for the application data to be passed. The following steps will show you how to review the Sample Outbound Purchase Order Application Tracking Point @POSYSTEM, predefined for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management system. 1. Sign on to the Sterling Gentran online system. 2. Select Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu is displayed. EDIM600 9.0_______ VIEWPOINT MAIN MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. __ F1=Help 3. F3=Exit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 99. System Options Extended System Management Exception Management Exception Inquiry Tracking Management Log Display F15=Logoff From the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu select the Extended System Management option. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-53 Tracking Management Tutorial Setup The Extended System Management Menu is displayed. EDIM601 9.2_______ EXTENDED SYSTEM MANAGEMENT MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. _ F1=Help 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. STERLING Tracking Point Directory STERLING Tracking Point Definition Functional Area Control Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition User Tracking Point Directory User Tracking Point Definition F3=Exit From the Extended System Management Menu, select the User Tracking Point Directory option. EDIM610 9.2.6_____ USER TRACKING POINT DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable 06/01/2011 System @COMMIB___ Process VPIBCOMM Status _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ System @COMMIB @COMMOB @INVSYSTEM @POSYSTEM Process VPIBCOMM VPOBCOMM VPIBAPPL VPOBAPPL Description SAMPLE INBOUND COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATION SAMPLE OUTBOUND COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATION SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE APPLICATION SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURCHASE ORDER APPLICATION LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd 5. 3-54 F8=Fwd Status E E E E F12=Cancel Type a 5 in the Action column, next to @POSYSTEM and press Enter to view the User Tracking Point Definition. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Setup The User Tracking Point for the Sample Outbound Purchase Order System, is displayed. EDIM611 9.2.7_____ USER TRACKING POINT DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete System . . . Process . . Description Item Type . Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . @POSYSTEM_ VPOBAPPL SAMPLE_OUTBOUND_PURCHASE_ORDER_APPLICATION___ U:ORDER_________ (F4=Prompt) E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Process Status Names Status 1 Name U:PGM._STATUS__ Status 2 Name U:ORDER_STATUS_ Status 3 Name U:ORDER_QTY.___ F1=Help F3=Exit 06/01/2011 F4=Prompt User Field Names Field 1 Name Field 2 Name Field 3 Name U:ORDER_DATE___ U:SHIP_DATE____ U:BUYER_PHONE__ F12=Cancel Some information from the user application, that have significant meaning, would be passed to Tracking Management by calling the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway. For more detailed information, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 4, “User Exits and APIs”. The following process status and user field labels are defined on this screen. When a query is made on the tracking data in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, these labels will appear on the Item Process Detail screen next to the data passed from the user application. The status of the application program after it ran U:PGM. STATUS The status of the completed order U:ORDER STATUS The order quantity, exceeded or not U:ORDER QTY. The date of the order U:ORDER DATE The expected ship date of the order U:SHIP DATE The buyer's phone number U:BUYER PHONE Review the three other User Tracking Points that have been set up for the Tracking Management System. These tracking points are all active, and correspond to the tutorial jobs and test data provided with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. For detailed information on defining a User Tracking Point Definition, refer to "EDIM611 - User Tracking Point Definition Screen" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". 6. Press F3=Exit to return to the Extended System Management Menu. 7. Press F3=Exit again to return to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-55 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Tutorial Batch Processing The steps provided here will generate tracking information for the items contained in the tutorial data. You will then be able to use the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Query Request capabilities for reviewing and responding to the tracking information. In normal system operation, the processing performed by these steps would be an integrated part of your every day processing. For complete details about integrating Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint into your system operations, refer to Chapter 2, "Implementation Process". 1. For users without the Sterling Connect system, configure and submit JCL in member TMTUTOUT in GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL. This runs the outbound processes in Sterling Gentran using the tutorial data. Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file. Also, you need to modify the second parameter record in SYS001 for EBDI042 to assign “YOUR COMPANY” as the Default User ID starting in position 40. For users with Sterling Connect, configure and submit JCL in member TMTUTOPL in GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL. This runs the outbound processes in Sterling Gentran and the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities using the tutorial data. Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file. Also, you need to modify the second parameter record in SYS001 for EBDI042 to assign “YOUR COMPANY” as the Default User ID starting in position 40. 2. For users without the Sterling Connect system, configure and submit JCL in member TMTUTIN in GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL. This runs the inbound processes in Sterling Gentran using the tutorial data. Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file. 3-56 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing For users with Sterling Connect, configure and submit JCL in member TMTUTIPL in GENTRAN.V6X6.VPT.JCL. This runs the inbound processes in Sterling Gentran using the tutorial data and the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities. Note: If you are processing in Partner Relationship mode, you need to comment out the SYS095 DD statements for the Partner Cross Reference file and uncomment the EDIPREL DD statements for the Partner Relationship file Note: In order to run the TMTUTIPL job, ensure that the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint tutorial data has been added successfully to the Sterling Connect Data Queues using the LOADVPPL JCL member. If the data is not available, JCL member LOADVPPL should be submitted for processing prior to running TMTUTIPL. 3. After these jobs finish, data from Sterling Gentran and optionally Sterling Connect will now reside in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging Area. 4. From CICS, if the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint scanner has not already been started, enter the task code EDIV to start the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint scanner. This task will trigger Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint's post processor to move the data from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging area to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository and Master Index files. Note: The response “Viewpoint Scanner Started” is displayed by EDIV. To verify the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint scanner start up, select Log Display from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. Note: If you are using system image, replace EDI with your system image characters. You may now continue with the Tracking Management Tutorial at Query Requests. Tracking Query Requests The system has been set up and now you are ready for ongoing/daily tasks. Query Request provides you with an idea of the direct benefits provided by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management. This tutorial example will illustrate the use of Tracking Management in the context of supporting your customer, VENDOR-1, as outlined in "Step 1 - Determining Tracking Management Business Requirements" earlier in this chapter. The following tasks are performed: • Using Saved Query Requests • Ad Hoc and Extended Query Requests • Reviewing Exceptions from Tracking Management IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-57 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Using Saved Query Requests Processes included in the Extended EDI System can be queried in Tracking Management. Decisions need to be made as to the Item Type you want to inquire on, and the selection criteria to use to query the items to be selected. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management provides basic queries and extended search capabilities. Queries can be saved or created on an ad-hoc basis. In order to perform a Query, an Item Type must be selected. Depending on the Item Type selected, the number of processes displayed for status history (or, the "tracking path") will vary. The Item Type determines the processes in the tracking path for the item that can be viewed for status history. The lower the level of item type you select, the more complete a tracking path will be displayed. Level of item type refers to how close the item is, in form, to the actual end user application data. For example: Documents and transactions correspond on a one to one basis, so they are item types at the same level. Many transactions are a part of a functional group, so they are item types at different levels. History information will be available for item types at the same level, or higher, for a given query request. Using the sample environment, Item Types are listed below from lowest level to highest. 3-58 Process Item Type Level User Inbound Application U:INVOICE 1 Inbound Mapper Document 1 Inbound Editor - Transaction Transaction 1 Inbound Editor - Group Functional Group 2 Inbound Editor - Interchange Interchange 3 Connect Offline Utility Extract Batch 4 User Inbound Communications U:COMM BATCH 4 User Outbound Application U:ORDER 1 Outbound Mapper Document 1 Outbound Editor - Transaction Transaction 1 Outbound Editor - Group Functional Group 2 Outbound Editor - Interchange Interchange 3 Connect Offline Utility Add Batch 4 User Outbound Communications U:COMM BATCH 4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing For example: If an Item Type of Interchange were selected in the sample environment, history information would be displayed for the Interchange and Batch/U:COMM BATCH items only. History information would not be displayed for lower level items, such as Functional Groups and Transactions. Selecting an Item Type of a Document will make history information available for all item types in the tracking path connected to the document. Two sample Queries have been defined for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management system: @ORDERQY Shows outbound purchase orders from the lowest level Item Type U:ORDER. @INVOICEQY Shows inbound invoices from the lowest level Item Type U:INVOICE. The following steps will show you how to review the orders that have been processed and sent through the Purchase Order Application. 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu, select the Tracking Management option and press Enter. 2. From the Tracking Management Menu, select the Query Directory option and press Enter. The Query Directory is displayed showing the following sample Queries. EDIM701 9.5.1_____ Type Action, press Enter. 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select QUERY DIRECTORY 06/01/2011 Query Id @IBRTEQY__ Item Type DOCUMENT________ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Query ID @IBRTEQY @INVOICEQY @OBRTEQY @ORDERQY Item Type DOCUMENT U:INVOICE TRANSACTION U:ORDER LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd Description SAMPLE INBOUND REALTIME TRANSACTION QUERY SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE HISTORY QUERY SAMPLE OUTBOUND REALTIME DOCUMENT QUERY SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURCHASE ORDER HISTORY QUERY F8=Fwd F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-59 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing 3. Type 5 in the Action Field, next to @ORDERQY, and press Enter. The Query Request screen is displayed with the @ORDERQY query. EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs Query ID Description QUERY REQUEST 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl @ORDERQY__ (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: SAMPLE_OUTBOUND_PURCHASE_ORDER_HISTORY_QUERY_ Search Fields Search limit 010000 Find limit Item Type U:ORDER_________ (F4=Prompt) Reference _____________________________________________ Partner ___________________________________ Date From 12/01/2011 A Item Type __ __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help 4. To F4=Prompt 000100 12/31/2011 Reference F3=Exit NO Process F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Type 6 in the Action Field, and press Enter to initiate the search. EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs Query ID Description QUERY REQUEST 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl @ORDERQY__ (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: SAMPLE_OUTBOUND_PURCHASE_ORDER_HISTORY_QUERY_ Search Fields Search limit 010000 Find limit Item Type U:ORDER_________ (F4=Prompt) Reference _____________________________________________ Partner ___________________________________ Date From A __ __ __ __ __ __ 12/01/2011 Item Type U:ORDER U:ORDER U:ORDER U:ORDER U:ORDER U:ORDER F1=Help F3=Exit To 000100 12/31/2011 Reference PONUMBER-055 PONUMBER-056 PONUMBER-057 PONUMBER-058 PONUMBER-059 PONUMBER-060 F4=Prompt NO F7=Bkwd Process VPOBAPPL VPOBAPPL VPOBAPPL VPOBAPPL VPOBAPPL VPOBAPPL F8=Fwd F12=Cancel The search result shows all of the purchase orders that have been processed by the VPOBAPPL application process between December 1, 2011 and December 31, 2011. The purchase order numbers, passed from the application, are also displayed. 3-60 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing 5. You can refine this Query to show only the purchase orders sent to VENDOR-1. Enter VENDOR-1 in the Partner Field, again type 6 in the Action Field and press Enter. EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs Query ID Description QUERY REQUEST 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl @ORDERQY__ (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: SAMPLE_OUTBOUND_PURCHASE_ORDER_HISTORY_QUERY_ Search Fields Search limit 010000 Find limit Item Type U:ORDER_________ (F4=Prompt) Reference _____________________________________________ Partner VENDOR-1___________________________ Date From 12/01/2011 A Item Type __ U:ORDER __ U:ORDER __ __ __ __ To 000100 12/31/2011 Reference PONUMBER-055 PONUMBER-056 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt NO Process VPOBAPPL VPOBAPPL F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Only the purchase orders destined for VENDOR-1 are displayed. 6. Type 13 in the Action column, next to PONUMBER-055, and press Enter. For users who have submitted the JCL in member TMTUTOPL, the Item Reference History screen in the figure below displays reference numbers associated with the item for each process along the tracking path. EDIM711 __________ ITEM REFERENCE HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp 15=Excps Reference: Process PONUMBER-055 VPOBAPPL A Item Process Description __ U VPOBAPPL SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURC __ D EBDI042 OUTBOUND MAPPER __ T EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR __ F EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR __ I EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR __ B STOUTL OFFLINE UTILITIES __ __ __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help 06/01/2011 F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Reference PONUMBER-055 PONUMBER-055 000000030 /000000006 000000030 /000000006 000000030 00000000000030 /000000011 F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-61 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing For users who have submitted the JCL in member TMTUTOUT, the Item Reference History screen in the figure below displays reference numbers associated with the item for each process along the tracking path. EDIM711 __________ ITEM REFERENCE HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp Reference: Process 7. 15=Excps PONUMBER-055 VPOBAPPL A Item Process Description __ U VPOBAPPL SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURC __ D EBDI042 OUTBOUND MAPPER __ T EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR __ F EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR __ I EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR __ U VPOBCOMM SAMPLE OUTBOUND COMM __ __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help 06/01/2011 F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Reference PONUMBER-055 PONUMBER-055 000000030 /000000006 000000030 /000000006 000000030 OUTBOUND BATCH 4125 /000000011 F12=Cancel Type 8 in the Action column, next to VPOBAPPL, and press Enter. For users who have submitted the JCL in member TMTUTOPL for processing, the Item Status History screen in the figure below allows you to view the status of each process along the tracking path for the purchase order. In the sample environment, you are able to track the item end-to-end. In addition to the status information, this screen also provides the date and time processed and whether or not there are any Exceptions tied to this item in Exception Management. EDIM710 __________ ITEM STATUS HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs Reference: Process A 15=Excps PONUMBER-055 VPOBAPPL Item Process Description Status Date Time Excp __ U VPOBAPPL SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURCHASE ORD OK 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ D EBDI042 OUTBOUND MAPPER 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ T EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ F EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ I EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR __ __ __ __ __ __ __ B STOUTL OFFLINE UTILITIES F1=Help 3-62 06/01/2011 F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd 00 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 ADDED 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing For users who have submitted the JCL in member TMTUTOUT for processing, the Item Status History screen in the figure below allows you to view the status of each process along the tracking path for the purchase order. In the sample environment, you are able to track the item end-to-end. In addition to the status information, this screen also provides the date and time processed and whether or not there are any Exceptions tied to this item in Exception Management. EDIM710 __________ ITEM STATUS HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs Reference: Process A 15=Excps PONUMBER-055 VPOBAPPL Item Process Description Status Date Time Excp __ U VPOBAPPL SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURCHASE ORD OK 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ D EBDI042 OUTBOUND MAPPER 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ T EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ F EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ I EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ U VPOBCOMM SAMPLE OUTBOUND COMMUNICATIO XMITTED F1=Help 8. 06/01/2011 F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd 00 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit to return to the Tracking Management Menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-63 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Ad Hoc and Extended Query Requests VENDOR-1 calls you with some distressing news. A payment for one of their invoices has not been received. They had received a call from your Accounts Payable department indicating that the invoice had been rejected in the translation system. In fact, Exception Management Profile &TEDIREJ had notified Accounts Payable of the rejected invoice and prompted them to call VENDOR-1. VENDOR-1 would like you to take a look at the problem and provide some more information, as they wish to send a new invoice. Tracking Management can be used to research the rejected invoice while you remain on the phone with VENDOR-1. The following steps will show you how to resolve the problem with VENDOR-1: 1. Copy down the following information which VENDOR-1 provides: Invoice Number: Group Control Number of invoice they sent - on AK1: Transaction Control Number from Invoice Rejected - on AK2: The date the invoice was sent (today's date): 2. INV56 000000091 000025056 mm/dd/yyyy Verify that a Functional Acknowledgement with the reject status was sent to VENDOR-1. You will use an ad hoc query for this task. a. From the Tracking Management Menu, select the Query Request option and press Enter. To enter into ad-hoc query mode, space out the Query ID field and press Enter to display a blank Query Request screen. b. On the Query Request screen, type the following information: Item Type: Partner: TRANSACTION VENDOR-1 EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl Query ID Description __________ (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: _____________________________________________ Search Fields Item Type Reference Partner Date From Search limit 010000 Find limit TRANSACTION_____ (F4=Prompt) _____________________________________________ VENDOR-1___________________________ __________ To __________ A Item Type __ __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help 3-64 QUERY REQUEST F3=Exit Reference F4=Prompt F7=Bkwd NO 000100 Process F8=Fwd F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing c. You will need to refine the search further, to specify that only Outbound 997s are to be included in the search. On the Query Request screen, type 7 in the Action field and press Enter. This will display the Extended Search Condition screen. Enter the following information: Field Op Value Connector SET EQ 997 AND DIRECTION EQ O Note: The value of O indicates outbound. EDIM703 __________ EXTENDED SEARCH CONDITION Type Action, press Enter __ 6=Search 14=Query Query ID 06/01/2011 : Query Request Search Fields Item Type: TRANSACTION Reference: Partner : VENDOR-1 Date From: To Extended Condition (F4=Prompt) Field Op SET______________________ EQ DIRECTION________________ EQ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt Value Connector 997________________________________ AND O__________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-65 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing d. Type 6 in the Action field and press Enter. A confirmation message will be displayed. Press Enter again to run the query. EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs QUERY REQUEST 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl Query ID Description __________ (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: _____________________________________________ Search Fields Item Type Reference Partner Date From Search limit 010000 Find limit TRANSACTION_____ (F4=Prompt) _____________________________________________ VENDOR-1___________________________ __________ To __________ A Item Type __ TRANSACTION __ __ __ __ __ Reference 000000031 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt /000000025 F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd /000000025 YES 000100 Process EBDI002 F12=Cancel The 997 sent to VENDOR-1 is now displayed. e. To review the detail of this Item, type 9 in the Action column next to the transaction, and press Enter. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 14=Query 15=Excps Item Identification Item Type . . : TRANSACTION Reference . . : 000000031 /000000025 /000000025 Trace ID . . : OE00000029 To/From: OE00000030 User Reference: System/Process: GENTRAN /EBDI002 Recip/Action: Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Direction/Set : OUTBOUND/997 Application . : Network . . . : Partner . . . : VENDOR-1 Qual . . . . : Databank . . : GENTRAN Process Statuses Ack Status . . : Comp Status. . : Env Status . . : Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: F1=Help F3=Exit Mapping Status : Network Status : Seq Status . . : F12=Cancel The Item Process Detail screen provides more information about the 997 document. 3-66 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing f. To view the actual data in the Databank, type 11 in the Action field and press Enter. The entire functional acknowledgement is displayed. g. Press F8=Fwd to view the rest of the acknowledgement. Notice the "E" in the AK5 segment. This tells your trading partner that this particular invoice contained an error. EDIM716 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl System : Process : Desc. : Item Type: Reference: ITEM DATA DISPLAY 10=MsgList GENTRAN EBDI002 OUTBOUND EDITOR TRANSACTION 000000031 /000000025 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 15=Excps /000000025 Item Data AK4*3*355*7*QQ? AK3*CTT*34? AK4*1*354*1* ? AK5*E*4*5? AK9*E*2*2*2? SE*16*000000025? END OF RECORDS FOR DOCUMENT F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F7=Bkwd h. 3. F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit to return to the Tracking Management Menu. Determine what happened to the invoice and why it was rejected. You will use the Query Request and save the Query ID. a. From the Tracking Management Menu, select the Query Request option and press Enter. First verify that the invoice (INV56) never made it to the Inbound Invoice Application or the Inbound Mapper. This will determine that the invoice was rejected in the Inbound Editor. b. Enter a new Query ID. On the Query Request screen, type 1 to add a Query, then type the following information: Query ID: INVOICE1 Description: Search for Rejected Invoice Item Type: U:INVOICE Reference: INV56 Partner: VENDOR-1 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-67 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Note: U:INVOICE are items from the Inbound Invoice Application. Press Enter to add the Query INVOICE1. EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl Query ID Description INVOICE1__ (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: SEARCH_FOR_REJECTED_INVOICE__________________ Search Fields Item Type Reference Partner Date From Search limit 010000 Find limit U:INVOICE_______ (F4=Prompt) INV56________________________________________ VENDOR-1___________________________ __________ To __________ A Item Type __ __ __ __ __ __ ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit c. QUERY REQUEST Reference F4=Prompt F7=Bkwd YES 000100 Process F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Type 6 in the Action field and press Enter to run the Query. There is no information -- the invoice never made it to the Inbound Invoice Application. d. Modify the Query by changing the Item Type to DOCUMENT (referring to the Inbound Mapper): Item Type: DOCUMENT Type 6 in the Action field and press Enter to run the Query. Again, there is no information -- the invoice never made it to the Inbound Mapper. e. Modify the Query again, this time with the following information: Item Type: Reference: Date From: TRANSACTION mm/dd/yyyy Note: TRANSACTION refers to the Inbound Editor; we are deleting the reference as it would be a control number for the transaction; mm/dd/yyyy refers to today's date. Type 2 in the Action field and press Enter to update and save the Query. f. 3-68 Type 7 in the Action field and press Enter to get to the Extended Search Condition screen. We will refine the Query to find the invoice in question. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing On the Extended Search Condition screen type the following: Field Op Value Connector SET EQ 810 AND DIRECTION EQ I AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATUSEQ EDIM703 __________ EXTENDED SEARCH CONDITION Type Action, press Enter __ 6=Search 14=Query Query ID : INVOICE1 E 06/01/2011 SEARCH FOR REJECTED INVOICE Query Request Search Fields Item Type: TRANSACTION Reference: Partner : VENDOR-1 Date From: 06/01/2011 To Extended Condition (F4=Prompt) Field Op SET______________________ EQ DIRECTION________________ EQ ACKNOWLEDGEMENT_STATUS___ EQ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ F1=Help g. F3=Exit F4=Prompt Value Connector 810________________________________ AND I__________________________________ AND E__________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ F12=Cancel Type 14 in the Action field and press Enter. This will allow you to return to the Query Request screen. Type 2 in the Action field and press Enter to update and save the query. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-69 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing h. Type 6 in the Action field and press Enter to run the Query. EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs Query ID Description QUERY REQUEST 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl INVOICE1__ (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: SEARCH_FOR_REJECTED_INVOICE__________________ Search Fields Search limit 010000 Find limit Item Type TRANSACTION_____ (F4=Prompt) Reference _____________________________________________ Partner VENDOR-1___________________________ Date From 06/01/2011 A Item Type __ TRANSACTION __ __ __ __ __ To 000100 __________ Reference 000000237 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt YES /000000091 F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd /000025056 Process EBDI001 F12=Cancel You can find Functional Group Control Number "91" and Transaction Control Number "25056". This is the rejected invoice. i. Review the history of the invoice to verify where the problem occurred. Type 8 in the Action column, next to the invoice with Transaction Control Number "25056," and press Enter to view the Item Status History. For users who have submitted the JCL in member TMTUTIPL for processing, the Item Status History screen in the figure below shows you that the invoice transaction had a status of "04" in the Inbound Editor. The next task illustrates how the actual exception can be verified and explained to the customer. 3-70 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing EDIM710 __________ ITEM STATUS HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs Reference: Process A 06/01/2011 15=Excps VIEWPOINT TUTORIAL DATA STOUTL__ Description Status Date __ Item Process B STOUTL OFFLINE UTILITIES EXTRACTED 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ I EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ F EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ T EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR 04 06/01/2011 12:00 0002 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ D EBDI041 INBOUND MAPPER 04 06/01/2011 12:00 0001 F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Time Excp 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 F12=Cancel For users who have submitted the JCL in member TMTUTIN for processing, the Item Status History screen in the figure below shows you that the invoice transaction had a status of "04" in the Inbound Editor. The next task illustrates how the actual exception can be verified and explained to the customer. EDIM710 __________ ITEM STATUS HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs Reference: Process A 06/01/2011 15=Excps INBOUND BATCH 4125 VPIBCOMM Item Process Description Status Date Time Excp __ U VPIBCOMM SAMPLE INBOUND COMMUNICATION RECEIVED 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ I EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 __ F EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ T EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR 04 06/01/2011 12:00 0002 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ D EBDI041 INBOUND MAPPER 04 06/01/2011 12:00 0001 F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd 06/01/2011 12:00 0000 F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-71 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Reviewing Exceptions from Tracking Management On the Item Status History screen, an exception count for the item for each process is given. You can "jump" to Exception Management to view details of the exceptions. The following steps will explain how to review exceptions from Tracking Management: 1. With the example rejected invoice, there are Exceptions tied to the item. Type 15 next to the T (Transaction) item with a status of 04 and press Enter to view the Item Exception Status screen. EDIM718 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl System : Process : Desc. : Item Type: Reference: ITEM EXCEPTION STATUS 10=MsgList GENTRAN EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR TRANSACTION 000000237 /000000091 06/01/2011 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 16=ExcpDtl /000025056 A Recipient Action Status Date Time Capture Id __ &TAPDEPT &TBTCHFAX OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 &TEDIREJ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ @EDITORS OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 @MODEL-IE F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel This screen shows the open exceptions; the one we care about is the one that the A/P department has not closed. 3-72 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing 2. Type 16 in the Action column next to the first open Exception (Recipient &TAPDEPT), and press Enter. This action will cause a "jump" from Tracking Management to Exception Management and display the Exception Detail screen. EDIM649 __________ EXCEPTION DETAIL 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. __ 4=Delete 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip. 12=ItemExcp Recipient . . : &TAPDEPT ACCOUNTS PAYABLE DEPARTMENT Excp Status . : OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 Excp Tag . . : 0000000056 User Reference: 000000237 /000000091 /000025056 System/Process: GENTRAN Excp. /EBDI001 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Capture ID. . : &TEDIREJ Description . : CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES Application Network . . . Direction/Set Partner . . . Qual . . . . F1=Help 3. : : : INBOUND /810 : VENDOR-1 : F3=Exit F6=Next Action: &TBTCHFAX Action Dt-Tm: 06/01/2011-12:00 Databank: GENTRAN Interchange: 000000237 Group: 000000091 Trans: 000025056 F12=Cancel Type 8 in the Action field and press Enter. This will provide the User Message Display. This message was created in Exception Management to describe, in your terms, what caused the Exception. EDIM662 __________ USER MESSAGE DISPLAY Type Action, Press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=Data 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist Reference : 000000237 /000000091 Excp Tag : 0000000056 Description: CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES 06/01/2011 /000025056 Message U-003001 CRITICAL ERROR -- REJECTED Explanation AN INBOUND INVOICE WAS REJECTED BY THE EDI EDITOR FOR FAILURE TO PASS COMPLIANCE CHECKING. F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-73 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing 4. Type 7 in the Action field and press Enter. This will display the Exception Message List screen. EDIM650 __________ EXCEPTION MESSAGE LIST Type Action, press Enter. 6=Excp 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist System : Process : Desc. : Reference: GENTRAN EBDI001 CAPTURE REJECTED INVOICES 000000237 /000000091 /000025056 A Message __ U-003001 CRITICAL ERROR -- REJECTED __ 62 17 BIG 1 MENT. __ 63 20 REF 1 NVALID CODE WAS FOUND. __ 62 22 N1 1 MENT. __ 63 26 IT1 3 QQ NVALID CODE WAS FOUND. __ 62 29 CTT 1 MENT. F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F7=Bkwd 06/01/2011 F8=Fwd MISSING INDICATED MANDATORY ELE IN THE IDENTIFIED ELEMENT, AN I MISSING INDICATED MANDATORY ELE IN THE IDENTIFIED ELEMENT, AN I MISSING INDICATED MANDATORY ELE F12=Cancel These are messages passed by Sterling Gentran. The same messages could have been viewed while remaining in Tracking Management (for example, from Item Status History). In addition, User Applications can pass messages through to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Messages for User Applications can only be viewed in Tracking Management. The Exception Message List screen tells us that rejection took place as a result of a missing mandatory element. 3-74 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Processing 5. Type 9 in the first Action column and press Enter. This action displays the User Procedure Display screen. The screen below is the User Procedure created for handling rejected invoices. EDIM663 __________ USER PROCEDURE DISPLAY Type Action, Press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=Data 9=UserMsg 10=ExcpHist 06/01/2011 Procedure : UP3001 Description: HANDLE REJECTED INVOICES Procedure 1. IDENTIFY PARTNER 2. GET ENVELOPE CONTROL NUMBERS 3. NOTIFY PARTNER TO HAVE INVOICE SENT AGAIN 4. TRANSFER THIS EXCEPTION TO THE RECIPIENT &TEDIGRP (EDI GROUP) WHO WILL CLOSE THIS EXCEPTION OUT F1=Help 6. F3=Exit F12=Cancel Type 10 in the Action field and press Enter. This will take you to the Exception History screen where you can view the history of the Exception. EDIM652 __________ EXCEPTION HISTORY Type Action, Press Enter. _ 6=Excp 7=Data 8=MsgList 9=HistUpdt Reference . . : 000000237 Current Status : OPEN Date-Time /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . : Update Initials: Date-Time . . : Recipient . . : - Note . . . . . : LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next 7. F8=Fwd F12=Cancel To close the Exception out, type 9 in the Action field and press Enter to display the Exception History Update screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-75 Tracking Management Tutorial Processing Close the Exception by typing C in the Status field and typing a note at the bottom: THIS ITEM HAS BEEN CLOSED BY THE EDI COORDINATOR. IT SHOULD HAVE BEEN TRANSFERRED TO THE EDI GROUP. I WILL NOTIFY THEM. VENDOR-1 HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AND A NEW INVOICE WILL BE SENT. 8. Type 2 in the Action field and press Enter. The system will display a confirmation message. Press Enter again to close the Exception. EDIM654 __________ Type Action, Press Enter. _ 2=Update EXCEPTION HISTORY UPDATE Reference . . : 000000237 Current Status : OPEN Date-Time /000000091 06/01/2011 /000025056 . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . . C (C=Close, R=Review, T=Transfer) Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Recipient . . . __________ (F4=Prompt) Description . . Note . . . . . . THIS_ITEM_HAS_BEEN_CLOSED_BY_THE_EDI_COORDINATOR._IT______ SHOULD_HAVE_BEEN_TRANSFERRED_TO_THE_EDI_GROUP._I_WILL_NOTIFY_THEM._______ VENDOR-1_HAS_BEEN_NOTIFIED_AND_A_NEW_INVOICE_WILL_BE_SENT._______________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ UPDATE COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel 9. Press F12=Cancel to return to the Exception History screen. 10. Type 6 in the Action field and press Enter to return to the Exception Detail screen. 11. Type 12 in the Action field and press Enter to make the "jump" back to Tracking Management and the Item Exception Status screen. The Exception will now show a status of Closed. 12. Press F3=Exit to return to the Tracking Management Menu. While VENDOR-1 is still on the phone, you have been able to relay the information you queried, and the action you took. VENDOR-1 now knows what to do to correct the invoice and resend it. This completes the Query Request tasks for the sample business situation. You may use these steps to perform additional queries against the tutorial data. Once you have finished using the tracking information created with the tutorial (and exceptions), you should follow the Tutorial Reset Instructions in "Tracking Management Tutorial Reset" at the end of this chapter. 3-76 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Requesting Tracking Management Reports Requesting Tracking Management Reports Although Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint automates the tasks of monitoring your EDI processing, there may still be instances when reports will need to be generated. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry feature allows you to specify the type of information you want reported. For detailed information about the wide range of selection criteria available, refer to the "Selection Criteria Reference Chart" in Chapter 5, "Screen Descriptions". In this example, the EDI manager wants to list and determine how many purchase orders were processed by the purchase order system during the current month (for example, December 2011). Creating an Inquiry Definition 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu, select Extended System Management. 2. From the Extended System Management Menu, select Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition screen will be displayed. 3. Enter the following information: Identifier: &TPOITEMS Description: PURCHASE ORDERS PROCESSED IN A MONTH Status: E File: REPOSITORY Mode: INQUIRY Class: TRACKING Report Level: STATUS Selection Criteria: ITEM TYPE EQ U:ORDER AND PROCESSED DATE GE 06/01/2011 (MM/DD/YYYY)* AND PROCESSED DATE LE 12/31/2011 (MM/DD/YYYY)* *. substitute start/end dates of the current month IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-77 Requesting Tracking Management Reports 4. Type a 1 in the Action field and press Enter. The system will display a confirmation message. Press Enter again to confirm the ADD. EDIM609 9.2.5_____ MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY OPTIONS DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 06/01/2011 Identifier &TPOITEMS_ Description PURCHASE_ORDERS_PROCESSED_IN_A_MONTH_________ Status . . . E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Operation (F4=Prompt) File . . . REPOSITORY Mode . . . INQUIRY Class . . . Report Level TRACKING__ STATUS Selection Criteria (F4=Prompt) Field Op Value Con. ITEM_TYPE___________ EQ U:ORDER______________________________________ AND PROCESSED_DATE______ GE 06/01/2011___________________________________ AND PROCESSED_DATE______ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ LE __ __ __ __ 06/01/2011___________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ ADD COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit 5. F4=Prompt ___ ___ ___ ___ F12=Cancel Press F3=Exit twice to return to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint main menu. Generating Reports The report is generated by running the batch procedure, Maintenance/Inquiry (EDIN140), and specifying the Inquiry Definition Identifier &TPOITEMS that was just created. This job may be included in your daily job stream. For information about “EDIM609 - Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen,” refer to Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions”. For detailed information about batch program “EDIN140 Maintenance/Inquiry,” refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 1, “Batch Program Descriptions”. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is delivered with several models for Maintenance/Inquiry. You may want to review these from the Maintenance/Inquiry Directory and build maintenance criteria and special reports for your specific needs. For this example, the number of purchase orders can be found on the "Total Entries Selected" line in the Processing Summary Report. Each purchase order is also listed in the Status Report. 3-78 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Housekeeping Tracking Management Housekeeping Periodic maintenance should be performed on your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. For example, you may decide to delete tracking information that has been saved for longer than 31 days. Creating a Maintenance Definition Follow these steps to create a definition that purges tracking information over 31 days old. When the scheduled processing of the JCL occurs, the purge will occur. 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu, select Extended System Management. 2. From the Extended System Management Menu, select Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition screen will be displayed. 3. Enter the following information: Identifier: &TDELTM31 Description: DELETE TRACKING INFORMATION OVER 31 DAYS Status: E File: REPOSITORY Mode: PURGE Class: TRACKING Report Level: BOTH Selection Criteria: AGE TRACKING GT 031 4. Enter a 1 in the Action field and press Enter. The system will display a confirmation message. Press Enter again to confirm the ADD. 5. Press F3=Exit twice to return to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. Performing File Maintenance The items will be purged, and optionally archived, by running the batch procedure Maintenance/ Inquiry (EDIN140) and specifying the Maintenance Definition Identifier &TDELTM31 that was just created. This job may be included in your daily job stream. For detailed information about “EDIM609 - Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen,” refer to Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions”. For detailed information about the batch program “EDIN140 - Maintenance/Inquiry,” refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 1, “Batch Program Descriptions”. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is delivered with several models for Maintenance/Inquiry. You may want to review these from the Maintenance/Inquiry Directory and build maintenance criteria and special reports for your specific needs. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-79 Tracking Management Tutorial Reset Tracking Management Tutorial Reset Tutorial Reset Instructions You may reset the tutorial by using the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry feature to purge the tutorial data from the repository. The following instructions pertain to the tracking information generated in the tutorial. Refer to "Tutorial Reset Instructions" in "Exception Management Tutorial Reset" to remove exception information. EDIM609 9.2.5_____ MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY OPTIONS DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 06/01/2011 Identifier ANYNAME___ Description PURGE_TUTORIAL_TRACKING_DATA_________________ Status . . . E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Operation (F4=Prompt) File . . . REPOSITORY Mode . . . PURGE__ Class . . . Report Level TRACKING__ BOTH__ Selection Criteria (F4=Prompt) Field Op Value PARTNER_____________ EQ VENDOR-1_____________________________________ PARTNER_____________ EQ VENDOR-2_____________________________________ PARTNER_____________ EQ VENDOR-3_____________________________________ PARTNER_____________ EQ VENDOR-4_____________________________________ ITEM_TYPE___________ EQ U:COMM_BATCH_________________________________ ITEM_TYPE___________ EQ U:BATCH______________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ ENTRY NOT DEFINED F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt 1. 3-80 Con. OR_ OR_ OR_ OR_ OR_ ___ F12=Cancel Create an Online Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition with the following information: File: REPOSITORY Mode: PURGE Class: TRACKING Report Level: BOTH Selection Criteria: PARTNER EQ VENDOR-1 OR PARTNER EQ VENDOR-2 OR PARTNER EQ VENDOR-3 OR PARTNER EQ VENDOR-4 OR ITEM TYPE EQ U:COMM BATCH OR ITEM TYPE EQ U:BATCH IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Tracking Management Tutorial Reset 2. Run the batch job EDIN140, specifying the Maintenance definition identifier just created. This will delete the tutorial data from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository. Note: The definitions and profiles defined in the Exception Setup portion of the tutorial are still enabled for capturing exceptions. To remove these, you should mark them for deletion using the Exception Management Menu options. Caution to the EDI Coordinator: Use caution running any tutorial or practice data in a production environment. It is a good idea to use the tutorial naming convention (&T...) used in the tutorial to ensure that sample data will not interfere with live data. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-81 Tracking Management Tutorial Reset 3-82 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 4 Using the Online Facility This chapter provides general use information and a common reference for the Online Facility Function Keys and Actions. Chapter Four is organized into six sections: Topic Page Prerequisites ........................................................................................................................... 4-2 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Options ..................................................................................... 4-2 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users ......................................................................................... 4-4 Function Keys ........................................................................................................................ 4-4 Actions ................................................................................................................................... 4-5 Jump Codes ............................................................................................................................ 4-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-1 Prerequisites Prerequisites It is recommended that users of the Online Facility should be familiar with Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint features, concepts, and terminology. For details regarding these topics, refer to Chapter 1, “Feature Summary” and “Concepts and Terminology”. For new users, Chapter 3, “Tutorial” provides basic instructions for managing exceptions and using Tracking Management. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Options The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu provides you with direct access to the primary functions of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint product. Refer to "Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint High-Level Navigation", for a high-level navigation flow of the options for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The options available from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu are: 4-2 System Options Provides global control for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing. Extended System Management Provides administrative functions for defining and managing your Extended EDI System monitoring. Exception Management Provides set up and control for managing exceptions within your Extended EDI system. Exception Inquiry Provides end users with the tools needed to manage exceptions that have occurred in their EDI processing environment. Tracking Management (optional) Provides end users with query functions to search for an item travelling through the extended EDI environment. Log Display From the Log Display, you may view all system messages generated by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint background CICS functions. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Options Main Menu Options The following diagram illustrates the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. EDIM600 9.0_______ VIEWPOINT MAIN MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. _ 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 99. F1=Help F3=Exit System Options Extended System Management Exception Management Exception Inquiry Tracking Management Log Display F15=Logoff Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint High-Level Navigation Figure 4.1 illustrates the high-level navigation path of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint screens. Viewpoint Main Menu EDIM600 System Options EDIM685 Extended System Management EDIM601 Exception Management EDIM620 Exception Inquiry EDIM645 Tracking Management (Optional) EDIM700 Log Display EDIM688 Figure 4.1 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint High-Level Navigation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-3 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Users The typical users of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint fall into two categories: • Administrative Users (for example, System Administrator, EDI Coordinator) • End-Users (for example, Customer Order Processing clerk) Administrative Users access System Options, Extended System Management, and Exception Management to set up and control the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint environment. The EDI Coordinator typically performs these functions. End Users access Exception Inquiry, Tracking Management, and possibly, Exception Management to manage exceptions which occur against their business documents, and monitor their business data through their extended EDI systems on a day-to-day basis. Function Keys Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides the following function keys in the Online Facility: 4-4 F1=Help If the cursor is not positioned on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If you position the cursor on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields that are marked with F4=Prompt. F6=Next Displays the same entry or display screen for the next object from the current list screen. No update is performed for the current object. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F10=FldDtl Displays the detail screen for the field where the cursor is currently located. The field detail function is only available for fields that have "D" (Detail) as a valid value. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. No update is performed on the current object. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Actions Actions Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides actions to users of the Online Facility. Actions are presented in the form of an Action List at the top of each screen. To invoke an action, type the action code number of the action you wish to invoke, and press Enter. The following actions are available in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Online Facility. Add The Action code for Add is always 1. Use the Add action to add new entries (for example, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profile Definition) to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. If the object already exists, an error message is issued to which you must respond. In this situation, you must either use the Update action or change the object you are trying to add to an object that does not exist. A confirmation response is requested for the Add action. Respond to the confirmation by pressing Enter to complete the action. Respond to the confirmation by pressing F12=Cancel to cancel the action. Data Enter the Data action to display the data for the current exception. The Exception Data Display screen displays exception data processed by the Sterling Gentran translation system. For Sterling Gentran:Plus users, the Interchange Detail screen displays exception data processed by the Sterling Connect communications system. Delete The Action code for Delete is always 4. Type 4 in the Action field to mark the entry for deletion. The next maintenance run will remove the entry and optionally archive it. To recover an entry that has been deleted, you must restore it from the archive file. An entry marked for deletion is displayed until maintenance removes it from Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. An entry marked for deletion cannot be updated. A confirmation response is requested for the Delete action. Respond to the confirmation by pressing Enter to complete the action. Respond to the confirmation by pressing F12=Cancel to cancel the action. Disable Use Disable to disable the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system, functional areas, and profiles. Enable Use Enable to enable the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system, functional areas, and profiles. Excp The Exception Detail screen is displayed. ExcpHist The Exception History screen is displayed. ExcpList The Exception List screen is displayed. HistUpdt The History Update screen for the current exception is displayed. MsgList The Message List screen is displayed, listing all messages issued for the item by the process. For Sterling Gentran processes, all messages issued by the process are listed. For Sterling Gentran:Plus users, the explanatory text associated to a Sterling Connect failure code is IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-5 Actions displayed. For User processes, the only message(s) displayed are those passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item by the user application. Recip. The Recipient Detail screen is displayed. Select The Action code for Select is always 5. The Detail screen for the selected entry is displayed. TSQDir The Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory screen is displayed. Update The Action code for Update is always 2. The entry is updated using the screens current values. If the entry does not exist, a message is issued which you must respond to. In this situation you must either use the Add action or change the object you are trying to update to be an object which does exist. A confirmation response is requested for the Update action. Respond to the confirmation by pressing Enter to complete the action. Respond to the confirmation by pressing F12=Cancel to cancel the action. Usage The Usage Cross Reference screen is displayed. UserMsg The User Message Display screen is displayed. UserProc The User Procedure Display screen is displayed. Tracking Management Only DataDisp For Sterling Gentran data items, the Item Data Display screen is displayed to show the data for the item. All messages for the item are inserted into the data in the appropriate places. This action is only valid for Sterling Gentran processes. To use this action, the Sterling Gentran Databank Message Store must be implemented. For Sterling Gentran:Plus users, Sterling Connect data items are displayed by the Interchange Detail screen. To use this action, the data must be stored on the Sterling Connect Data Queues. 4-6 Excps The Item Exception Status screen is displayed to show a list of recipients that captured the item. ExcpDtl The Exception Detail screen from the Exception Inquiry functional area is displayed. This screen will display the exception detail information for the item. ExtCond The Extended Search Condition screen is displayed. From this screen you may add to your search criteria specified on the Query Request screen. This screen should be used when the Query Request screens Search Fields are not sufficient for specifying your query condition. ItemDtl The Item Process Detail screen is displayed. ItemExcp The Item Exception status screen is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Actions ItemHist The Item Status History screen is displayed. Processes are listed in chronological order with a status indicator issued by each process. ItemRefs The Item Reference History screen is displayed. Processes are listed in chronological order with the reference assigned to the item by each process. Query Return to the Query Request screen. The search field, extended search condition, and the items that were found will be displayed. Search The Action Code for Search is 6. When Search is requested, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint searches for items that match the search fields that you have entered. There are two options set by the user on the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint record in the Configuration file which are used to minimize the time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint spends searching for items: • One is the Search Limit, which is used to control the number of items Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will check before ending the search. • The other is the Find limit, which causes Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to stop searching after it has found this number of items. For more details about these configuration options, refer to “EDICFG Configuration File” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “File Descriptions” chapter. The search function tries to find all items in your entire extended EDI environment that satisfy the search field values. If an extended search condition has been entered, the items must also match the extended condition. The search fields and Extended Condition can be changed to further reduce the current list by entering 6 in the Action field to perform the search again. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-7 Jump Codes Jump Codes A Jump Code is a 10-character alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint screen. This field enables you to move, or “jump”, directly from one screen to another while bypassing menus. All screens accessible through a Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint menu have jump code values associated with them. Screens accessible only from detail screens do not have jump code values associated with them. How to Jump Between Screens In the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system, you can jump between screens without having to navigate through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens: 1. Press Home. The cursor moves to the jump code field at the top of the screen to the right of the screen number. 2. Type the jump code and press Enter. For a complete list of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Jump Codes and their associated screens, refer to “Appendix A” of this guide. Types of Jump Codes There are three types of jump codes: • Numeric • Alphabetic • Special Character These jump codes are described in detail below: Numeric Jump Codes Numeric Jump Codes consist of numbers separated by periods (.). The numbers in the jump code correspond to the numbers selected on menus, in the order in which they are selected. For example: To display the Sterling Tracking Point Definition screen, you could navigate using the Sterling Gentran menus by performing the following steps: 1. Type 9 on the Sterling Gentran Main Menu and press Enter. 2. Type 2 on the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu and press Enter. 3. Type 2 on the Extended System Management Menu and press Enter. OR “jump” directly to the Sterling Tracking Point Definition screen by performing the following steps: 4-8 1. Press Home. 2. Type 9.2.2 in the jump code field of any screen, and press Enter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Jump Codes For a complete list of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Jump Codes and their associated screens, refer to “Appendix A” of this guide. Alphabetic Jump Codes Alphabetic Jump Codes consist of alphabetic characters separated by periods (.). The alphabetic code is an abbreviated reference to the screen name or function. For example: To display the Sterling Tracking Point Definition screen using the alphabetic jump code, type VP.STPDEF in the jump code field of any screen and press Enter. For a complete list of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Jump Codes, and their associated screens, refer to “Appendix A” in this guide. Special Character Jump Codes Special Character Jump Codes enable you to perform standard or generic functions with jump codes. The two special character jump codes are SWAP and EXIT. • SWAP enables you to jump between Sterling Gentran online subsystems (for example, Partner, Databanking, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, etc.) not within subsystems. When you use jump code “SWAP”, you jump to the last screen you “jumped” from (but not navigated from), within another subsystem. When you jump from a different subsystem, you reset the SWAP positioning to the screen you are jumping from. For example: • • You are currently on the Group Information screen in the Partner subsystem. • You jump to the Sterling Tracking Point Definition screen in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint subsystem. • After you have reviewed the information on the Sterling Tracking Point Definition screen, type SWAP in the jump code field. • You will be returned to the Group Information screen in the Partner subsystem from which you jumped. EXIT (or X) enables you to jump to the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logoff screen. This feature provides a quick and easy way to exit the Sterling Gentran system from any screen. User Defined Jump Code Table The User Defined Jump Code Table is a user customizing tool that enables you to define your own jump code values. This facility requires a table that consists of the 10-character user code and the 10-character Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint jump code. It must be coded in an Assembler table, and the name of the table must be entered on the Configuration file (Record Type 0). An entry for the table name must be added to your CICS Resource Definitions. When you enter a jump code, the system verifies that the jump code you entered is valid by first checking the User Defined Jump Code Table. If you have not defined a User Defined Jump Code IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-9 Jump Codes Table, or if the jump code you entered is not in that table, then the system checks the default jump code table. See member EDIJUMP in the Sterling Gentran:Basic UTILITY.SOURCE PDS for help using the User Defined Jump Code table. Jump Code Guidelines The Sterling Gentran:Basic system keeps independent position information for each subsystem (Partner, Standards, Databank, Security, and Mapping), as well as for all Sterling Gentran add-on products (Sterling Gentran:Plus, IBM® Sterling Gentran:Control®, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, and Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint). The independence of these subsystems enables you to jump or navigate from subsystem to subsystem without having to re-enter a key for that screen. The general rules for using jump codes are as follows: 4-10 • You can "jump" only to screens that are directly accessible through selecting menu options. • You can "jump" from any screen. • Navigating or jumping to the Sterling Gentran Copyright/Signon screen, or exiting the Sterling Gentran system, clears the positions for all subsystems. • After you "jump" from a subsystem to another subsystem, you can return directly to the screen you jumped from by typing SWAP in the jump code field. • You cannot use "SWAP" to jump between screens within the same subsystem. • Typing SWAP is the only method by which you can "jump" to a screen that has no jump code associated with it, as long as SWAP positioning has been established by jumping from one subsystem screen to a different subsystem screen. • An invalid jump code causes the system to display the message "INVALID JUMP CODE ENTERED" on the current screen. • You cannot “jump” to subsystems that are not installed, or for which you do not have security access. The message “INVALID JUMP - USER LACKS AUTHORITY” will be displayed on the current screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 5 Screen Descriptions This chapter describes the purpose of each screen and how to use all their related functions. Each of the screens is described with the following format: • Purpose • Actions • Function Keys • Field Descriptions Topic Page EDIM600 – Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu .................................................... 5-3 System Options Screens System Options Navigation ............................................................................................. 5-5 EDIM685 – System Options Screen ............................................................................... 5-6 EDIM686 – Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory Screen ............................... 5-10 Extended System Management Screens Extended System Management Navigation .................................................................. 5-13 EDIM601 – Extended System Management Menu ...................................................... 5-14 EDIM602 – Sterling Tracking Point Directory Screen ................................................. 5-16 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran ................. 5-19 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect ................. 5-25 EDIM604 – Tracking Point System Message Control Screen ...................................... 5-30 EDIM605 – Tracking Point Status Control Screen ....................................................... 5-32 EDIM606 – Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control Screen ................................ 5-34 EDIM607 – Functional Area Control Screen ............................................................... 5-36 EDIM608 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Screen ....................................... 5-38 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen ...................................... 5-41 EDIM610 – User Tracking Point Directory Screen ...................................................... 5-56 EDIM611 – User Tracking Point Definition Screen ..................................................... 5-59 Exception Management Screens Exception Management Navigation .............................................................................. 5-62 EDIM620 – Exception Management Menu .................................................................. 5-63 EDIM621 – Exception Profile Directory Screen .......................................................... 5-65 EDIM622 – Exception Profile Definition Screen ......................................................... 5-67 EDIM623 – Exception Capture Directory Screen ........................................................ 5-70 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen ....................................................... 5-73 EDIM625 – Exception Action Directory Screen .......................................................... 5-86 EDIM626 – Exception Action Definition Screen ......................................................... 5-89 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-1 EDIM627 – User Message Directory Screen ................................................................ 5-92 EDIM628 – User Message Definition Screen ............................................................... 5-94 EDIM629 – User Procedure Directory Screen ............................................................. 5-97 EDIM630 – User Procedure Definition Screen ............................................................ 5-99 EDIM631 – Usage Cross Reference Screen ............................................................... 5-101 Exception Inquiry Screens Exception Inquiry Navigation ..................................................................................... 5-103 EDIM645 – Exception Inquiry Menu ......................................................................... 5-104 EDIM646 – Recipient Directory Screen ..................................................................... 5-105 EDIM647 – Recipient Detail Screen .......................................................................... 5-107 EDIM648 – Exception List Screen ............................................................................. 5-109 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item ................................... 5-113 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item .................................. 5-119 EDIM650 – Exception Message List Screen .............................................................. 5-123 EDIM651 – Exception Data Display Screen .............................................................. 5-126 EDIM652 – Exception History Screen ....................................................................... 5-129 EDIM653 – Exception History Screen – 2 ................................................................. 5-132 EDIM654 – Exception History Update Screen ........................................................... 5-134 EDIM662 – User Message Display Screen ................................................................. 5-136 EDIM663 – User Procedure Display Screen .............................................................. 5-138 Tracking Management Screens Tracking Management Navigation .............................................................................. 5-140 EDIM700 – Tracking Management Menu .................................................................. 5-141 EDIM701 – Query Directory Screen .......................................................................... 5-142 EDIM702 – Query Request Screen ............................................................................. 5-145 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen ......................................................... 5-152 EDIM710 – Item Status History Screen ..................................................................... 5-167 EDIM711 – Item Reference History Screen ............................................................... 5-171 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item .............................. 5-174 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item .............................. 5-182 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – User Item ................................................. 5-186 EDIM715 – Item Message List Screen ....................................................................... 5-190 EDIM716 – Item Data Display Screen ....................................................................... 5-193 EDIM718 – Item Exception Status Screen ................................................................. 5-196 Log Display Screens Log Display Navigation ............................................................................................... 5-199 EDIM688 – Online Log Display Screen ..................................................................... 5-200 Sterling Gentran:Plus Screens Sterling Gentran:Plus Navigation ............................................................................... 5-204 EDIM402 – Interchange Detail Screen ....................................................................... 5-205 EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen ............................................................... 5-208 5-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM600 – Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu EDIM600 – Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu Purpose The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu provides direct access to the primary functions of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint product. The following figure illustrates the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. EDIM600 9.0_______ VIEWPOINT MAIN MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. __ F1=Help F3=Exit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 99. System Options Extended System Management Exception Management Exception Inquiry Tracking Management Log Display F15=Logoff The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu contains six options. The list of menu options, as well as a brief description of each option, is listed below. Menu Option Description 1. System Options Provides global control for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing. 2. Extended System Management Provides administrative functions for defining and managing your Extended EDI System monitoring. 3. Exception Management Provides setup and control for managing exceptions within your Extended EDI system. 4. Exception Inquiry Provides end users with the tools needed to respond and resolve exceptions which have occurred in their EDI processing environment. 5. Tracking Management (optional) Provides end users with query functions to search for an item travelling through the extended EDI environment. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-3 EDIM600 – Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu 5-4 Menu Option Description 99. Log Display Users may view all system messages generated by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint background CICS functions. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide System Options Navigation System Options Screens System Options Navigation This section contains detailed information on the System Options screens. The fields maintained in System Options and the effect they have on your system are explained. The navigation for System Options is illustrated in Figure 5.1. System Options EDIM685 Staging TSQ Directory EDIM686 Figure 5.1 System Options Navigation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-5 EDIM685 – System Options Screen EDIM685 – System Options Screen Purpose The System Options screen allows you to control system functions dynamically. Use the System Options screen to enable and disable Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing quickly in the event of environment problems or when system maintenance is required. Some of the options which are controlled from System Options are enabling and disabling of the entire Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system, enabling and disabling the trace function for all of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, and setting the scan interval of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint's staging area. Typical users of System Options will be Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or EDI Coordinator. EDIM685 9.1_______ VIEWPOINT Type Action, press Enter __ 2=Update 8=TSQDir Description – SYSTEM OPTIONS 06/01/2011 . . . VIEWPOINT_SYSTEM_OPTIONS________________ ________________________________________ System Status . . E System Trace . . . E (E=Enable, D=Disable) (E=Enable, D=Disable) Scan Interval (HH:MM) . . 00 : 05 Error User Exit ________ Data ____________________ TRACKING USER EXIT ____ Staging File Control File 1 2 3 4 5 Status E E E E E Full T T T T T Staging TSQ Full F1=Help F3=Exit T 6 D T (E=Enable, D=Disable) 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 D D D D D D D T T T T T T T 14 D T 15 D T 16 D T 17 D T 18 D T 19 D T 20 D T (T=Terminate, C=Continue) F13=Start Actions 2=Update Enter 2 in the Action field and press Enter to update the current system options. The System Options are updated immediately, using the current screen field values. 8=TSQDir Enter 8 in the Action field and press Enter to display the Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory. Function Keys 5-6 F1=Help If the cursor is not on a specific field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM685 – System Options Screen F13=Start Starts the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner. Confirmation is required. You can use this action to start Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint if the system has been disabled or if the initiation feature of CICS (Program Load Table, or PLT) has not been used to start the system. Enabling the system alone will not start Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint; you must also press F13. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen jump code automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user. (Action) A 1-character field to request an action. Refer to Actions on the previous page for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Description Two (2) lines of free form text to describe your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. System Status A 1-character field to enable and disable CICS processing for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. E Enable. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing continues at the scan interval specified. Enabling the system will not initiate a scan interval. D Disable. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will not process the staging area. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways will still accept data from tracking points into the staging area. The online screens are still available. Disabling the system causes processing to stop at the next scan interval. System Trace A 1-character field to control whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint messages from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Post Processor should be written to the Online Log. E Enable. Messages are written to the Online Log. D Disable. Messages are not written to the Online Log. Scan Interval A 4-character field to specify the time interval between scanner executions. The format is HH:MM (hours:minutes). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-7 EDIM685 – System Options Screen Error User Exit (Optional) A 1- to 8-character field to identify a user program that should be initiated by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint when a fatal condition occurs in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner or Post Processor (for example: staging file full, post processor cannot continue (I/O error)). For more details about the use of this option, refer to the “System Options – Error User Exit” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter. Data (Optional) A 1- to 20-character field passed to the Error User Exit program. Tracking User Exit (Only available for Tracking Management) A 1- to 4-character field to identify an online transaction ID for the Tracking User Exit program that is initiated by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Post Processor. The Post Processor passes status information for each item processed. For more details about the use of this option, refer to “Tracking User Exit” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “User Exits and APIs” chapter. Staging File Control File The staging file number is displayed in this field. A maximum of 20 staging files may be implemented. For details regarding the implementation of the staging area, refer to "Staging Files" in Chapter 2, "Developing a Configuration Strategy". Status A 1-character field entered by the user to specify the status for each staging file implemented. The status controls whether a staging file is available to receive tracking point data. E Enable. The staging file is available to receive data from the Gateways and will be processed by the post-processor. D Disable. The staging file is not available to receive data from the Gateways and will not be processed by the post-processor. Full A 1-character field entered by the user. This value determines how the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system responds to a tracking point when a request is made to process data which is destined for a full staging file. You control the action which is taken when a staging file full situation is encountered based on these indicators. 5-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM685 – System Options Screen The options and impacts of the Staging File Full indicator are: T Terminate. The Gateway returns a status code indicating that a fatal error has occurred. The tracking point will terminate immediately. C Continue. The Gateway returns a status code indicating a file full situation. The Tracking Point will continue processing, but no data from that run will be available for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing. The Post Processor issues a Level 8 error message to the online log when a staging file full indicator is detected. Staging TSQ Full A 1-character field entered by the user to control the online tracking points when an error occurs processing the Staging Temporary Storage Queue. T Terminate. The Online Gateway returns a status code indicating that a fatal error has occurred. The tracking point will terminate immediately. C Continue. The Online Gateway returns a status code indicating an error has occurred. The Tracking Point will continue processing, but no data from that run will be available for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-9 EDIM686 – Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory Screen EDIM686 – Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory Screen Purpose The Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory allows you to monitor and control all Staging Temporary Storage Queues. The Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory is used to enable, disable or delete Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Staging Temporary Storage Queues. For more information about Staging Temporary Storage Queues, refer to “EDIVnnnn – Staging Temporary Storage Queues” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 3, “File Descriptions”. EDIM686 9.1.8______ STAGING TEMPORARY STORAGE QUEUE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 6=Enable 7=Disable 8=Browse TSQ ID EDIV0001 Status _ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) TSQ ID EDIV0001 Date 06/01/2011 Time 12:00:00 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Purge Interval Records 00000002 F12=Cancel Status E Active N 02 06/01/2011 12:00:00 (HH) Process EDID515 Tran/Task EDI7/0001 F13=Purge Actions 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the Staging Temporary Storage Queue to be deleted and press Enter. The entire Staging TSQ will be deleted from the CICS Auxiliary Temporary Storage data set. Refer to “EDIVnnnn – Staging Temporary Storage Queues” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “File Descriptions” chapter. Note: A Staging Temporary Storage Queue should be deleted only if the data on the TSQ is unable to be processed by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Once a Staging Temporary Storage Queue is deleted, the information that was stored becomes unavailable to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 6=Enable 5-10 Enter 6 on the line of the Staging Temporary Storage Queue to be enabled and press Enter. The Staging Temporary Storage Queue is enabled. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint only processes data from Staging Temporary Storage Queues that have been enabled. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM686 – Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory Screen 7=Disable Enter 7 on the line of the Staging Temporary Storage Queue to be disabled and press Enter. The Staging Temporary Storage Queue is disabled. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will not process data from Staging Temporary Storage Queues that have been disabled. Staging Temporary Storage Queues may occasionally need to be disabled to prevent the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Post Processor from processing the data. For example, when performing file maintenance on the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository, all Staging Temporary Storage Queues should be disabled until the required maintenance has been completed. 8=Browse Enter 8 on the line of the Staging Temporary Storage Queue to be browsed and press Enter. The Staging Temporary Storage Queue is browsed with the CICS supplied transaction CEBR. All of the normal browse functions of CEBR are available and you will return to the EDIM686 screen when you press PF3 from the CEBR screen. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. F13=Purge Deletes all Staging Temporary Storage Queues that have a record count of zero, a status of disabled, and are older than the specified purge interval. A confirmation message is displayed before the purge is performed. This is a quick alternative to performing many individual deletes. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen jump code automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. TSQ ID An 8-character field entered by the user. Control the entry displayed at the top of the list by entering the Staging Temporary Storage Queue required. Staging Temporary Storage Queue names are comprised of the three character system image ("EDI"), followed by the letter "V" and then followed by four numeric digits (for example, EDIV0001). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-11 EDIM686 – Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory Screen Status A 1-character field entered by the user to limit the list to a specific status. E Enabled. Only Staging Temporary Storage Queues which are enabled are displayed. D Disabled. Only Staging Temporary Storage Queues which are disabled are displayed. blank All Staging Temporary Storage Queues are displayed. Purge Interval The number of hours used to qualify Staging Temporary Storage Queues for the purge function. A (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. TSQ ID The 8-character Staging Temporary Storage Queue ID. Date The date on which the Staging Temporary Storage Queue was created. Time The time on which the Staging Temporary Storage Queue was created. Records The number of records in the Staging Temporary Storage Queue. Status The current status of the Staging Temporary Storage Queue. Active The current status of the post processor associated with the Staging Temporary Storage Queue. blank The post processor has not been initiated. N The post processor has been manually enabled or disable via this screen. Y The post processor has been initiated. Process The process name of the tracking point that created the staging Temporary Storage Queue. Tran/Task The CICS Transaction ID and Task Number that created the staging Temporary Storage Queue. 5-12 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Extended System Management Navigation Extended System Management Screens Extended System Management Navigation This section contains detailed information on the Extended System Management Screens. The fields maintained in Extended System Management, and the effect they have on your system, are explained. The navigation for Extended System Management is illustrated in Figure 5.2. Extended System Management EDIM601 Sterling Tracking Point DirectoryEDIM 602 Functional Area Control EDIM607 Maintenance/ Inquiry Options Definition EDIM609 Sterling Tracking Point Definition EDIM603 Tracking Point System Message Control EDIM604 Maintenance/ Inquiry Options Directory EDIM608 Tracking Point Status Control EDIM605 User Tracking Point Directory EDIM610* User Tracking Point Definition EDIM611* * Tracking Management Tracking Only Point Remote **Gentran:Plus Users Only ID Control EDIM606** Figure 5.2 Extended System Management Navigation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-13 EDIM601 – Extended System Management Menu EDIM601 – Extended System Management Menu Purpose The Extended System Management Menu provides you with direct access to the primary functions of Extended System Management. The typical users of the Extended System Management functions are the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator, or EDI Coordinator. The following figure illustrates the Extended System Management Menu: EDIM601 9.2_______ EXTENDED SYSTEM MANAGEMENT MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. _ F1=Help 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. STERLING Tracking Point Directory STERLING Tracking Point Definition Functional Area Control Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition User Tracking Point Directory User Tracking Point Definition F3=Exit The Extended System Management Menu contains seven options, which are listed below. The list of menu options, as well as a brief description of each option, follows. 5-14 Menu Option Description 1. Sterling Tracking Point Directory Provides a list of tracking points that have been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Current Sterling products that have been enabled for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint include: Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, and Sterling Connect. 2. Sterling Tracking Point Definition This option is used to define a Sterling tracking point. Tracking points may be defined for Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, and Sterling Connect. 3. Functional Area Control Allows the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator to enable and disable online Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint functional areas. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM601 – Extended System Management Menu Menu Option Description 4. Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Provides a list of maintenance/inquiry options that have been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 5. Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Allows you to define a set of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint maintenance/inquiry options. 6. User Tracking Point Directory (optional) Provides a list of user tracking points that have been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. This is only available with the Tracking Management module. 7. User Tracking Point Definition (optional) This option is used to define a user tracking point. This is only available with the Tracking Management module. (optional) = Tracking Management only. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-15 EDIM602 – Sterling Tracking Point Directory Screen EDIM602 – Sterling Tracking Point Directory Screen Purpose The Sterling Tracking Point Directory allows you to list all tracking points defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Defining a system/process (for example, Sterling Gentran/EBDI042) to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, as a tracking point, allows that system/process access to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways. Tracking points may be defined for Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, and Sterling Connect. The typical user of these functions is your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or EDI Coordinator. EDIM602 9.2.1____ STERLING TRACKING POINT DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable 06/01/2011 System CONNECT___ Process ALL_____ Status _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ System CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN F1=Help Process ALL EDIR314 EDIR316 MAILBOX STOUTL ALL EBDI001 EBDI002 EBDI041 EBDI042 EDID205 EDID255 F3=Exit Description CONNECT GENERAL TRACKING CONNECT OUTBOUND INTERFACE CONNECT INBOUND INTERFACE CONNECT COMMUNICATIONS PRODUCT CONNECT OFFLINE UTILITIES GENTRAN GENERAL TRACKING GENTRAN INBOUND EDITOR GENTRAN OUTBOUND EDITOR GENTRAN INBOUND MAPPER GENTRAN OUTBOUND MAPPER GENTRAN OUTBOUND EDI DATABANK EXTRACT REALTIME OUTBOUND EDI DATABANK EXTRACT F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Status E E E E E E E E E E E E F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the display list and press Enter to add a new Tracking Point Definition. The Tracking Point Definition screen is displayed with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the tracking point to be deleted and press Enter to mark a Tracking Point Definition for deletion. The entry will be marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles Maintenance is run. You can restore a tracking point definition from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For detailed information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: A tracking point that has been marked for deletion displays the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated using the Online Facility. 5-16 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM602 – Sterling Tracking Point Directory Screen 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the Tracking Point and press Enter to select an existing Tracking Point Definition. The Tracking Point Definition screen for the tracking point selected is displayed. This selected tracking point screen may be used to either add a new tracking point, or to update the tracking point displayed. 6=Enable Enter 6 on the line of the Tracking Point to be enabled, and press Enter. When a Tracking Point is enabled, the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway will accept calls from that tracking point (that is, the tracking point will be monitored). 7=Disable Enter 7 on the line of the Tracking Point to be disabled and press Enter. When a Tracking Point is disabled, the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateway will not accept calls from this tracking point (that is, the tracking point will not be monitored). Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen jump code automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the next four fields is entered by the user: System A 1- to 10-character field. Control the entry displayed at the top of the list by entering the Tracking Point SYSTEM required. Partial names may be entered. Process A 1- to 8-character field. Control the entry displayed at the top of the list by entering the Tracking Point PROCESS required. Partial names may be entered. Status A 1-character field that limits the list to a single status. blank Both statuses are listed. E Enabled. Only enabled tracking points are listed. D Disabled. Only disabled tracking points are listed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-17 EDIM602 – Sterling Tracking Point Directory Screen A (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for a tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The system name of the tracking point. Process The process name of the tracking point. Description A description of the tracking point. Note: A tracking point that has been marked for deletion displays the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. Status The current status for the tracking point. 5-18 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran Purpose The Sterling Tracking Point Definition – Sterling Gentran Process screen allows you to define a Sterling Gentran Tracking Point with the options needed for that process. The Tracking Point Definition screen provides the definition of a Tracking Point to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. You may define a Tracking Point as a general system (for example, Process – ALL), or define a Tracking Point as a specific process within a system (for example, System – Sterling Gentran, Process -EBDI042). Note: Process-specific Tracking Point Definitions override general Tracking Point definitions. Options which may be controlled for a Sterling Gentran Tracking Point are System Messages, Statuses, and Order By options. Refer to Field Descriptions below for details of these options. EDIM603 9.2.2_____ STERLING TRACKING POINT DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete System . . . Process . . Description Item Type(s) Status . . . . . . . . . . . : . 06/01/2011 GENTRAN___ EDID510_ GENTRAN_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT_RECONCIL/MONITOR_____ TRANSACTION, FUNCTIONAL GROUP, INTERCHANGE, RUN E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Tracking Point Control System Message A (A=All, N=None, D=Detail) Status . . . . A (A=All, N=None, D=Detail) Order By Control System . . . . Y (Y=Yes, N=No) Process . . . Y (Y=Yes, N=No) Values . . . . _______________ _______________ ______________ F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F10=FldDtl (F4=Prompt) F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new Tracking Point Definition to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. If the tracking point already exists, an error message is displayed and the tracking point is not added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update a Tracking Point Definition. The tracking point definition will be updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint using the current field values. When the action is complete, the screen will redisplay with a message indicating that the tracking point definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-19 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran screen will redisplay with a message indicating that the tracking point definition was not found. 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark a tracking point definition for deletion. The tracking point will be marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance runs. You can restore a tracking point definition from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For detailed information on Tracking Point Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: A tracking point that has been marked for deletion may not be updated from the Online Facility. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=Prompt. F10=FldDtl Display the control detail screen for the field the cursor is on. This function key is only valid for fields which have D (Detail) as a valid value. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for the tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details on the available actions for this screen. System A 1- to 10-character field used in conjunction with Process to specify the tracking point. Process A 1- to 8-character field used in conjunction with System to specify the tracking point. 5-20 ALL All Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint enabled processes for the system. EDID205 Outbound EDI Databank Extract IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran EDID405 Inbound Application Databank Extract EDID510 Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor EDID850 Network Reconciliation EBDI001 Inbound Editor EBDI002 Outbound Editor EBDI041 Inbound Mapper EBDI042 Outbound Mapper EDID255 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound EDI Databank Extract EDID455 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Application Databank Extract EDID515 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor EDIR001 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Editor EDIR002 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Editor EDIR041 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Mapper EDIR042 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Mapper Description A 1- to 45-character field to describe the tracking point. Item Type(s) Item Types for Sterling Gentran tracking points are pre-defined and displayed in this field. Document • • • Functional Group • • • • Inbound Mapper (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Outbound Mapper (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Inbound Application Databank Extract (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Inbound Editor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Outbound Editor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Outbound EDI Databank Extract (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-21 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran Interchange • • Inbound Editor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Outbound Editor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Outbound EDI Databank Extract (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Network Reconciliation Run • All Sterling Gentran Processes Transaction • Inbound Editor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Outbound Editor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Outbound EDI Databank Extract (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor (Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime) • • • • • • Status A 1-character field to enable or disable the tracking point. E Enabled. While a tracking point is enabled, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways will accept calls from the tracking point (that is, the tracking point will be monitored). D Disabled. While a tracking point is disabled, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways will not accept calls from the tracking point (that is, the tracking point will not be monitored). Tracking Point Control System Message A 1-character field entered by the user to indicate the level of system message control that should be used for the tracking point. With the cursor in this field, press F10=FldDtl to display the Tracking Point System Message Control screen (EDIM604). 5-22 A All. All system messages for the tracking point are available for use in setting up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint profiles and definitions. A setting of A (All) will override any Detail that has been defined. N None. Specifies that system messages cannot be used when setting up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint profiles and definitions. A setting of N (None) will override any Detail previously entered. D Detail. A value of D (Detail) includes or excludes a specific range and/or list of system messages for use in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. A setting IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran of D (Detail) requires details to be entered from the Tracking Point System Message Control screen (EDIM604). Status A 1-character field entered by the user to indicate the level of status control that should be used for the tracking point. With the cursor in this field, press F10=FldDtl to display the Tracking Point Status Control screen (EDIM605). A All. All statuses for the tracking point are available for use in setting up Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint profiles and definitions. A setting of A (All) will override any Detail previously entered. N None. A value of N (None) disallows any use of statuses for the tracking point in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. A setting of N (None) will override any Detail previously entered. D Detail. A value of D (Detail) includes or excludes a specific tracking points statuses for use in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. A setting of D (Detail) requires details to be entered on the Tracking Point Status Control screen (EDIM605). Order By Control Order By Control allows you to specify which fields should be used to sort exceptions captured for the Tracking Point. Exception Inquiry users have exceptions listed in ascending order of the fields defined here. An example of using the "Order By" option would be a user requiring all documents (exceptions), processed by the Inbound Mapper to be ordered by Application and Partner. You would specify N (No) to System, N (No) to Process and Application in the first "Order By" field, and Partner in the second "Order By" field. In Exception Inquiry, you would then have all documents listed by Application and Partner. System Y Yes. A value of Y (Yes) will include the system name as the first field for ordering. N No. The system name will not be included in ordering if N (No) is specified. Y Yes. A value of Y (Yes) will include the process name as the second field for ordering. N No. The process name will not be included in ordering if N (No) is specified. Process Values A 1- to 15-character field entered by the user to specify the order of exceptions in Exception Inquiry. A maximum of 3 fields may be specified. When the cursor is on any of these fields, the F4=Prompt function key may be used to display a selection list of valid "Order By" IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-23 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Gentran values for the tracking point (system/process). If System and/or Process are set to Y (Yes) then the "Values" fields are used for ordering within System and/or Process. 5-24 APPLICATION Application ID ENVELOPE REF Envelope Reference IDs PARTNER Partner PARTNER QUAL Partner Qualifier PROCESSED DTTM Processed Date/Time NETWORK Network ID USER User USER REFERENCE User Reference IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect Purpose Sterling Connect Tracking points may only be used by Sterling Gentran:Plus users with Sterling Connect. The Sterling Tracking Point Definition – Sterling Connect Process allows you to define a Sterling Connect Tracking Point with the options needed for that process. The Tracking Point Definition screen provides the definition of a Tracking Point to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. You may define a Tracking Point as a general system (for example, Process – ALL), or define a Tracking Point as a specific process within a system (for example, System – Sterling Connect, Process – MAILBOX). Note: Process-specific Tracking Point definitions override general Tracking Point definitions. Options which may be controlled for a Sterling Connect Tracking Point are tracking by Remote ID and Order By options. Refer to Field Descriptions below for details of these options. EDIM603 9.2.2_____ STERLING TRACKING POINT DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete System . . . Process . . Description Item Type(s) Status . . . . . . . . . . . : . 06/01/2011 CONNECT___ MAILBOX_ CONNECT_COMMUNICATIONS_PRODUCT_______________ BATCH E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Tracking Point Control System Message _ (A=All, N=None, D=Detail) Status . . . . _ (A=All, N=None, D=Detail) MBX/RMT ID . . A (A=All, D=Detail) Order By Control System . . . . Y (Y=Yes, N=No) Process . . . Y (Y=Yes, N=No) Values . . . . _______________ _______________ ______________ User Log Exit F1=Help F3=Exit (F4=Prompt) ________ F4=Prompt F10=FldDtl F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new Tracking Point Definition to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. If the tracking point already exists, an error message is displayed and the tracking point is not added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update a Tracking Point Definition. The tracking point definition will be updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint using the current field values. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-25 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect When the action is complete, the screen redisplays with a message indicating that the tracking point definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen redisplays with a message indicating the tracking point definition was not found. 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark a Tracking Point Definition for deletion. The tracking point is marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance runs. A Tracking Point Definition can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For detailed information on Tracking Point Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: A tracking point that has been marked for deletion may not be updated from the Online Facility. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=Prompt. F10=FldDtl Display the control detail screen for the field the cursor is on. This function key is only valid for fields which have D (Detail) as a valid value. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the next five fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for the tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System A 1-to 10-character field used in conjunction with Process to specify the tracking point. For communications tracking, specify the system as "CONNECT". Process A 1-to 8-character field used in conjunction with System to specify the tracking point. ALL 5-26 General Sterling Connect Tracking IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect STOUTL Sterling Connect Offline Utilities MAILBOX Sterling Connect Communications Product EDIR314 Sterling Connect Outbound Interface EDIR316 Sterling Connect Inbound Interface Description A 1- to 45-character field used to describe the tracking point. Item Type(s) Item Types for Sterling Connect tracking points are pre-defined and are displayed in this field. Batch All Sterling Connect Processes Run • • • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities Sterling Connect Outbound Interface Sterling Connect Inbound Interface Status A 1-character field used to enable or disable the tracking point. E Enabled. For the active communications task (Sterling Connect), the tracking point passes information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint by writing Log Exit records to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Communications Queue. D Disabled. For the active communications task (Sterling Connect), the tracking point will not pass information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. By disabling Sterling Connect, Log Exit records are not written to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Communications Queue. Note: Use this field to suspend Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint communications monitoring, as required. Tracking Point Control System Message This field is not required for Sterling Connect tracking points. Status This field is not required for Sterling Connect tracking points. MBX/RMT ID A 1-character field entered by the user to indicate the level of Remote ID control that should be used for the tracking point. Press F10=FldDtl with the cursor in this field to display the Tracking Point MBX/Remote ID Control screen (EDIM606). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-27 EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect A All. Data for all communications remote IDs are monitored in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. A setting of A (All) will override any Detail previously entered. D Detail. D (Detail) includes or excludes data from specific communications remote IDs from being monitored in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. A setting of D (Detail) requires specific remote IDs to be entered on the Tracking Point Remote ID Control screen (EDIM606). Press F10=FldDtl to display the Tracking Point Remote ID Control screen. Order By Control Order By Control allows you to specify which fields should be used to sort exceptions that are captured for the Tracking Point. Exception Inquiry users will have exceptions listed in ascending order of the fields defined here. An example of using the "Order By" option would be a user requiring all batches (exceptions) which are processed by communications to be ordered by Remote ID and Batch ID. You would specify N (No) to System, N (No) to Process and Remote ID in the first "Order By" field, and Batch ID in the second "Order By" field. In Exception Inquiry, you would then have all your batches listed by Remote ID and Batch ID. System Y Yes. A value of Y (Yes) will include the system name as the first field for ordering. N No. The system name will not be included in ordering if N (No) is specified. Y Yes. A value of Y (Yes) will include the process name as the second field for ordering. N No. The process name will not be included in ordering if N (No) is specified. Process Values A 1- to 15-character field entered by the user to specify the order of exceptions in Exception Inquiry. You may specify a maximum of 3 fields. Use the F4=Prompt function key when the cursor is on any of these fields to display a selection list of valid "Order By" values for the tracking point (system/process). If System and/or Process are set to Y (Yes) then the "Values" fields will be used for ordering within System and/or Process. BATCH ID Batch ID BATCH NUMBER Batch Number PROCESSED DTTM Processed Date/Time REMOTE ID Remote ID User Log Exit A 1- to 8-character field entered by the user to specify the ID of a User Log Exit program to be called by the Sterling Connect Log Exit (EDIVLXU). 5-28 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen – Sterling Connect For Sterling Gentran:Plus users who have currently implemented a User Log Exit Program, the user program ID should be specified in this field. In the Sterling Connect Options Definition File, the program EDIVLXU must be specified as the Log Exit program. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “Batch Program Descriptions” chapter for more information on this program. Note: This field is only displayed when the System is Sterling Connect and the Process is Mailbox. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-29 EDIM604 – Tracking Point System Message Control Screen EDIM604 – Tracking Point System Message Control Screen Purpose The Tracking Point System Message Control screen is only available for defining Sterling Gentran tracking points. The Tracking Point System Message Control screen allows you to specify which system messages should be available for use by Capture Definitions. EDIM604 __________ TRACKING POINT SYSTEM MESSAGE CONTROL Type Action, press Enter. _ 2=Update 06/01/2011 System . . : GENTRAN Process : EDID510 Description: GENTRAN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCIL/MONITOR Control Mode I (E=Exclude, I=Include) Range . . . 000000 To 999999 List . . . . ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ F1=Help F3=Exit ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ F12=Cancel Actions 2=Update Enter 2 in the Action field and press Enter to update the Tracking Point Definition. The tracking point definition will be updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen redisplays with a message indicating that the Tracking Point System Message Control has been updated. Function Keys 5-30 F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM604 – Tracking Point System Message Control Screen Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for the tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The tracking point system name is displayed in this field. Process The tracking point process name is displayed in this field. Description The tracking point description is displayed in this field. Control Mode A 1-character field entered by the user to indicate whether specified system messages should be included or excluded for use by Capture Definitions. I Include messages specified. E Exclude messages specified. Range Two 6-character fields entered by the user to include or exclude a range of tracking point system messages for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint processing. The first field specifies the beginning of the range of messages, and the second field specifies the end of the range. List Forty 6-character fields entered by the user to include or exclude a list of tracking point system messages for use by Capture Definitions. Note: To include or exclude system messages, either specify a range or specify a list of messages. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-31 EDIM605 – Tracking Point Status Control Screen EDIM605 – Tracking Point Status Control Screen Purpose The Tracking Point Status Control screen is only available for defining Sterling Gentran tracking points. The Tracking Point Status Control screen allows you to select specific tracking point statuses which you want to be available for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint profiles and definitions. EDIM605 __________ TRACKING POINT STATUS CONTROL Type Action, press Enter. _ 2=Update 06/01/2011 System . . . . . . : GENTRAN Process . . . . . . : EDID510 Description . . . . : GENTRAN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCIL/MONITOR Status List (Y=Yes, N=No) Acknowledgement . . Y Compliance . . . . Y Envelope Validation Y Mapping Validation Y Network . . . . . . Y Sequence . . . . . Y F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel Actions 2=Update Enter 2 in the Action field and press Enter to update a Tracking Point Definition. The tracking point definition will be updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, using the current screen field values. The screen will re-display with a message indicating the Tracking Point Status Control has been updated. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed, if the cursor is not on a field. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for the screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. 5-32 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM605 – Tracking Point Status Control Screen To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for a tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The tracking point system name is displayed in this field. Process The tracking point process name is displayed in this field. Description The tracking point description is displayed in this field. Status List A 1-character field entered by the user to make specific tracking point statuses available to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint profiles and definitions. If all statuses are to be set to Y=Yes or N=No then this screen may be overridden from the Tracking Point Definition screen by specifying ALL or NONE for Status on the Tracking Point Definition screen. Y Yes. Make this tracking point status available. N No. Do not make this tracking point status available. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-33 EDIM606 – Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control Screen EDIM606 – Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control Screen Purpose The Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control screen is only available for defining Sterling Connect tracking points. The Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control screen allows you to specify which Remote IDs should be monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. EDIM606 __________ TRACKING POINT MAILBOX/REMOTE ID CONTROL Type Action, press Enter. _ 2=Update 06/01/2011 System . . : CONNECT Process : STOUTL Description: CONNECT OFFLINE UTILITIES Control Mode I (E=Exclude, I=Include) List . . . . REMOTE1 ________ ________ ________ ________ (PF4=Prompt) F1=Help F3=Exit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ F4=Prompt ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ F12=Cancel Actions 2=Update Enter 2 in the Action field and press Enter to update the Tracking Point Definition. The tracking point definition will be updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen will be redisplayed with a message indicating that the Tracking Point Remote ID Control Screen has been updated. Function Keys 5-34 F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=Prompt. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM606 – Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control Screen Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for the tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The tracking point system name is displayed in this field. Process The tracking point process name is displayed in this field. Description The tracking point description is displayed in this field. Control Mode A 1-character field entered by the user to indicate whether the specified Remote IDs should be included or excluded for use by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. I Include Remote IDs specified. E Exclude Remote IDs specified. List Thirty 8-character fields entered by the user to include or exclude a list of Remote IDs for use by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Use the F4=Prompt to obtain a list of available Remote IDs. The Remote IDs from the F4=Prompt feature is obtained from the Sterling Gentran:Plus Remote File. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-35 EDIM607 – Functional Area Control Screen EDIM607 – Functional Area Control Screen Purpose The Functional Area Control screen allows you to enable or disable an entire group of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint functions. Functional Area Control is normally used by the Administrator to temporarily restrict you from making changes in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint online environment. EDIM607 9.2.3_____ Type Action, press Enter. 6=Enable 7=Disable A _ _ _ FUNCTIONAL AREA CONTROL Functional Area EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT EXCEPTION INQUIRY TRACKING MANAGEMENT F1=Help F3=Exit 06/01/2011 Status E E D F12=Cancel Actions 6=Enable Enter 6 on the line of the functional area to be enabled and press Enter. When a functional area is enabled, the functional area is available for use by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint user. 7=Disable Enter 7 on the line of the functional area to be disabled, and press Enter. When a functional area is disabled, the functional area is not available for use by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint user. If a Functional Area is disabled while you are in that Functional Area, pressing the Enter key will return you to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu. The Main Menu will display a message indicating that the Functional Area has been disabled. Function Keys 5-36 F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM607 – Functional Area Control Screen Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. A (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for a functional area. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Functional Area The functional area name is displayed in this field. Exception Management Provides setup and control for managing exceptions within your Extended EDI system. Exception Inquiry Provides end users with the tools needed to respond and resolve exceptions which have occurred in their EDI processing environment Tracking Management Provides end users with query functions to search for an item travelling through the extended EDI environment. Note: This field is only displayed if Tracking Management has been installed. Status The current status, enabled or disabled, for the functional area is displayed in this field. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-37 EDIM608 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Screen EDIM608 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Screen Purpose The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory provides you with a list of all the Maintenance/ Inquiry options definitions that have been created in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Maintenance/Inquiry options are used to control how the maintenance/inquiry programs should maintain and inquire against the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository and Profiles for Exception Management, and also against the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Master Index for Tracking Management. EDIM608 9.2.4_____ MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY OPTIONS DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable 06/01/2011 File . . . _ (R=Repository, P=Profile) Identifier @MODEL-MT1 Status . . _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Identifier @MODEL-MT1 @MODEL-MT2 @MODEL-MT3 @MODEL-MT4 @MODEL-MT5 @MODEL-P @MODEL-R @MODEL-TP @MODEL-TR Description REPOSITORY MAINTENANCE - EXCEPTIONS REPOSITORY MAINTENANCE - TRACKING PROFILE MAINTENANCE - EXCEPTIONS PROFILE MAINTENANCE - TRACKING PROFILE MAINTENANCE - SYSTEM LIST ALL EXCEPTION PROFILES LIST EXCEPTIONS FOR PARTNER VENDOR-1 LIST ALL USER TRACKING POINTS LIST ALL TRACKED ITEMS FOR VENDOR-2 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd File Status REPOSITORY E REPOSITORY E PROFILE E PROFILE E PROFILE E PROFILE E REPOSITORY E PROFILE E REPOSITORY E F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the list and press Enter to add a new Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition screen is displayed with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the entry to be deleted and press Enter to mark a Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition for deletion. The entry is marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles Maintenance runs. A definition can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: A Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition that has been marked for deletion is displayed with the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated. 5-38 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM608 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Screen 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to select an existing Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition screen is displayed for the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition selected. This screen may be used to add a new Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition, or update the Maintenance/Inquiry Options selected. 6=Enable Enter 6 on the line of the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition to be enabled and press Enter. When a Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition is enabled, it may be used by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry program. 7=Disable Enter 7 on the line of the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition to be disabled and press Enter. When a Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition is disabled, it may not be used by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Maintenance/Inquiry program. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the next four fields is entered by the user: File A 1-character field which limits the directory to a list of definitions for a single file. blank All definitions are listed. R Repository definitions are listed. P Profile definitions are listed. Identifier A 1- to 10-character field to control where the list of definitions should start. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-39 EDIM608 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory Screen Status A 1-character field used to limit the list to a single status. blank Both statuses are listed. E Enabled. Only enabled Maintenance/Inquiry Options are listed. D Disabled. Only disabled Maintenance/Inquiry Options are listed. A (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for a Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Identifier The identifier of the definition is displayed in this field. Description The description of the definition is displayed in this field. Note: A definition that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. File The file name of the file, which the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition is used for, is displayed in this field. Status The current status of the definition is displayed in this field. 5-40 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Purpose The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition screen allows you to define a set of selection criteria which can be used by the Maintenance/Inquiry programs for maintaining and inquiring against Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint files. Refer to the program “EDIN140 – Maintenance/Inquiry” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide “Batch Program Descriptions” chapter. For each file, a model definition is provided as an example that may be used to create your own maintenance definitions. EDIM609 9.2.5_____ MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY OPTIONS DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 06/01/2011 Identifier @MODEL-MT1 Description REPOSITORY_MAINTENANCE_-_EXCEPTIONS__________ Status . . . E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Operation (F4=Prompt) File . . . REPOSITORY Mode . . . PURGE__ Class . . . Report Level EXCEPTIONS BOTH__ Selection Criteria (F4=Prompt) Field Op Value AGE_OPEN____________ GT 005__________________________________________ AGE_CLOSED__________ GT 005__________________________________________ AGE_REVIEWED________ GT 005__________________________________________ AGE_TRANSFERRED_____ GT 005__________________________________________ ONLINE_DELETES______ EQ YES__________________________________________ ONLINE_DELETE_RECPT_ EQ YES__________________________________________ ____________________ __ _____________________________________________ F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt Con. OR_ OR_ OR_ OR_ OR_ ___ F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition will be added to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. If the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition already exists, an error message is displayed and the Maintenance/Inquiry Option will not be added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update a Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition will be updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen will redisplay with a message indicating that the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen will redisplay with a message indicating that the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition was not found. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-41 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark a Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition for deletion. The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition is marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: A Maintenance/Inquiry Options definition that has been marked for deletion may not be updated from the Online Facility. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=Prompt. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. No update is performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for the Maintenance Options Definition. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Identifier A 1- to 10-character field to identify the definition that should be added (new) or viewed/ updated/deleted (existing). This value is specified in the procedure used for running Maintenance/Inquiry. Description A 1- to 45-character field to describe the maintenance/inquiry options for this definition. Status A 1-character field to specify the status of the definition. E 5-42 Enabled. Maintenance/Inquiry runs will process the file using the definition. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen D Disabled. Maintenance/Inquiry runs will not process the file using the definition. The maintenance run will terminate with a message indicating the Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition specified has been disabled. File A 1- to 10-character field to identify the file to which the Maintenance/Inquiry options apply. Repository Repository and Master Index Files Profile Profile File Class A 1- to 10-character field to specify the Class of the definition. Class identifies if the purge/inquiry selection criteria should be used to find system defined options, exceptions that have been captured by Exception Management, or items that are being monitored by the Tracking Management module. The Class is combined with the File specified to identify what your selection criteria should be applied to. Exceptions Exceptions that have been captured by Exception Management. System System defined profile options. Tracking Tracking items that are being monitored by Tracking Management. Mode A 1- to 7-character field to indicate the mode in which Maintenance/Inquiry should operate. Purge Purge all objects that satisfy the selection criteria. Archive is not performed. Archive Purge and archive all objects that satisfy the selection criteria. Inquiry Inquiry reporting only; no purge, archive or restore. Restore Restore from the archive file to the file specified in the definition. Report Level A 1- to 6-character field to specify the level of User Report to be generated. For more information on reporting capabilities, refer to Chapter 6, "Report Descriptions". Status Status level report only. Detail Detail level report only (Repository only). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-43 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Both Both status and detail level reports (Repository only). None User reports are not generated. Selection Criteria Selection criteria are the conditions you enter to control what data the maintenance process should operate on for the mode in which it is currently running. The selection criteria condition is comprised of fields, operators, and values to form expressions and connectors which join expressions to form the complete condition. Field A 1- to 20-character field to specify the field to be used in the expression. The F4=Prompt function key may be used, when the cursor is on this field, to display a selection list of valid selection criteria for the file specified. The valid fields which can be entered vary by the file specified. For a list of valid fields, refer to the "Selection Criteria Reference Chart" below. Op A 2-character field to specify the operator for the expression. For a list of valid operators, refer to the "Selection Criteria Reference Chart" below. Value A 1- to 45-character field to specify the value which should be used to test for a match with the fields data value. For a list of valid values, refer to the "Selection Criteria Reference Chart" below. Connector A 2- or 3-character field to connect multiple expressions for completing the selection criteria desired. Order of precedence is ANDs before ORs (that is, ANDs are evaluated, then ORs are evaluated, then the condition is tested for truth.) For example, A and B or C and D would be evaluated as (A and B) or (C and D). 5-44 AND Both expressions must be true. OR One of the expressions must be true. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Selection Criteria Reference Chart Purpose The Selection Criteria Reference Chart provides you with a quick reference to the fields and their valid values that may be used in a maintenance or inquiry process. Structure Charts The Selection Criteria Reference Charts are organized as follows: File Class Repository Exceptions Repository Tracking Profile Exceptions Profile Tracking Profile System Field This column is used to specify the field to be used in the expression. The valid fields which can be entered vary by the File and Class specified. Operator This column is used to specify the operators to be used for the expression. Value EQ Equal NE Not Equal GT Greater Than LT Less Than LE Less Than or Equal To GE Greater Than or Equal To any Any of the operators above can be specified. This column specifies the value which should be used to compare against the field's data value. Using the Selection Criteria Reference Chart 1. Locate the Selection Criteria Reference Chart based on the file and class for the maintenance/inquiry process. 2. Locate the desired field on the "Selection Criteria Reference Chart". 3. Refer to the VALUE column for valid entries for the desired field. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-45 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Selection Criteria Reference Chart – Repository File Note: *- Indicates criteria for Sterling Connect exceptions. **- Indicates criteria for Sterling Gentran:Realtime exceptions. Repository File / Exceptions Field Operator Value Action Performed any Name of the Exception Action performed for the exception. 1- to 10-character value Added Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been added offline. Y – Yes Age Closed any The number of days the exception has been closed. nnn (000-999) Age Open any The number of days the exception has been open. nnn (000-999) Age Reviewed any The number of days the exception has been in review. nnn (000-999) Age Transferred any The number of days the exception has been transferred. nnn (000-999) Application Data ID any Application Data ID that was used to process the exception. 1- to 10-character value Batch ID* any The user assigned ID for the batch. 1- to 24-character value Batch Number* any The current batch number assigned by Sterling Connect. 7-digit value CICS Task Number** any The CICS task number which processed the exception. 7-digit value CICS Transaction ID** EQ, NE The CICS Transaction ID which processed the exception. 4-character value Collected Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been collected online. Y – Yes Comm Protocol* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch originates from BSC, SNA, or Host. • B – BSC • H – Host • S – SNA Databank System Ind EQ, NE Indicates the Databank System for the exception. • G or Sterling Gentran • R or Sterling Gentran:Realtime 5-46 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Repository File / Exceptions Field Operator Value Deferred Enveloping EQ, NE The item is a deferred enveloping item. • Y – Yes, is a deferred enveloping item. • N – No, is not a deferred enveloping item. Direction EQ, NE Direction the exception was travelling. • I – Inbound (from partner) • O – Outbound (to partner) Division any Controls what data a User ID can access. 1- to 3-character value Exception Status any The Current Status for the exception. • C or Closed • O or Open • R or Review • T or Transfer Extracted Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been extracted. Y – Yes Failure Code* any The Sterling Connect failure code associated with the batch. 3-digit code Group Env Ref ID any Functional Group Envelope Reference ID. • 1- to 14-character value (EDIFACT/TRADACOMS) • 1- to 9-digit number (X12 and TDCC) leading zeros required Incomplete Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch is incomplete. • Y – Yes • N – No Int Env Ref ID any Interchange Envelope Reference ID • 1- to 14-character value (EDIFACT/TRADACOMS) • 1- to 9-digit number (X12 and TDCC) leading zeros required Network any Network ID from the Trading Profile that processed this exception. 1- to 15-character value Online Deletes EQ Used to control how exceptions marked for deletion from the Online Facility should be handled. • NO – Select all exceptions not marked for deletion. • YES – Select all marked exceptions and exceptions which match any other specified selection criteria. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-47 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Repository File / Exceptions Field Operator Value Online Delete Recpt EQ Used to control how recipients marked for deletion from the Online Facility should be handled. • NO – Select all recipients not marked for deletion. • YES – Select all marked recipients. Note: This criteria will not be used with other selection criteria to select a recipient, therefore, the Connectors must be OR. Option** any The Sterling Gentran:Realtime Option Number which processed the exception. 3-digit value Partner any Partner ID from the Trading Profile that processed this exception. • 1- to 15-character value (If Trading Profile mode is Relationship.) • 1- to 35-character value (If Trading Profile mode is Partner-Qualifier.) Partner Qual any Partner Qualifier for the Partner. (Only valid if Trading Profile mode is Partner-Qualifier.) 1- to 4-character value Path ID** any The Sterling Gentran:Realtime Path ID which processed the exception. 3-digit value Process any Tracking Point Process by which the exception was processed. 1- to 8-character value Queue File Number** any The Queue File Number which contained the output data for the exception. 3-digit value Recipient Name any The name of the recipient to which the exception belongs. 1- to 10-character value Record Count* any The number of records for the batch. 9-digit code Remote ID* any The remote ID associated to the batch. 8-character value Requestable Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch is available for request. • Y – Yes • N – No Set any The EDI Transaction Set ID 1- to 6-character value 5-48 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Repository File / Exceptions Field Operator Value Status Date any The date the exception's current status was assigned. MM/DD/YYYY Status Time any The time the exception's current status was assigned. HH:MM System any The Tracking Point System name that the exception was processed by. 1- to 10-character value Trans Env Ref ID any Transaction Set Envelope Reference ID. • 1- to 14-character value (EDIFACT/TRADACOMS) • 1- to 9-digit number (X12 and TDCC) leading zeros required Transmitted Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been transmitted. • Y – Yes • N – No User any The User ID from the Trading Profile that processed this exception. (Only valid if Trading Profile mode is Relationship.) 1- to 15-character value User Initials any The Sterling Gentran User ID initials used to perform the last update for the exception. 1- to 3-character value User Reference any For EDI exceptions, this is the Envelope Reference ID. For application exceptions, this is the User Reference defined in mapping. 1- to 45-character value Selection Criteria Reference Chart – Repository File Note: *- Indicates criteria for Sterling Connect items. **- Indicates criteria for Sterling Gentran:Realtime items. Repository File / Tracking Field Operators Value Ack Status any The acknowledgement status for the item. • A – Accepted • E – Accepted with Errors • I – Indeterminate • O – Overdue • P – Partial • R – Rejected • W – Waiting IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-49 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Repository File / Tracking Field Operators Value Added Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been added offline. Y – Yes Age Tracking any The number of days that the item has been tracked. nnn (000-999) Application Data ID any Application Data Id that was used to process the exception. 1- to 10-character value Batch ID* any The user assigned ID for the batch. 1- to 24-character value Batch Number* any The current batch number assigned by Sterling Connect. 7-character value CICS Task Number** any The CICS task number which processed the item. 7-digit value CICS Transaction ID** EQ, NE The CICS Transaction ID which processed the item. 4-character value Collected Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been collected online. Y – Yes Comm Protocol* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch originates from BSC, SNA, or Host. • B – BSC • H – Host • S – SNA Compliance Status any The compliance status for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered. • 04 – One or more errors encountered. • 08 – One or more missing or misplaced segments were encountered. • 12 – The transaction set was incomplete. Databank System Ind EQ, NE Indicates the Databank System for the item. • G or Sterling Gentran • R or Sterling Gentran:Realtime Deferred Enveloping EQ, NE The item is a deferred enveloping item. • Y – Yes, is a deferred enveloping item. • N – No, is not a deferred enveloping item. Direction EQ, NE Direction the exception was travelling. • I – Inbound (from partner) • O – Outbound (to partner) Division any Controls what data a User ID can access. 1- to 3-character value 5-50 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Repository File / Tracking Field Operators Value Duplicate Indicator EQ, NE The item is a duplicate of another item on the Databank. • Y – Yes, is a duplicate. • N – No, is not a duplicate. Envelope Status any The envelope status for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered • 04 – One or more errors (other than authorization and sequence errors) were encountered in processing the Transmission Envelope, or one or more errors (other than unknown user or unknown partner) were encountered processing the Functional Group envelope. • 08 – Either no Partner ID/Qualifier or User/partner was found corresponding to the sender/receiver codes contained in the Functional Group, or the segment count contained in the Transaction Set Trailer was found to be in error. Extracted Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been extracted. Y – Yes Failure Code* any The Sterling Connect Failure Code associated with the batch. 3-digit code Functional Group ID any Functional Group ID for the item. 1- to 6-character value Incomplete Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch is incomplete. • Y – Yes • N – No Item Type any The item type. • Batch (for Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) • Document • Functional Group • Interchange • Transaction • U:[type] – User Item type (1- to 16-character value) Mapping Status any The mapping status for the item. • 00 -No errors were encountered during the mapping process for the document. • 04 -One or more non-fatal mapping errors encountered. • 12 -An outbound document could not be translated. Network any Network ID from the Trading Profile that processed this exception. 1- to 15-character value IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-51 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Repository File / Tracking Field Operators Value Network Status any Network Status for this item. • E – Error on receive, sorting, or pickup. • N – Network Tracking not active. • P – Picked up. • R – Received. • S – Sorted. • U – Manual network complete. • W – Waiting. Option** any The Sterling Gentran:Realtime Option Number which processed the item. 3-digit value Partner any Partner ID from the Trading Profile that processed this exception. • 1- to 15-character value • (if Trading Profile mode is Relationship.) • 1- to 35-character value • (if Trading Profile mode is Partner-Qualifier.) Partner Qual any Partner Qualifier for the Partner. (Only valid if Trading Profile mode is Partner-Qualifier.) 1- to 4-character value Path ID** any The Sterling Gentran:Realtime Path ID which processed the item. 3-digit value Process any Tracking Point Process that the exception was processed by. 1- to 8-character value Process Status 1 any The process status passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, for an item, by a User tracking point. 1- to 10-character value Process Status 2 any The process status passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, for an item, by a User tracking point. 1- to 10-character value Process Status 3 any The process status passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, for an item, by a User tracking point. 1- to 10-character value Processed Date any The date the item was processed by the tracking point. MM/DD/YYYY Processed Time any The time the item was processed by the tracking point. HH:MM Queue File Number+ any The Queue File Number which processed the item. 3-digit value 5-52 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Repository File / Tracking Field Operators Value Record Count* any The number of records for the batch. 9-digit code Remote ID* any The Remote ID associated to the batch. 8-character value Requestable Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch is available for request. • Y – Yes • N – No Sequence Status any The status from Sequence Checking for the item. • 00 – No errors. • 04 – Sequence errors detected. Set any The EDI Transaction Set ID. 1- to 6-character value System any The Tracking Point System name by which the exception was processed. 1- to 10-character value Test/Production any The test/production indicator for the item. • P – Production • T – Test Trace ID any The Trace ID for the item. 10-character value (aannnnnnnn) Transmitted Flag* EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been transmitted. • Y – Yes • N – No User any The User ID, from the Trading Profile, that processed this exception. (Only valid if Trading Profile mode is Relationship.) 1- to 15-character value User Field 1 any The User field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, for an item, by a User tracking point. 1- to 15-character value User Field 2 any The User field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, for an item, by a User tracking point. 1- to 15-character value User Field 3 any The User field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, for an item, by a User tracking point. 1- to 15-character value User Reference any For EDI exceptions, this is the Envelope Reference ID. For application exceptions, this is the User Reference defined in mapping. 1- to 45-character value IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-53 EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Selection Criteria Reference Chart – Profile File Profile File / Exceptions Field Operators Value Exception Action any1 The Exception Action Definition name. • ALL • 1- to 10-character value Exception Capture any1 The Exception Capture Definition ID. • ALL • 1- to 10-character value Exception Profile any1 The Exception Profile Definition name. • ALL • 1- to 10-character value Online Deletes EQ Used to control how exceptions marked for deletion from the Online Facility should be handled. • NO – Select all exception definitions not marked for deletion. • YES – Select all marked exceptions and exceptions which match any other specified selection criteria. User Message any1 The User Message ID. • ALL • U###### User Procedure any1 The User Procedure name. • ALL • 1- to 10-character value 1 Operator must be EQ when ALL is specified in the field value Selection Criteria Reference Chart – Profile File Profile File / Tracking Field Operators Value Online Deletes EQ Used to control how Tracking definitions marked for deletion from the Online Facility should be handled. • NO -Select all Tracking definitions not marked for deletion. • YES – Select all marked definitions and definitions which match any other specified selection criteria. Query ID any1 The Query ID. • ALL • 1- to 10-character value 1 5-54 Operator must be EQ when ALL is specified in the field value IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen Selection Criteria Reference Chart – Profile File Profile File / System Field Operators Value Maintenance Options any The Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition name. 1- to 10-character value Online Deletes EQ Used to control how System definitions marked for deletion from the Online Facility should be handled. • NO – Select all System definitions not marked for deletion. • YES – Select all marked definitions and definitions which match any other specified selection criteria. Tracking Point any1 The system and process names of the Sterling tracking point. They must be separated by a comma. • ALL • 1- to 10-character, 1- to 8-character • (for example: system, process) User Tracking Point any1 The system and process names of the user tracking point. They must be separated by a comma. • ALL • 1- to 10-character,1- to 8-character (for example: system, process) 1 Operator must be EQ when ALL is specified in the field value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-55 EDIM610 – User Tracking Point Directory Screen EDIM610 – User Tracking Point Directory Screen Purpose The User Tracking Point Directory is available ONLY with the Tracking Management Module. This screen is not accessible from the Extended System Management Menu if Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management is not installed. The User Tracking Point Directory allows you to list all User Tracking Points that have been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Defining a system/process (for example, PURCHASING/ ALL) to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint as a user tracking point allows that system/process access to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint User Gateways for Tracking Management. The typical user of these functions is your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or EDI Coordinator. EDIM610 9.2.6_____ USER TRACKING POINT DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable System Process Status A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 06/01/2011 @COMMIB___ VPIBCOMM _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) System @COMMIB @COMMOB @INVSYSTEM @POSYSTEM Process VPIBCOMM VPOBCOMM VPIBAPPL VPOBAPPL Description SAMPLE INBOUND COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATION SAMPLE OUTBOUND COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATION SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE APPLICATION SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURCHASE ORDER APPLICATION LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Status E E E E F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the display list and press Enter to add a new User Tracking Point Definition. The User Tracking Point Definition screen is displayed with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the entry to be deleted and press Enter to mark a User Tracking Point Definition for deletion. The entry will be marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles Maintenance runs. A User Tracking Point Definition can be restored from the archive file, after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For detailed information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: A user tracking point that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN 5-56 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM610 – User Tracking Point Directory Screen MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated using the Online Facility. 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the User Tracking Point to be selected and press Enter. The User Tracking Point Definition screen, for the user tracking point selected, is displayed. This selected user tracking point screen may be used to either add a new user tracking point or to update the user tracking point displayed. 6=Enable Enter 6 on the line of the User Tracking Point to be enabled, and press Enter. When a User Tracking Point is enabled, the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways will accept calls from that user tracking point (that is, the tracking point will be monitored). 7=Disable Enter 7 on the line of the User Tracking Point to be disabled and press Enter. When a User Tracking Point is disabled, the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Gateways will not accept calls from this tracking point (that is, the user tracking point will not be monitored). Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field-level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. No update is performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the next four fields is entered by the user: System A 1- to 10-character field. Control the entry, displayed at the top of the list, by entering the User Tracking Point SYSTEM required. Partial names may be entered. Process A 1- to 8-character field. Control the entry, displayed at the top of the list, by entering the User Tracking Point PROCESS required. Partial names may be entered. Status A 1-character field that limits the list to a single status. blank Both statuses are listed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-57 EDIM610 – User Tracking Point Directory Screen E Enabled. Only enabled tracking points are listed. D Disabled. Only disabled tracking points are listed. A (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for a tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The system name of the user tracking point is displayed in this column. Process The user tracking point process name is displayed in this column. Description A description of the user tracking point is displayed in this column. Note: A user tracking point that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. Status The current status for the user tracking point is displayed in this column. 5-58 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM611 – User Tracking Point Definition Screen EDIM611 – User Tracking Point Definition Screen Purpose The User Tracking Point Definition is available ONLY with the Tracking Management Module. This screen is not accessible from the Extended System Management Menu if Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management is not installed. The User Tracking Point Definition allows you to define a User Tracking Point with the options you need for that process. The User Tracking Point Definition screen provides the definition of a User Tracking Point to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. You may define a User Tracking Point as a general system (for example, System – Purchasing, Process – ALL), or define a User Tracking Point as a specific process within a system (for example, System – PURCHASING, Process – PURC1234). Note: Process-specific User Tracking Point definitions override general User Tracking Point Definitions. EDIM611 9.2.7_____ USER TRACKING POINT DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter. _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete System . . . Process . . Description Item Type . Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . @INVSYSTEM VPIBAPPL SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE APPLICATION___________ U:INVOICE_______ (F4=Prompt) E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Process Status Names Status 1 Name U:PGM. STATUS__ Status 2 Name U:PYMT. STATUS_ Status 3 Name U:RCV'D. STATUS F1=Help F3=Exit 06/01/2011 F4=Prompt User Field Names Field 1 Name U:P.O. NUMBER__ Field 2 Name U:INVOICE DATE_ Field 3 Name U:SHIP DATE____ F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new User Tracking Point Definition to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. If the tracking point already exists, an error message is displayed and the tracking point is not added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update a User tracking point definition. The tracking point definition will be updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, using the current field values. When the action is complete, the screen will redisplay with a message indicating that the Tracking Point Definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen will redisplay with a message indicating that the Tracking Point Definition was not found. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-59 EDIM611 – User Tracking Point Definition Screen 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark a User tracking point definition for deletion. The tracking point will be marked for deletion and will be deleted during the next run of Profiles Maintenance. A tracking point definition can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. Refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures" for information on Profiles Maintenance. Note: A User tracking point that has been marked for deletion may not be updated from the Online Facility. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=Prompt. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for the User tracking point. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System A 1- to 10-character field used in conjunction with Process to specify the User tracking point. Process A 1- to 8-character field used in conjunction with System to specify the User tracking point. Description A 1- to 45-character field to describe the User tracking point. Item Type A 1- to 16-character field you must enter. You must enter "U:" as the first 2 characters for the Item Type. To list all User Item Types that have been defined, use the F4=Prompt function key in the Item Type field. Item Type is a mandatory field in the Query Request search function. 5-60 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM611 – User Tracking Point Definition Screen The Item Type is used to classify similar business data and documents into a single group. For example: Your purchasing system may process many different documents, or may have many processes that affect the same document. In this case, you may name the item type "PURCHASING". However, other applications may have a single type of document or process and, in this case, you may name the item type as the document or process name. Status A 1-character field to enable or disable the User tracking point. E Enabled. While a user tracking point is enabled, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint User Gateways will accept calls from the user tracking point (that is, the user tracking point will be monitored). D Disabled. While a user tracking point is disabled, Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint User Gateways will not accept calls from the user tracking point (that is, the user tracking point will not be monitored). Process Status Names A 1- to 15-character field. User processes that are monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, may attach 1 to 3 statuses to each item. The names that are entered here are used as the labels for the process status fields on the Item Process Detail screen. The first 2 characters of the status name must be “U:”. A process status value passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is a 1- to 10-character field. Process Status Name 1 U:............. Process Status Name 2 U:............. Process Status Name 3 U:............. User Field Names A 1- to 15-character field entered by the user. User processes that are monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, may attach 1 to 3 user fields to each item that they pass to the Tracking Management module. The names that are entered here are used as the labels for the User fields on the Item Process Detail screen. The first 2 characters of the status name must be “U:”. A user field value passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is a 1- to 15character field. User Field Name 1 U:............. User Field Name 2 U:............. User Field Name 3 U:............. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-61 Exception Management Navigation Exception Management Screens Exception Management Navigation This section contains detailed information on the Exception Management Screens. The fields maintained in Exception Management and the effect they have on your system are explained. The navigation for Exception Management is illustrated in Figure 5.3. Exception Management EDIM620 Exception Profile Directory EDIM621 Exception Capture Directory EDIM623 Exception Action Directory EDIM625 Exception Profile Definition EDIM622 Exception Capture Definition EDIM624 Exception Action Definition EDIM626 User Message Directory EDIM627 User Message Definition EDIM628 User Procedure Directory EDIM629 User Procedure Definition EDIM630 Usage Cross Reference EDIM631 Figure 5.3 Exception Management Navigation 5-62 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM620 – Exception Management Menu EDIM620 – Exception Management Menu Purpose The Exception Management Menu provides direct access to the primary functions of Exception Management. Exception Management functions allow you to set up and control the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Profiles and Definitions. Exception Management options are typically used by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or the EDI Coordinator in response to an end user request. However, end users may be granted authorization to use these options. EDIM620 9.3_______ EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. __ F1=Help 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Exception Profile Directory Exception Profile Definition Exception Capture Directory Exception Capture Definition Exception Action Directory Exception Action Definition User Message Directory User Message Definition User Procedure Directory User Procedure Definition Usage Cross Reference F3=Exit The Exception Management Menu contains eleven options. The list of menu options, as well as a brief description of each option, is listed below. Menu Option Description 1. Exception Profile Directory Provides a list of Exception Profiles which are defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 2. Exception Profile Definition Provides you with the ability to define criteria for controlling how an exception should be handled. 3. Exception Capture Directory Provides a list of Exception Capture Definitions which are defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-63 EDIM620 – Exception Management Menu 5-64 Menu Option Description 4. Exception Capture Definition Allows you to define an event as an exception to be captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. From the Exception Capture Definition screen, you may attach user messages and user procedures to the exception. These messages and procedures may be used while resolving the exception. 5. Exception Action Directory Provides a list of Exception Action Definitions which are defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 6. Exception Action Definition Allows you to define automated user systems/functions (for example, pager system, E-MAIL) you wish to use for responding to exceptions which are captured. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will initiate these actions based on trigger levels that are defined in the Exception Profile. 7. User Message Directory Provides a list of the user messages which have been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 8. User Message Definition Allows you to define messages and explanations which are meaningful to your specific needs. User messages and explanations are available from Exception Inquiry when you are resolving exceptions. 9. User Procedure Directory Provides a list of the user procedures which have been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 10. User Procedure Definition Allows you to define manual actions and procedures. The user procedures may then be attached to Exception Profiles for online use by users when they are resolving an exception. 11. Usage Cross Reference Allows you to determine the use of Captures, Recipients, Actions, User Messages, User Procedures, Batch Actions, and Online Actions. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM621 – Exception Profile Directory Screen EDIM621 – Exception Profile Directory Screen Purpose The Exception Profile Directory allows you to list all Exception Profiles that have been created. Exception Profiles combine capture, recipient, and action information to control how an exception should be handled by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. This function is typically used by your Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or the EDI Coordinator in response to an end-user request. However, end-users may be granted authorization to set up their own Exception Profiles. EDIM621 9.3.1_____ EXCEPTION PROFILE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 6=Enable 7=Disable 06/01/2011 Profile @MODEL-AR_ Status _ (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Profile @MODEL-AR @MODEL-CM @MODEL-CMI @MODEL-CMO @MODEL-DS @MODEL-GS @MODEL-IE @MODEL-IM @MODEL-IS @MODEL-OE @MODEL-OEX @MODEL-OM @MODEL-OU F1=Help Description ACKNOWLEDGEMENT ERRORS COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS (CONNECT INBOUND API) COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS (CONNECT OUTBOUND API) ALL DOCUMENT SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL GROUP SUSPENSE ERRORS INBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS ALL INTERCHANGE SUSPENSE ERRORS OUTBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS OUTBOUND EDI EXTRACT ERRORS OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS COMMUNICATIONS ERRORS (STOUTL) F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Status E E E E E E E E E E E E E F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to display a blank Exception Profile Definition screen. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the Exception Profile to be deleted and press Enter. The Exception Profile is marked for deletion, and will be deleted during the next run of Profiles Maintenance. An exception profile definition can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: An Exception Profile that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated from the Online Facility 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the Exception Profile to be selected and press Enter. The Exception Profile Definition screen for the Exception Profile selected will be displayed. 6=Enable Enter 6 on the line of the Exception Profile to be enabled and press Enter. When an Exception Profile is enabled, the Profile is used for monitoring tracking points. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-65 EDIM621 – Exception Profile Directory Screen 7=Disable Enter 7 on the line of the Exception Profile to be disabled and press Enter. When an Exception Profile is disabled, the Profile will not be used for monitoring tracking points. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the next three fields is entered by the user: Profile A 1- to 10-character field. Control the entry displayed at the top of the list by entering the Exception Profile required. Partial names may be used. Status A 1-character field to limit the list to a single status type. blank Both statuses are listed. E Enabled. Only enabled exception profiles are listed. D Disabled. Only disabled exception profiles are listed. A (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for a profile. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Profile The name of the Exception Profile is displayed in this column. Description The description of the Exception Profile is displayed in this column. Note: An exception profile that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. Status The current status for the profile is displayed in this column. 5-66 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM622 – Exception Profile Definition Screen EDIM622 – Exception Profile Definition Screen Purpose An Exception Profile definition allows you to combine your requirements for controlling how an exception should be handled. The Exception Profile defines the rules which should be used for processing events that are passed through to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The criteria used for defining an Exception Profile are a capture condition, a recipient, and/or an action. Actions for responding to an exception are automatically initiated by the Exception Profile. EDIM622 9.3.2_____ EXCEPTION PROFILE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 06/01/2011 Profile . . . . @MODEL-AR_ Description . . ACKNOWLEDGEMENT_ERRORS_______________________ Status . . . . E (E=Enabled, D=Disabled) Capture . . . @MODEL-AR_ (F4=Prompt) Description : CAPTURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS NOT ACCEPTED Recipient . . . @ACKREC___ (F4=Prompt) Description . . ACKNOWLEDGEMENT_RECONCILIATION_ERRORS________ CC Recipient . __________ (F4=Prompt) Description . . _____________________________________________ Action . . . . @MODEL-BAT (F4=Prompt) Description : SAMPLE BATCH ACTION Trigger Level RUN_ F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new Exception Profile Definition. If the profile already exists, an error message is displayed and the profile will not be added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update an Exception Profile Definition. The Exception Profile Definition is updated using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen redisplays with a message indicating that the Exception Profile Definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen will redisplay with a message indicating the Exception Profile was not found. 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark an Exception Profile Definition for deletion. The Exception Profile will be marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: An Exception Profile Definition that has been marked for deletion may not be updated from the Online Facility. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-67 EDIM622 – Exception Profile Definition Screen Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field, on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields that are marked with F4=Prompt. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the next five fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field to request an action. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Profile A 1- to 10-character field used to identify the name you want associated with the Exception Profile Definition. Description A 1- to 45-character field to describe the Exception Profile. Status A 1-character field used to control whether or not the profile should be used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for evaluating the staging area data. E Enabled. The profile will be used by the postprocessor to process staging area data. D Disabled. The profile will not be used to evaluate staging area data. Capture A 1- to 10-character field which identifies the Capture Definition to be used by this Exception Profile. From this field, F4=Prompt may be used to obtain a list of available Exception Capture Definitions. Description The description of the Capture Definition is displayed in this field. 5-68 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM622 – Exception Profile Definition Screen Recipient A 1- to 10-character field used to identify the recipient for exceptions captured by this profile. From this field, F4=Prompt may be used to obtain a list of available Recipients. Description A 1- to 45-character field used to describe the recipient. If the recipient is a new recipient, you may enter a description for that recipient. If the recipient entered is an existing recipient, the description for that recipient is displayed and can be updated. CC Recipient A 1- to 10-character optional field used to identify the carbon copy recipient for exceptions captured by this profile. From this field F4=Prompt may be used to obtain a list of available Recipients. Description A 1- to 45-character field used to describe the carbon copy recipient. If the recipient is a new recipient, you may enter a description for that recipient. If the recipient entered is an existing recipient, the description for that recipient is displayed and can be updated. Action A 1- to 10-character optional field used to identify the Exception Action which should be performed for the Exception Profile. From this field F4=Prompt may be used to obtain a list of available Exception Action Definitions. Description The description for the Exception Action Definition is displayed in this field. Trigger Level A 1- to 4-character field used to control when the action should be performed for exceptions captured by the profile. RUN If any exceptions are captured by the profile, initiate the action once when the process has ended. EXCP Perform the action once for each exception captured by the profile. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-69 EDIM623 – Exception Capture Directory Screen EDIM623 – Exception Capture Directory Screen Purpose The Exception Capture Directory screen allows you to list all Exception Capture Definitions that have been created. From this directory you may quickly determine if the capture condition you require has already been defined. If so, simply use this Capture Definition in your Exception Profile. This function will typically be used by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or the EDI Coordinator. However, end users may be granted authorization to access this directory. EDIM623 9.3.3_____ EXCEPTION CAPTURE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 System . . CONNECT___ Process EDIR314_ Capture ID @MODEL-CMO A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ System CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN F1=Help Process EDIR314 EDIR316 MAILBOX STOUTL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL EBDI001 EBDI002 EBDI041 F3=Exit Capture ID @MODEL-CMO @MODEL-CMI @MODEL-CM @MODEL-OU @MODEL-DS @MODEL-GS @MODEL-IS @MODEL-TS @MODEL-16 @MODEL-IE @MODEL-OE @MODEL-IM F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Description CONNECT OUTBOUND INTERFACE ERRORS CONNECT INBOUND INTERFACE ERRORS CONNECT ERRORS CONNECT OFFLINE UTILITIES ERRORS ALL DOCUMENT SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL GROUP SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL INTERCHANGE SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL TRANSACTION SUSPENSE ERRORS ALL FATAL ERRORS INBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS OUTBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the display list and press Enter to add a new Exception Capture Definition. The Exception Capture Definition screen is displayed with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the entry to be deleted and press Enter to mark an Exception Capture Definition for deletion. The Exception Capture Definition is marked for deletion, and will be deleted during the next run of Profiles Maintenance. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: An Exception Capture Definition that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated from the Online Facility. 5-70 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM623 – Exception Capture Directory Screen 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to select an existing Exception Capture Definition. The Exception Capture Definition screen for the Exception Capture Definition selected is displayed. 8=Usage Enter 8 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Profiles that use the selected Exception Capture Definition are displayed. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the next four fields is entered by the user: System A 1- to 10-character field used to control which System is displayed at the top of the list. You may use partial names. Process A 1- to 8-character field used to control which Process is displayed at the top of the list. You may use partial Processes. Capture ID A 1- to 10-character field used to control which Capture ID is displayed at the top of the list. You may use partial Capture IDs. A (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for a Capture Definition. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The tracking point system name that the capture definition belongs to is displayed in this column. Process The tracking point process name that the capture definition belongs to is displayed in this column. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-71 EDIM623 – Exception Capture Directory Screen Capture ID The capture definition ID is displayed in this column. Description The capture definition description is displayed in this column. Note: A capture definition that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. 5-72 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Purpose The Exception Capture Definition screen allows you to specify the exact condition of the exception you wish to capture. The conditions for defining an event as an exception may be as specific or general as you choose. From this screen, you may also attach a User Message and User Procedure to the Capture Definition. The User Message and Procedure will then be available to the end-user in Exception Inquiry to aid in the resolution of the exception. Refer to Chapter 2, "Optional Features" for more details about the use of User Messages and Procedures. EDIM624 9.3.4_____ EXCEPTION CAPTURE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage System . . . Process . . Capture ID Description CONNECT___ EDIR314_ @MODEL-CMO CONNECT_OUTBOUND_INTERFACE_ERRORS____________ User Message _______ Item Type 06/01/2011 (F4=Prompt) User Procedure __________ (F4=Prompt) BATCH___________ (F4=Prompt) Capture Condition (F4=Prompt) Field Op Value Connector INCOMPLETE_FLAG__________ EQ Y__________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ _________________________ __ ___________________________________ ___ F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new Exception Capture Definition. The Exception Capture Definition will be added to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. If the Exception Capture already exists, an error message is displayed and the Exception Capture will not be added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update the Exception Capture definition using the current screen field values. When the Action is complete, the screen redisplays with a message indicating that the Exception Capture Definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen redisplays with a message indicating that the Exception Capture Definition was not found. 4=Delete Enter 4 in the Action field, and press Enter to mark an Exception Capture Definition for deletion. The Exception Capture is marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-73 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen For more information on Profiles Maintenance refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: An Exception Capture that has been marked for deletion is displayed but may not be updated. Only definitions not currently in use by an Exception Profile may be deleted. 8=Usage Enter 8 and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Profiles that use the Exception Capture Definition are displayed. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field, on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields that are marked with F4=Prompt. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the Capture Conditions listed on the screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the Capture Conditions listed on the screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for the Capture Definition. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System A 1- to 10-character field used in conjunction with Process to identify the tracking point to which this Capture Definition belongs. Refer to the "Capture Condition Reference Chart" which follows. 5-74 GENTRAN Sterling Gentran:Basic or Sterling Gentran:Realtime System CONNECT Sterling Connect Communications System (for Sterling Gentran:Plus users with Sterling Connect) IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Process A 1-to 8-character field used in conjunction with System to identify the tracking point to which this Capture Definition belongs. Refer to the "Capture Condition Reference Chart" which follows. ALL All processes for the system will be accepted by the Gateway. Sterling Gentran Processes EDID205 Outbound EDI Databank Extract EDID405 Inbound Application Databank Extract EDID510 Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor EDID850 Network Reconciliation EBDI001 Inbound Editor EBDI002 Outbound Editor EBDI041 Inbound Mapper EBDI042 Outbound Mapper EDID255 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound EDI Databank Extract EDID455 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Application Databank Extract EDID515 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgement Reconciliation/ Monitor EDIR001 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Editor EDIR002 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Editor EDIR041 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Mapper EDIR042 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Mapper Sterling Connect Processes STOUTL Sterling Connect Offline Utilities MAILBOX Sterling Connect Communications Product EDIR314 Sterling Connect Outbound Interface EDIR316 Sterling Connect Inbound Interface Capture ID A 1- to 10-character field that identifies the Capture Definition to be used by this Exception Profile. Description A 1- to 45-character field that describes the Exception Capture Definition. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-75 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen User Message A 7-character field where the first character is fixed as "U" to identify the message as a user message and the last 6 characters are a number entered by the user to identify the message. A User Message is defined by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users and may be associated with captured exceptions by specifying a user message here. The user message specified here will be available to users of Exception Inquiry when resolving exceptions. From this field, F4=Prompt may be used to obtain a list of available User Messages. Refer to Chapter 2, "Optional Features" for more information on the use of User Messages. User Procedure A 1- to 10-character field that may be associated with captured exceptions by specifying a User Procedure here. User Procedures are created by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users to document procedures/ steps which should be taken for the exception which has been captured. By specifying a User Procedure here, the procedure/steps are available to Exception Inquiry users when resolving exceptions. From this field, you may use the F4=Prompt to obtain a list of available User Procedures. Item Type A 1- to 16-character field that specifies the item type to which the capture condition applies. Refer to the "Capture Condition Reference Chart" which follows. From this field, you may use the F4=Prompt to obtain a list of available Item Types. Batch The item type is a communications batch (for Sterling Gentran:Plus or Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only). Document The item type is a document. Functional Group The item type is a functional group. Interchange The item type is an interchange. Run The item type is a run. (Valid only when "Field" is specified as Return-Code or Run-Incomplete.) Transaction The item type is a transaction. Capture Condition The Capture Condition provides you with the ability to define events you are interested in monitoring. A Capture Condition is comprised of fields, operators, and values to form expressions and connectors which join these expressions to form the complete condition. Refer to the "Capture Condition Reference Chart" for valid values that can be used for a Capture Condition expression. 5-76 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Field A 1- to 25-character field used to specify the field to be used in the expression. The valid fields which can be entered vary by the Process specified. Use the function key F4=Prompt when the cursor is on this field to display a selection list of valid selection criteria for the process specified. Op A 2-character field used to specify the operator for the expression. Valid operators vary by field, as described below. EQ Equal. NE Not Equal. GT Greater Than. LT Less Than. LE Less Than or Equal To. GE Greater Than or Equal To. Value A 1- to 35-character field that specifies the value which should be used to test against the field's data value. For valid values refer to the "Capture Condition Reference Chart". Connector A 2- to 3-character field used to connect multiple expressions for completing the desired selection criteria. The order of precedence is ANDs before ORs (that is, ANDs are evaluated, then ORs are evaluated, then the condition is tested for truth). For example: A and B or C and D would be evaluated as (A and B) or (C and D) AND Both expressions must be true. OR Either one of the expressions must be true. Capture Condition Reference Chart Purpose The Capture Condition Chart provides you with a quick reference to the fields you may use in a capture condition. The chart also provides the valid values, processes, and types that can be used with the fields. Structure Process/Item TypeProcess is used in conjunction with Item Type to identify the tracking point to which this Capture Definition belongs. This field also specifies the exception type to which the capture condition applies. Field This column is used to specify the field to be used in the expression. The valid fields which can be entered vary by the Process specified. Operators This column is used to specify the operator for the expression. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-77 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Value This column specifies the value which should be used to compare against the field's data value. How to Use the Capture Condition Reference Chart 1. Locate the desired field on the "Capture Condition Reference Chart". 2. Identify the process used and its valid item types. 3. Refer to the OPERATOR and VALUE columns for valid entries for the desired field. Legend Sterling Gentran Processes OM EBDI042/EDIR042 Outbound Mapper OE EBDI002/EDIR002 Outbound Editor OEX EDID205/EDID255 Outbound EDI Extract AR EDID510/EDID515 Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor NR EDID850 Network Reconciliation IE EBDI001/EDIR001 Inbound Editor IM EBDI041/EDIR041 Inbound Mapper IAX EDID405/EDID455 Inbound Application Extract Sterling Connect Processes OU STOUTL Sterling Connect Offline Utilities (for Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) CM MAILBOX Sterling Connect (for Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) CMOI EDIR314 Sterling Connect Outbound Interface (for Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only) CMII EDIR316 Sterling Connect Inbound Interface (for Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only) Item Type 5-78 Item Type Description R Run B Batch (for Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) D Document I Interchange IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Item Type Description F Functional Group T Transaction Capture Condition Reference Chart Process Item Type Field Operators Value The following Capture Conditions apply to Sterling Gentran processes OEX AR IE IM IAX I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T D D Acknowledgement Status EQ,NE The current acknowledgement status for the item. • A – Accepted • E – Accepted with Errors • I – Indeterminate (only valid for AR process) • O – Overdue (only valid for AR process) • P – Partial • R – Rejected • W – Waiting OM OE OEX AR IM IAX D T T T D D Application Data ID EQ, NE Application Data ID that was used to process the item. 1- to 10-character value IE T Compliance Status any The current compliance status for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered. • 04 – One or more element errors were encountered. • 08 – One or more missing or misplaced segments were encountered. • 12 – The transaction set was incomplete. OE OEX NR AR I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T Deferred Enveloping EQ, NE This item is a deferred enveloping item on the Databank. • Y – Yes is a deferred enveloping item. • N – No is not a deferred enveloping item. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-79 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Process Item Type OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX Field Operators Value D I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T I, F, T D D Duplicate Indicator EQ, NE This item is a duplicate of another item on the Databank. • Y – Yes is a duplicate. • N – No is not a duplicate. IE IM IAX I, F, T D D Envelope Status any The status from Envelope Validation for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered in the document. • 04 – One or more errors (other than authorization and sequence errors) were encountered in processing the Transmission Envelope, or one or more errors (other than unknown user or unknown partner) were encountered in processing the Functional Group Envelope. • 08 – Either no Partner ID/Qualifier or User/Partner was found corresponding to the sender/receiver codes contained in the Functional Group, or the segment count contained in the Transaction Set Trailer was found to be in error. OE OEX AR IE F, T F, T F, T F, T Functional Group ID EQ, NE The functional group ID from the EDI data. 1- to 6-character value OM IM IAX D D D Mapping Status any The current mapping status for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered during the mapping process for the document. • 04 – One or more non-fatal mapping errors were detected. • 12 – A document could not be translated. OE OEX NR AR I I I I Network ID EQ, NE The network ID, from the trading profile, that was used to process this item. 1- to 15-character value 5-80 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Process Item Type Field Operators Value NR I Network Status EQ, NE The current network status for the item. • E – Error on receive, sorting, or pickup. • N – Network Tracking not active. • P – Picked up. • R – Received. • S – Sorted. • U – Manual network complete. • W – Waiting. OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T I, F, T D D Partner EQ, NE Partner ID from the Trading Profile, that processed this item. • 1- to 15-character value (If trading profile mode is Relationship.) • 1- to 35-character value (If trading profile mode is Partner-Qualifier.) OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T I, F, T D D Partner Qualifier EQ, NE Partner Qualifier for the Partner. (Only valid if trading profile mode is PartnerQualifier.) 1- to 4-character value OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T I, F, T D D Processed Date/ Time any The date and time the item was last processed by a tracking point. MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX R R R R R R R R Return Code any The highest return code from the tracking point, that processed the item. 2-digit number Note: No other fields may be used in the capture condition, if this field is specified. The Item Type in the Capture Definition must specify RUN if this field is used. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-81 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Process Item Type OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX Field Operators Value R R R R R R R R Run Incomplete N/A This field may be used for issuing notification that a tracking point run has not completed. NO value is specified for this field. Note: No other fields may be used in the capture condition, if this field is specified. The Item Type in the Capture Definition must specify RUN if this field is used. IE IM IAX I, F, T D D Sequence Status any The status from Sequence Checking for the item. • 00 – No errors. • 04 – Sequence errors detected. OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T I, F, T D D System Message any The System Message ID generated for the item by the tracking point. 6-digit number (leading zeroes required) OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T I, F, T D D Test/ Production EQ, NE The test/production indicator for the item. • P – Production • T – Test OE OEX AR IE IM IAX T T T T D D Transaction Set any The EDI Transaction Set ID. • 1- to 6-character value (EDIFACT) • 1- to 6-digit number (X12 and TDCC) OM OE OEX NR AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I I, F, T I, F, T D D User EQ, NE The User ID assigned to the item, from the trading profile, used to process the item. (Only valid if Trading Profile mode is Relationship.) 1- to 15-character value 5-82 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Process Item Type OM IM D D Field Operators Value User Error Number any The User Error Number generated for the item by the tracking point. 6-digit number (leading Zeroes required) The following additional Capture Conditions apply to Sterling Gentran processes (Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only) OM OE OEX AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T D D CICS Transaction ID EQ, NE The CICS Transaction ID which processed the exception. 4-character value OM OE OEX AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T D D Option any The Option number which processed the exception. 3-digit value OM OE OEX AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T D D Path ID any The Path ID which processed the exception. 3-digit value OM OE OEX AR IE IM IAX D I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T I, F, T D D Queue File Number any The Queue File Number which contained the output data for the exception. 3-digit value The following Capture Conditions apply to Sterling Connect processes (Sterling Gentran:Plus or Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only) OU CMOI B B Added Flag EQ, NE IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Indicates whether the batch has been added offline. Y – Yes 5-83 EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Process Item Type OU CM CMOI CMII Field Operators Value B B B B Batch ID EQ, NE The user assigned ID for the batch. 1- to 24-character value OU CM CMOI CMII B B B B Batch Number any CM B Collected Flag EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been collected online. Y – Yes CM B Communication Protocol EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch originates from BSC, SNA, or Host. • B – BSC • S – SNA • H – Host OU CMII B B Extracted Flag EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been extracted. Y – Yes CM B Failure Code any The failure code associated with the batch. 3-digit code OU CM CMOI CMII B B B B Incomplete Flag EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch is incomplete. • Y – Yes • N – No OU CM B B Processed Date/ Time any The date and time the item was last processed by a tracking point. MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM OU CM CMOI CMII B B B B Record Count any The number of records for the batch. 9-digit value OU CM CMOI CMII B B B B Remote ID EQ, NE The remote ID associated to the batch. 8-character value OU CM CMOI CMII B B B B Requestable Flag EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch is available for requests. • Y – Yes • N – No 5-84 The current batch number assigned by Sterling Connect. 7-digit value IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM624 – Exception Capture Definition Screen Process Item Type Field Operators Value OU R Return Code any The highest return code from the tracking point, that processed the item. 2-digit number Note: No other fields may be used in the capture condition, if this field is specified. The Item Type in the Capture Definition must specify RUN if this field is to be used. OU R Run Incomplete N/A This field may be used for issuing notification that a tracking point run has not completed. NO value is specified for this field. Note: No other fields may be used in the capture condition, if this field is specified. The Item Type in the Capture Definition must specify RUN if this field is used. CM B Transmitted Flag EQ, NE Indicates whether the batch has been transmitted. • Y – Yes • N – No The following additional Capture Conditions apply to Sterling Connect processes (Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only) CMOI CMII B B CICS Transaction ID EQ, NE The CICS Transaction ID which processed the exception. 4-character value CMOI CMII B B Option any The Option number which processed the exception. 3-digit value CMOI CMII B B Path ID any The Path ID which processed the exception. 3-digit value CMOI CMII B B Queue File Number any The Queue File Number which contained the output data for the exception. 3-digit value IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-85 EDIM625 – Exception Action Directory Screen EDIM625 – Exception Action Directory Screen Purpose The Exception Action Directory allows you to list all Exception Action Definitions that have been created. From this Directory you may quickly determine if the action you require has already been defined. If so, you may use the Action Definition in their Exception Profile. This function is typically used by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or the EDI Coordinator. However, end users may be given authorization to access this Directory. EDIM625 9.3.5_____ EXCEPTION ACTION DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 Action @MODEL-BAT Type _ (B=Batch, O=Online) Status _ (E=Enable, D=Disable) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Action Description @MODEL-BAT SAMPLE BATCH ACTION @MODEL-ONL SAMPLE ONLINE ACTION LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Type Status BATCH D ONLINE D F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the display list and press Enter to add an Exception Action Definition. The Exception Action Definition screen is displayed with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the entry to be deleted, and press Enter to mark an Exception Action Definition for deletion. The Exception Action Definition is marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Only Action Definitions which are not currently in use by an Exception Profile may be deleted. Note: An Exception Action Definition that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated from the Online Facility. 5-86 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM625 – Exception Action Directory Screen 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to select an existing Exception Action Definition. The Exception Action Definition screen for the Exception Action Definition selected is displayed. 8=Usage Enter 8 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Profiles that use the selected Exception Action Definition are displayed. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. Action A 1- to 10-character field entered by the user. Control the entry, displayed at the top of the list, by entering the Action. You may enter partial names. Type A 1-character field entered by the user to limit the list to a specific action type. B Batch O Online blank All Types Status A 1-character field entered by the user to limit the list to a specific action status. E Enabled. Only actions which are enabled are displayed. D Disabled. Only actions which are disabled are displayed. blank All statuses are displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-87 EDIM625 – Exception Action Directory Screen A (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Action The Exception Action name is displayed in this column. Description The Exception Action description is displayed in this column. Note: An exception action that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. Type The Exception Action type is displayed in this column. Status The current status for the Exception Action definition is displayed in this column. 5-88 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM626 – Exception Action Definition Screen EDIM626 – Exception Action Definition Screen Purpose The Exception Action Definition screen allows you to define actions for automatically initiating responses to exceptions that are captured. You may initiate a batch or an online user process. From this screen, you are able to directly input data for use by the automated system. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint will also pass data which can be used by the automated system. For more information about “Exception Actions” refer to Chapter 2, “Optional Features”. Exception Action Definitions is typically be created by the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator or the EDI Coordinator. EDIM626 9.3.6_____ EXCEPTION ACTION DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage Action . . Description Type . . . Status . . . . . . . . . . 06/01/2011 @MODEL-BAT SAMPLE_BATCH_ACTION__________________________ B (B=Batch, O=Online) D (E=Enable, D=Disable) Batch Procedure EDIVBACT Online TransID ____ User Data Area SYNTAX_FOR_AUTOMATED_BATCH_SYSTEM_MAY_BE_ENTERED_HERE.__THIS_WILL_BE__ PASSED_TO_THE_SYSTEM_ALONG_WITH_THE_CAPTURED_DATA.____________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new Exception Action Definition. The Exception Action Definition is added to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. If the Exception Action already exists, an error message is displayed and the Exception Action will not be added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update the Exception Action Definition. The Exception Action definition is updated using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen is redisplayed with a message indicating that the Exception Action Definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen is redisplayed with a message indicating that the Exception Action Definition was not found. 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark an Exception Action Definition for deletion. The Exception Action is marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. For more information on Profiles Maintenance refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-89 EDIM626 – Exception Action Definition Screen Note: An Exception Action that has been marked for deletion may not be updated from the Online Facility. Only definitions not currently in use by an Exception Profile may be deleted. 8=Usage Enter 8 and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Profiles that use the Exception Action Definition are displayed. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field to request an action for an Exception Action Definition. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Action A 1- to 10-character field used to identify the name you want associated with the Exception Action. Description A 1- to 45-character field used to describe the Exception Action. Type A 1-character field to specify whether the action is a batch or online action. B Batch O Online Status A 1-character field used to control whether the action is enabled or disabled. 5-90 E The action is performed for any Exception Profile that has specified the action. D The action is not performed for any Exception Profile that has specified the action. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM626 – Exception Action Definition Screen Batch Procedure A 1- to 8-character field used to specify the user batch program name to be initiated by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. You must specify the "Type" field as "B" (batch) if you enter this field. Note: If the user program is a batch program, you must specify the “Batch Procedure” field as the actual program name of the user program. The Batch Action Processor (EDIN200) program will invoke the user program and pass parameters related to the exception. For more information on the Batch Action Processor, refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, Chapter 1, “Batch Program Descriptions”. Online TransID A 1- to 4-character field entered by the use to specify the CICS TransID that Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint should initiated. Note: This is not affected by System Image. User Data Area The User Data Area are 4 lines of free form text entered by the user which contain information to be passed to the action. The information entered may be data required by the specified Batch procedure or Online TransID (for example, control parameters). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-91 EDIM627 – User Message Directory Screen EDIM627 – User Message Directory Screen Purpose The User Message Directory allows you to list all messages which Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users have defined. From this Directory, you may quickly determine if the message you need has already been defined. EDIM627 9.3.7_____ USER MESSAGE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 User Message ID U999999 A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ID User Message Text U999999 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM PARTNER VENDOR-2 FOR PURCHASE ORDE LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Severity WARNING F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the display list and press Enter to add a new User Message Definition. The User Message Definition screen is displayed with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the entry to be deleted and press Enter to mark a User Message Definition for deletion. The User Message Definition is marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: A User Message Definition that has been marked for deletion is displayed with the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated. Only definitions not currently in use by an Exception Capture Definition may be deleted. 5=Select 5-92 Enter 5 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to select an existing User Message Definition. The User Message Definition screen for the User Message Definition selected is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM627 – User Message Directory Screen 8=Usage Enter 8 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Capture Definitions that use the selected User Message Definition are displayed. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. User Message ID A 7-character field, where the first character is fixed as "U" to identify the message as a user message. The last 6 digits are numbers entered by the user to identify the message. Use this field to control which message is displayed at the top of the list. You may enter partial User Message IDs. A (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. ID The User Message ID is displayed in this column. User Message Text The user message text is displayed in this column. Note: A user message that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. Severity The severity defined to the user message is displayed in this column. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-93 EDIM628 – User Message Definition Screen EDIM628 – User Message Definition Screen Purpose The User Message Definition screen allows Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users to define messages which have explanations that are relevant and meaningful to them. User Messages can be associated with Exception Capture Definitions. By attaching a User Message to an Exception Capture Definition, the User Message is available to end users while they are working on exceptions. The User Message can be used online at the time and place the enduser requires the information to resolve the exception. The User Message is displayed for the current exception from the User Message Display screen in Exception Inquiry. EDIM628 9.3.8_____ USER MESSAGE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage 06/01/2011 User Message ID U999999 Severity . . . W (I=Information, W=Warning, E=Error, S=Severe, F=Fatal) Text ACKNOWLEDGEMENT_FROM_PARTNER_VENDOR-2_FOR_PURCHASE_ORDER_IS_________ OVERDUE.____________________________________________________________ Explanation VENDOR-2_HAS_BEEN_SET_UP_AS_A_JUST-IN-TIME_SUPPLIER._ANY_DELAY_IN_THEIR____ DELIVERIES_MUST_BE_RESPONDED_TO_IMMEDIATELY._SEE_USER_PROCEDURE_@JIT.______ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new User Message Definition. The User Message Definition is added to the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. If the User Message already exists, an error message is displayed and the User Message will not be added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update an existing User Message Definition. The User Message Definition is updated using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen is redisplayed with a message indicating that the User Message Definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen will be redisplayed with a message indicating that the User Message Definition was not found. 5-94 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM628 – User Message Definition Screen 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark a User Message Definition for deletion. The User Message is marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. For more information on Profiles Maintenance refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: A User Message that has been marked for deletion is displayed but may not be updated. Only definitions not currently in use by an Exception Capture Definition may be deleted. 8=Usage Enter 8 in the Action field and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Capture Definitions that use the selected User Message Definition are displayed. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field used to request an action for the user message definition. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. User Message ID A 7-character field where the first character is fixed as "U" to identify the message as a user message. The last 6 characters are numbers entered by the user to identify the message. This value is used in the Exception Capture Definition to associate a User Message with an exception. Severity A 1-character field used to indicate the severity that should be associated with the defined message. The severity defined is for informational purposes only (that is, no action is initiated by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint based on severity). I Information W Warning IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-95 EDIM628 – User Message Definition Screen E Error S Severe F Fatal Text Two (2) lines of free-form text which describe the user message. Explanation Nine (9) lines of freeform text to explain the message being defined. This field is typically used to further detail the message or to describe possible causes. 5-96 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM629 – User Procedure Directory Screen EDIM629 – User Procedure Directory Screen Purpose The User Procedure Directory allows you to list all User Procedures which Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint users have defined in Exception Management. From the User Procedure Directory, you may quickly determine which User Procedures have been defined. EDIM629 9.3.9_____ USER PROCEDURE DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select 8=Usage 06/01/2011 Procedure @MODEL-JIT A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Procedure @MODEL-JIT Description PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING JUST-IN-TIME SUPPLIERS LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the display list and press Enter to add a new User Procedure Definition. The User Procedure Definition screen is displayed with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the entry to be deleted and press Enter to mark a User Procedure Definition for deletion. The User Procedure Definition will be marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. For more information on Profiles Maintenance refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: A User Procedure that has been marked for deletion is displayed with the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated. Only definitions not currently in use by an Exception Capture Definition may be deleted. 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to select an existing User Procedure Definition. The User Procedure Definition screen for the User Procedure Definition selected is displayed. 8=Usage Enter 8 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Capture Definitions that use the selected User Procedure Definition are displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-97 EDIM629 – User Procedure Directory Screen Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. Procedure A 1- to 10-character field entered by the user. This field is used to control which user procedure is displayed at the top of the list. You may enter partial procedure names. A (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for a User Procedure. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Procedure The User Procedure name is displayed in this column. Description The User Procedure description is displayed in this column. Note: A user procedure that has been marked for deletion will display the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. 5-98 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM630 – User Procedure Definition Screen EDIM630 – User Procedure Definition Screen Purpose The User Procedure Definition screen allows you to document actions, steps, or procedures that should be followed when resolving an exception. User Procedures can be attached to Exception Capture Definitions. By attaching a User Procedure to an Exception Capture Definition, the User Procedure will be available to end users while they are working on exceptions. The User Procedure can be used online at the time and place the end user requires the information to resolve the exception. The User Procedure is displayed in Exception Inquiry from the User Procedure Display screen for the current exception. EDIM630 9.3.10____ USER PROCEDURE DEFINITION Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 8=Usage 06/01/2011 Procedure @MODEL-JIT Description PROCEDURE_FOR_HANDLING_JUST-IN-TIME_SUPPLIERS Procedure 1.__INFORM_PURCHASING._____________________________________________________ 2.__CALL_SUPPLIER._________________________________________________________ 3.__IDENTIFY_PO_ITEM.______________________________________________________ 4.__UPDATE_MRP_FOR_IMPACT._________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a new User Procedure Definition. The User Procedure Definition displayed is added to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. If the User Procedure Definition already exists, an error message is displayed and the User Procedure will not be added. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update the User Procedure Definition. The User Procedure Definition is updated using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen is redisplayed with a message indicating that the User Procedure Definition has been updated. If the entry does not exist, the screen is redisplayed with a message indicating that the User Procedure Definition was not found. 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark a User Procedure Definition for deletion. The User Procedure Definition is marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Profiles Maintenance is run. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-99 EDIM630 – User Procedure Definition Screen For information on Profiles Maintenance refer to "File Maintenance Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Operational Procedures". Note: A User Procedure that has been marked for deletion is displayed but may not be updated. Only definitions not currently in use by an Exception Capture Definition may be deleted. 8=Usage Enter 8 and press Enter to transfer to the Usage Cross Reference screen. The Exception Capture Definitions that use the User Procedure Definition are displayed. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: (Action) A 1-character field used to request an action for the User Procedure Definition. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Procedure A 1- to 10-character field to name the User Procedure. This value is used in the Exception Capture Definition to associate a User Procedure with an exception. Description A 1- to 45-character field to describe the User Procedure that is being created. Procedure Thirteen lines of free-form text to document steps or a procedure that should be followed. The procedure entered here may be used for a specific exception or may be a general procedure which is attached to more than one Exception Capture Definition. 5-100 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM631 – Usage Cross Reference Screen EDIM631 – Usage Cross Reference Screen Purpose The Usage Cross Reference screen allows you to quickly determine where various Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management components are referenced within the Exception Management module. EDIM631 9.3.11____ Type Action, press Enter 5=Select USAGE CROSS REFERENCE 06/01/2011 Name . . . @MODEL-JIT Type . . . 5 (1=Capture, 2=Recipient, 3=Action, 4=User Message, 5=User Procedure, 6=Batch Action, 7=Online Action) A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Component CAPTURE ID CAPTURE ID Name @MODEL-AR @MODEL-RAR LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd Description CAPTURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS NOT ACCEPTED CAPTURE ACKS NOT ACCEPTED - REALTIME F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the entry to be selected and press Enter to transfer. The type of entry selected determines the destination. • If the component is Profile ID, transfer to the Exception Profile Definition screen. • If the component is Capture ID, transfer to the Exception Capture Definition screen. • If the component is Action ID, transfer to the Exception Action Definition screen. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-101 EDIM631 – Usage Cross Reference Screen Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: Name A 1- to 10-character field used to specify the name of the component to cross reference. Type A 1-character field to specify the type of component to cross reference. Valid values are: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = Capture Recipient Action User Message User Procedure Batch Action Online Action A (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for the specified entry. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Component The type of the cross referenced component is displayed in this column. Valid values are: Profile ID Capture ID Action ID Name The name of the cross referenced component is displayed in this column. Description The description of the cross referenced component is displayed in this column. 5-102 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Exception Inquiry Navigation Exception Inquiry Screens Exception Inquiry Navigation The functions in Exception Inquiry allow a user to respond to and resolve exceptions captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The purpose of each screen and how to use their fields are described in detail in this section. Navigation for Exception Inquiry is illustrated in Figure 5.4. Exception Inquiry EDIM645 Exception List EDIM648 Recipient Directory EDIM646 Recipient Detail EDIM647 Exception Detail EDIM649 Exception Message List EDIM650 Exception Data Display EDIM651 Exception History EDIM652 Exception History - 2 EDIM653 User Message Display EDIM662 User Procedure Display EDIM663 Exception History Update EDIM654 Figure 5.4 Exception Inquiry Navigation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-103 EDIM645 – Exception Inquiry Menu EDIM645 – Exception Inquiry Menu Purpose The Exception Inquiry Menu provides you with direct access to the primary functions of Exception Inquiry. Exception Inquiry allows you to manage exceptions from either the recipient or exception level. The typical users of Exception Inquiry are the end users of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint end users are considered to be the users who are ultimately responsible for managing business documents travelling through the extended EDI system. EDIM645 9.4_______ EXCEPTION INQUIRY MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. _ F1=Help 1. Recipient Directory 2. Exception List F3=Exit The Exception Inquiry Menu contains two options which are listed below. The list of menu options, as well as a brief description of each option, follows. 5-104 Menu Option Description 1. Recipient Directory Provides a list of all recipients defined in Exception Profiles. 2. Exception List Provides a list of all exceptions captured for a single recipient. The status of each exception is also displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM646 – Recipient Directory Screen EDIM646 – Recipient Directory Screen Purpose The Recipient Directory provides a list of all recipients which are defined in Exception Profiles. At a glance, a user can determine if there are any exceptions for them. From the Recipient Directory a user may select detailed status information for a recipient or display a list of exceptions for a recipient. EDIM646 9.4.1_____ RECIPIENT DIRECTORY Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 5=Select 6=ExcpList 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Recipient @ACKREC___ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Recipient @ACKREC @COMM-ERRS @EDITORS @FATAL @MAPPERIN @MAPPEROUT @SUSPENSE Description ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCILIATION ERRORS COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR EDI COMPLIANCE MONITOR FATAL ERRORS INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS SUSPENSE ERRORS LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Excp Count 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Last Activity Date Time 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 Enter=Refresh Actions 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the recipient to be deleted and press Enter to mark a recipient for deletion. The recipient is marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository Maintenance runs. A recipient can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Repository Maintenance refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: A recipient that has been marked for deletion displays the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated. 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the recipient to be selected and press Enter to display the Recipient Detail screen for that recipient. 6=ExcpList Enter 6 on the line of the recipient to be listed and press Enter to display the Exception List screen for the recipient. Function Keys Enter=Refresh Refreshes the screen. F1=Help F3=Exit If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. Returns to the previous menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-105 EDIM646 – Recipient Directory Screen F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. The information for the next two fields is entered by the user: Recipient A 1- to 10-character field. Control the entry displayed at the top of the list by entering the Recipient Name required. Partial names may be used. A (Action) A 1-character field used to request an action for a recipient. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Recipient The recipient name is displayed in this column. Note: If your Sterling Gentran User ID is restricted by security to access only a single Recipient, this field is protected and you cannot over-type it. Description The description for the recipient is displayed in this column. Note: A recipient that has been marked for deletion displays the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. Excp Count The number of exceptions captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the recipient is displayed in this column. All exception status types are included in the count (for example: open, reviewed, transferred, closed). Last Activity Displays the last date and time that activity occurred in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the recipient. For example, if an exception is transferred from one recipient to another recipient the Last Activity shows the date and time of the transfer. 5-106 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM647 – Recipient Detail Screen EDIM647 – Recipient Detail Screen Purpose The Recipient Detail screen displays the number of exceptions, by status, currently being monitored for a recipient. This screen allows the user to display all exceptions for a recipient. EDIM647 __________ Type Action, press Enter. _ 6=ExcpList Recipient . . @MAPPERIN_ RECIPIENT DETAIL 06/01/2011 INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS Last Activity: 06/01/2011 - 12:00 EXCEPTIONS Status OPEN REVIEW TRNSFR CLOSED Count 00001 00000 00000 00000 TOTAL 00001 F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel Actions 6=ExcpList Enter 6 in the Action field and press Enter to display the Exception List screen for the recipient. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-107 EDIM647 – Recipient Detail Screen (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Recipient A 1- to 10-character field entered by the user. This field controls which recipient is displayed. The user may over-type this field to change which recipient is displayed. The description for the recipient is also displayed in this field. Note: If your Sterling Gentran User ID is restricted by security to access only a single Recipient, this field is protected and you cannot over-type it. Last Activity Displays the last date and time activity occurred in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the recipient. For example, if an exception is transferred from this recipient to another recipient, the Last Activity shows the date and time of the transfer. Status This column displays the status type for the count. Open Exceptions which are open. Review Exceptions which are in review. Trnsfr Exceptions which have been transferred to this recipient. Closed Exceptions which have been closed. Total Total of all exceptions. Count Displays the number of exceptions captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for each status. 5-108 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM648 – Exception List Screen EDIM648 – Exception List Screen Purpose The Exception List screen allows you to list all exceptions, and their statuses, that have been captured for a recipient. The order in which exceptions are listed is controlled by using the Order By Control option in the Tracking Point Definition. The default order for exceptions is by System and Process. Optionally, you can specify three additional fields. Refer to “EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions” for more details regarding Order By Control. From the Exception List screen, you have flexible control of exceptions using the actions available from this screen. Refer to Actions, documented below, for more details regarding the actions available. EDIM648 9.4.2_____ EXCEPTION LIST 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. 4=Delete 5=Select 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip Recipient . . @EDITORS__ EDI COMPLIANCE MONITOR Date From . . __________ To __________ Excp Status A (A=All, O=Open, C=Closed, R=Reviewed, T=Transferred) A __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ System GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN Process EBDI001 EBDI002 EDIR001 EDIR002 Reference 000000005 000000008 000000006 000000009 LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd /000000007 /000070001 /000000008 /000080001 S O O O O Date 06/01/11 06/01/11 06/01/11 06/01/11 F12=Cancel Actions 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the exception to be deleted and press Enter to mark an exception for deletion. The exception is marked for deletion, and will be deleted the next time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository Maintenance is run. You can restore an exception from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Repository Maintenance, refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: An exception that has been marked for deletion, is displayed with the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated. 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the exception to be selected and press Enter. The Exception Detail screen for the selected exception is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-109 EDIM648 – Exception List Screen 6=MsgList Enter 6 and press Enter to display the Exception Message List screen for the selected exception. 7=Data Enter 7 and press Enter to display the data for the selected exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Exception Data Display screen displays the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the exception. 8=UserMsg Enter 8 and press Enter to display the User Message screen for the selected exception. A User Message may be associated with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information on User Messages, refer to "User Messages" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features". 9=UserProc Enter 9 and press Enter to display the User Procedure screen for the selected exception. A user procedure may be associated with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information on User Procedures, refer to "User Procedures" in Chapter 2 "Optional Features". 10=ExcpHist Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Exception History screen for the selected exception. 11=Recip. Enter 11 and press Enter to display the Recipient Detail screen for the recipient to which the selected exception belongs. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. Recipient A 1- to 10-character field entered by the user to control which recipient's exceptions are listed. Over-type this field and press Enter to select exceptions for different recipients. The description for the recipient is also displayed in this field. 5-110 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM648 – Exception List Screen Note: If your Sterling Gentran User ID is restricted by security to access only a single Recipient, this field is protected and you cannot over-type it. Date From A 10-position alphanumeric field used to limit the list of Repository Exception Records displayed on this screen. This field is used to indicate the date with which you want the list of exception records to begin. The date format is MM/DD/YYYY. If a Date From is not entered, then the list will begin with the first Repository Exception Record found on the file. (Date) To A 10-position alphanumeric field used in conjunction with Date From to limit the list of Repository Exception Records displayed on this screen. This field is used to indicate the date with which you want the list of exception records to end. The date format is MM/DD/ YYYY. Excp Status A 1-character field entered by the user to limit the display of exceptions with a particular status. A All statuses are listed. O List only exceptions which are opened. C List only exceptions which have been closed. R List only exceptions which are in review. T List only exceptions which have been transferred. A (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for an exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The system that was processing the exception when it was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this column. Process The process that was operating when the exception was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this column. Reference Displays the reference identification of the exception. For EDI exceptions, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For application exceptions, this field will display the reference for the exception as defined in mapping. For communications exceptions, the reference is the Batch ID. Note: An exception that has been marked for deletion will display the reference “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-111 EDIM648 – Exception List Screen S (Status) The current status of the exception is displayed in this column. O Exception is currently open. R Exception is currently in review. T Exception has been transferred. C Exception has been closed. Date The tracking point date for the Repository Exception record. This is the date that the exception record was added to the file. The date is displayed in the format MM/DD/YY. 5-112 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Purpose The Exception Detail – Sterling Gentran Item screen provides you with detailed information for a single exception. Some of the information includes actions initiated by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the exception, the name of the Trading Partner is, and to which application the exception belongs. From the Exception Detail screen you have flexible control over the exception using the actions available from this screen. Refer to the Actions field description documented below for more details regarding the available actions. The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Exception Detail Screen in Partner/ Qualifier mode. EDIM649 __________ EXCEPTION DETAIL 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. __ 4=Delete 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip. 12=ItemExcp Recipient . . : Excp Status . : Excp Tag . . : User Reference: @MAPPERIN INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 0000000003 INV01 System/Process: GENTRAN /EBDI041 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 – 12:00 Capture ID. . : @MODEL-IM Description . : INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS Application Network . . . Direction/Set Partner . . . Qual . . . . F1=Help : INVFILE : : INBOUND /810 : VENDOR-1 : F3=Exit F6=Next Excp. Action: Action Dt-Tm: Databank: GENTRAN Interchange: 000000005 Group: 000000007 Trans: 000070001 F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-113 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Exception Detail Screen in Relationship mode. EDIM649 __________ EXCEPTION DETAIL 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. __ 4=Delete 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip. 12=ItemExcp Recipient . . : Excp Status . : Excp Tag . . : User Reference: @MAPPERIN INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 0000000003 INV01 System/Process: Date-Time . . : Capture ID. . : Description . : GENTRAN /EBDI041 06/01/2011 - 12:00 @MODEL-IM INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS Application Network . . . Direction/Set User . . . . Partner . . . INVFILE F1=Help : : : : : Excp. Action: Action Dt-Tm: Databank: GENTRAN Interchange: 000000005 Group: 000000007 Trans: 000070001 INBOUND /810 YOUR COMPANY THEIR COMPANY F3=Exit F6=Next F12=Cancel The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Exception Detail Screen in Partner/ Qualifier mode. EDIM649 __________ EXCEPTION DETAIL 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. __ 4=Delete 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip. 12=ItemExcp Recipient . . : Excp Status . : Excp Tag . . : User Reference: @MAPPERIN INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 0000000076 INV01 System/Process: GENTRAN /EDIR041 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 Capture ID. . : @MODEL-RIM – 12:00 Description . : INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS Application Network . . . Direction/Set Partner . . . Qual . . . . Trans ID/Task F1=Help 5-114 : : : : : : INVFILE – REALTIME Path / Option: 203/203 Queue File: EDIT/0000189 F6=Next Action: Interchange: 000000006 Group: 000000008 Trans: 000080001 INBOUND /810 VENDOR-1 F3=Exit Excp. Action Dt-Tm: Databank: REALTIME F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Exception Detail Screen in Relationship mode. EDIM649 __________ EXCEPTION DETAIL 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. __ 4=Delete 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip. 12=ItemExcp Recipient . . : Excp Status . : Excp Tag . . : User Reference: @MAPPERIN INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 0000000076 INV01 System/Process: Date-Time . . : Capture ID. . : Description . : GENTRAN /EDIR041 Excp. Action: 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Action Dt-Tm: @MODEL-RIM Databank: REALTIME INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS - REALTIME Application Network . . . Direction/Set User . . . . Partner . . . Trans ID/Task INVFILE F1=Help : : : : : : INBOUND /810 YOUR COMPANY THEIR COMPANY EDIT/0000189 F3=Exit F6=Next Interchange: 000000006 Group: 000000008 Trans: 000080001 Path / Option: 203/203 Queue File: F12=Cancel Actions 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark an exception for deletion. The exception and all associated data are marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository Maintenance is run. An exception can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Repository Maintenance, refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: An exception that has been marked for deletion, is displayed, but may not be updated. 6=MsgList Enter 6 and press Enter to display the Exception Message List for the exception. 7=Data Enter 7 and press Enter to display the Exception Data Display screen for the exception. 8=UserMsg Enter 8 and press Enter to display the User Message screen for an exception. You may associate a user message with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information on User Messages, refer to "User Messages" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features". 9=UserProc Enter 9 and press Enter to display the User Procedure screen for an exception. You may associate a user procedure with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information on User Procedures, refer to "User Procedures" in Chapter 2 "Optional Features". IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-115 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item 10=ExcpHist Enter 10 in the Action field, and press Enter to display the Exception History screen for an exception. 11=Recip. Enter 11 and press Enter to display the Recipient Detail screen for the recipient to which the exception belongs. 12=ItemExcp Enter 12 and press Enter to return to the Item Exception Status screen (EDIM718) for the exception. This action is ONLY available when the Item Exception Status screen (EDIM718) was used to transfer this screen. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F6=Next Displays the next exception for the recipient. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for the exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Recipient The recipient to which the exception belongs is displayed in this field. The recipient description is also displayed in this field. CC=Y If the recipient was defined as a carbon copy in the Exception Profile, this indicator will be suffixed to the recipient description. Excp Status The current status for the exception is displayed in this field. This field also displays the date and time when the current status was entered for the exception. 5-116 Open Exception is OPEN. Review Exception is in REVIEW. Trnsfr Exception has been TRANSFERRED. Closed Exception is CLOSED. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Excp Tag The exception tag for the exception is displayed in this column. The exception tag provides a unique identification for each exception being monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. User Reference The User Reference is displayed in this field. This field will display the reference for the exception as defined in mapping. System/Process The system and process that was processing the exception when it was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this field. Excp. Action The name of the exception action initiated for the exception is displayed in this field. Date-Time The date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the exception was captured is displayed in this field. Action Dt-Tm The date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the action was initiated for the exception is displayed in this field. Capture ID The Exception Capture definition used to capture this exception is displayed in this field. Databank The Databank System used to process the exception is displayed in this field. Description The description associated with the Capture ID is displayed in this field. Application The application to which the exception belongs is displayed in this field. The application originates from either the trading profile used for the exception or the user application tracking point. Interchange The EDI Interchange Envelope Reference ID is displayed in this field. Network The network to which the exception belongs is displayed in this field. The network originates from either the trading profile used for the exception or the user application tracking point. Group The EDI Group Envelope Reference ID is displayed in this field. Direction/Set The direction of the exception and the EDI transaction set ID are displayed in this field. Dir. Inbound From partner to user. Outbound From user to partner. Set A 6-character transaction set ID; this can be any of the supported EDI standards documents (for example X12, TDCC, EDIFACT, or Tradacoms). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-117 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Trans The EDI Transaction Envelope Reference ID is displayed in this field. User (Partner) The Trading Profile User ID used by translation for the exception is displayed in this field. Based on the trading profile mode defined, this field may be displayed as either the User ID or the Partner ID. Partner (Partner Qual) The Trading Profile Partner ID used for translation for the exception is displayed in this field. Based on the trading profile mode defined this field may be displayed as either the Partner ID or the Partner Qualifier. Path / Option The Path ID and Option Number used to process the exception are displayed in this field. This is only available for Sterling Gentran:Realtime exceptions. Trans ID/Task The CICS Transaction ID and Task Number used to process the exception are displayed in this field. This is only available for Sterling Gentran:Realtime exceptions. Queue File The Queue File Number used to process the exception is displayed in this field. This is only available for Sterling Gentran:Realtime exceptions. 5-118 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item Purpose This screen is only available for Sterling Gentran:Plus users who have enabled communications monitoring in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Exception Detail – Sterling Connect Item screen provides the user with detailed information for a single exception captured within the Sterling Connect communications system. Some of the information provided includes actions that have been initiated by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the exception, who the Remote ID is, and what was the Batch Number assigned to the data. From the Exception Detail screen a user has flexible control over the exception using the actions available from this screen. Refer to the Actions field description documented below for more details regarding the available actions. EDIM649 __________ EXCEPTION DETAIL 06/01/2011 Type Action, press Enter. __ 4=Delete 6=MsgList 7=Data 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 11=Recip. 12=ItemExcp Recipient . . : Excp Status . : Excp Tag . . : User Reference: @COMM-ERRS COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR OPEN 06/01/2011 12:00 0000000022 BATCH WITHOUT $$ADD System/Process: CONNECT /STOUTL Excp. Action Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 – 12:00 Capture ID. . : @MODEL-OU Description . : CONNECT OFFLINE UTILITIES ERRORS Batch ID . . Batch Number Failure Code MBX/RMT ID . F1=Help : : : : BATCH WITHOUT $$ADD 0000211 000 REMOTE2 F3=Exit F6=Next Action: Dt-Tm: Direction . : INBOUND Status . . . : EXTRACTED F12=Cancel Actions 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark an exception for deletion. The exception, and all associated exceptions are marked for deletion and will be deleted the next time Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository Maintenance runs. An exception can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Repository Maintenance refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: An exception that has been marked for deletion is displayed but may not be updated. 6=MsgList Enter 6 and press Enter to display the Exception Message List screen for the exception. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-119 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item For communications exceptions, the explanation text for the Sterling Connect Failure Code is displayed on the Exception Message List screen. 7=Data Enter 7 and press Enter to display the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) for the exception. 8=UserMsg Enter 8 and press Enter to display the User Message screen for an exception. You may associate a user message with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information on User Messages, refer to "User Messages" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features". 9=UserProc Enter 9 and press Enter to display the User Procedure screen for an exception. You may associate a user procedure with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information on User Procedures, refer to "User Procedures" in Chapter 2 "Optional Features". 10=ExcpHist Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Exception History screen for an exception. 11=Recip. Enter 11 and press Enter to display the Recipient Detail screen for the recipient to which the exception belongs. 12=ItemExcp Enter 12 and press Enter to return to the Item Exception Status screen (EDIM718) for the exception. This action is ONLY available when the Item Exception Status screen (EDIM718) was used to transfer to this screen. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F6=Next Displays the next exception for the recipient. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for the exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Recipient The recipient to which the exception belongs is displayed in this field. The recipient description is also displayed in this field. 5-120 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item CC=Y If the recipient was defined as a carbon copy in the Exception Profile, this indicator will be suffixed to the recipient description. Excp Status The current status for the exception is displayed in this field. This field also displays the date and time when the current status was entered for the exception. Open Exception is OPEN. Review Exception is in REVIEW. Trnsfr Exception has been TRANSFERRED. Closed Exception is CLOSED. Excp Tag The exception tag for the exception is displayed in this column. The exception tag provides a unique identification for each exception being monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. User Reference The User Reference is displayed in this field. This field will display the Batch ID assigned to the communications batch. System/Process The system and process that was processing the exception when it was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this field. Excp. Action The name of the exception action initiated for the exception is displayed in this field. Date-Time The date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the exception was captured is displayed in this field. Action Dt-Tm The date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the action was initiated for the exception is displayed in this field. Capture ID The Exception Capture definition used to capture this exception is displayed in this field. Description The description associated with the Capture ID is displayed in this field. Batch ID The Batch ID assigned to the communications batch is displayed in this field. Direction The direction of the communications batch is displayed in this field. Batch Number The Batch Number assigned to the communications batch by the Sterling Connect system is displayed in this field. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-121 EDIM649 – Exception Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item Status The status of the communications batch is displayed in this field. ADDED The batch was added to the Sterling Connect Data Queue by the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities. TRANSMITTED The batch was sent to its destination by the Sterling Connect system. COLLECTED The batch was received from its originator by the Sterling Connect system. EXTRACTED The batch was extracted from the Sterling Connect Data Queue by the Sterling Connect Offline Utilities. Failure Code The Failure Code associated with the communications error is displayed in this field. This field will be blank or zeros if no communications errors were encountered for the communications batch. To see the explanation for a failure code enter a 6 in the Action field and press Enter to display the Failure Code text on the Exception Message List screen. MBX/RMT ID The Mailbox/Remote ID associated with the communications batch is displayed in this field. 5-122 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM650 – Exception Message List Screen EDIM650 – Exception Message List Screen Purpose The Exception Message List screen provides a list of the system messages issued for an exception by the Tracking Point. User messages issued by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are also listed. Refer to “User Messages” in Chapter 2, “Optional Features,” for more information about User Messages. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Gentran system, you may select a message and invoke the Exception Data Display screen to display the selected message in the context of the exception data. EDIM650 __________ Type Action, press Enter. 6=Excp 7=Data 8=UserMsg System : Process : Desc. : Reference: A Message __ 626 __ __ 626 __ __ __ __ __ __ EXCEPTION MESSAGE LIST 06/01/2011 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist GENTRAN EBDI041 INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS INV01 23 QQ UNABLE TO TRANSLATE CODE - MOVED SPACE TO TARGET FIELD. TRANSLATION ID: UNITMEAS 25 QQ UNABLE TO TRANSLATE CODE - MOVED SPACE TO TARGET FIELD. TRANSLATION ID: UNITMEAS LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 6=Excp Enter 6 and press Enter to return to the Exception Detail screen for the exception. 7=Data Enter 7 and press Enter to display the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Exception Data Display screen will be displayed for the selected message. If the message is an exception level message (for example, mapping status), the Data Display starts at the top of the exception data. If the message is an event-level message (for example, segment not found), the Data Display positions you at the related data in the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the exception. 8=UserMsg Enter 8 and press Enter to display the User Message screen for the exception. You may associate a user message with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-123 EDIM650 – Exception Message List Screen For more information on User Messages, refer to "User Messages" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features". 9=UserProc Enter 9 and press Enter to display the User Procedure screen for the exception. You may associate a user procedure with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information on User Procedures, refer to "User Procedures" in Chapter 2 "Optional Features". 10=ExcpHist Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Exception History screen for the exception. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F6=Next Displays the next exception for the recipient. The Exception Message List screen for the next exception is displayed. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. THe jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. System The system which was processing the exception when it was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this field. Process The process which was processing the exception when it was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this field. Desc. The description from the Exception Capture definition responsible for capturing the exception is displayed in this field. Reference Displays the reference identification of the exception. For EDI exceptions the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For Application exceptions, the reference is defined in mapping. For communication exceptions, the reference is the Batch ID. 5-124 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM650 – Exception Message List Screen A (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for an exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Message For exceptions originating from the Sterling Gentran system, the messages issued by the tracking point (system/process) are displayed in this column. For exceptions originating from the Sterling Connect communications system, the explanation text associated with the system Failure Code is displayed in this column. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-125 EDIM651 – Exception Data Display Screen EDIM651 – Exception Data Display Screen Purpose The Exception Data Display Screen allows you to view the data for an exception. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint inserts all system messages and user messages into the data for the user. Messages inserted in the data are highlighted with an asterisk (*). You may scroll through the data or move from message to message using the F6=Next function key. Note: The Databank must have a Message Store-Level configuration for data to be available to the Exception Data Display screen. EDIM651 __________ EXCEPTION DATA DISPLAY Type Action, press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=UserMsg 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist System : Process : Desc. : Reference: GENTRAN EBDI001 INBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS 000000005 /000000007 06/01/2011 /000070001 Exception Data ST*810*000070001? BIG*90QQ05*INV01*901101*PONUMBER-001? * 33 3 BIG 1 90QQ05 DATE FIELD NOT NUMERIC. NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW? NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID? NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.? NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? REF*DP*00547? REF*BC*CONTRACT42? REF*BT*000001? F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 6=Excp Enter 6 for the current exception and press Enter to return to the Exception Detail screen. 7=MsgList Enter 7 and press Enter to display the Exception Message List for the current exception. The Exception Message List screen will begin with the message currently displayed at the top of the Data Display. If messages are not displayed on the current screen when this action is requested, the Exception Message List screen begins its display from the previous message, or the first message found in the data. 8=UserMsg Enter 8 and press Enter to display the User Message screen for an exception. You may associate a user message with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. For more information, refer to "User Messages" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features". 5-126 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM651 – Exception Data Display Screen 9=UserProc Enter 9 and press Enter to display the User Procedure screen for an exception. You may associate a user procedure with the exception from the Capture Definition that captured the exception. Refer to "User Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features," for details regarding the use of User Procedures. 10=ExcpHist Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Exception History screen for the current exception. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F6=Next Skip to the next block of data that has an associated message. This function key allows you to quickly scan through the messages issued for an exception within the context of the data for the exception. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for the exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The system which was processing the exception when it was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this field. Process The process which was processing the exception when it was captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is displayed in this field. Desc. The description from the Exception Capture definition which is responsible for capturing the exception is displayed in this field. Reference Displays the reference identification of the exception. For EDI exceptions, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For application exceptions, the reference is defined in mapping. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-127 EDIM651 – Exception Data Display Screen Exception Data All of the data for the specified exception, with all of the tracking point and user messages inserted into the data, is displayed. Messages inserted in the data are marked with an asterisk (for example, *msg). 5-128 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM652 – Exception History Screen EDIM652 – Exception History Screen Purpose The Exception History screen allows you to maintain and view a history of all activities performed against an exception since the exception was captured. Exception History is comprised of two screens. The first screen provides the exceptions current status and note for the exception. By scrolling forward (F8=Fwd), the second screen provides previous statuses for the exception. EDIM652 __________ Type Action, Press Enter. _ 6=Excp 7=Data 8=MsgList EXCEPTION HISTORY 06/01/2011 9=HistUpdt Reference . . : 000000003 /000000003 Current Status : CLOSED Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . : CLOSED Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Recipient . . : Note . . . . . : CUSTOMER HAS LOST THE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT BUT ACCEPTED THE PURCHASE ORDER. F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 6=Excp Enter 6 and press Enter to return to the Exception Detail screen for the current exception. 7=Data Enter 7 and press Enter to display the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Exception Data Display screen displays the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the exception. 8=MsgList Enter 8 in the Action field to display the Exception Message List screen for the current exception. 9=HistUpdt Enter 9 and press Enter to display the Exception History Update screen for the specified exception. The Exception History Update screen allows the user to update the status and enter a note for the exception. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-129 EDIM652 – Exception History Screen F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F6=Next Retrieve exception history information for the next exception of the current recipient. You may quickly scan through history information for all current exceptions for the recipient. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list, which is displayed on Exception History Screen – 2. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for the exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Reference Displays the reference identification of the exception For EDI exceptions, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For application exceptions, the reference is defined in mapping. For communications exceptions, the reference is the Batch ID. Current Status Displays the current status for the exception Date-Time Displays the date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the status was assigned to the exception Status Displays the current status for the exception of this history entry Open The entry is currently open. Review The entry is in review. Transfer The entry has been transferred. Closed The entry is closed. Update Initials Displays the initials and surname of the user who made this history entry Date-Time Displays the date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) this history entry was made 5-130 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM652 – Exception History Screen Recipient Displays the recipient ID and description of the recipient to whom the exception was transferred This field is displayed for a history entry that has a status of Transfer. Note Information that was entered for this history entry is displayed in this area. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-131 EDIM653 – Exception History Screen – 2 EDIM653 – Exception History Screen – 2 Purpose The Exception History screen – 2 allows you to view a history of all previous statuses performed against an exception since the exception was captured. The second screen of Exception History provides the exceptions previous statuses and notes. EDIM653 __________ Type Action, Press Enter. _ 6=Excp 7=Data 8=MsgList EXCEPTION HISTORY 06/01/2011 9=HistUpdt Status . . . . : REVIEW Date-Time: 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Recipient . . : Note . . . . . : CALLED JOHN SMITH TO REPORT OVERDUE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. Status . . . . : Update Initials: Recipient . . : Note . . . . . : LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next Date-Time: F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd - F12=Cancel Actions 6=Excp Enter 6 and press Enter to return to the Exception Detail screen for the current exception. 7=Data Enter 7 and press Enter to display the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Exception Data Display screen displays the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the exception. 8=MsgList Enter 8 and press Enter to display the Exception Message List for the current exception. 9=HistUpdt Enter 9 and press Enter to display the Exception History Update screen for the specified exception. The Exception History Update screen allows you to update the status and enter a note for the exception. Function Keys 5-132 F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F6=Next Returns to the Exception History Screen (EDIM652) to retrieve exception history information for the next exception, which belongs to the current recipient. A user IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM653 – Exception History Screen – 2 may quickly scan through history information, for all current exceptions, for the recipient. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. When the most recent history entry is encountered, the Exception History Screen (EDIM652) is redisplayed. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for the exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Status Displays the status for this history entry Open The entry was open. Review The entry was in review. Transfer The entry was transferred. Closed The entry was closed. Date-Time Displays the date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the status was assigned to the exception Update Initials Displays the initials and surname of the user who made this history entry Recipient Displays the recipient ID and description of the recipient to whom the exception was transferred This field is displayed for a history entry that has a status of Transfer. Note Information that was entered for this history entry is displayed in this area. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-133 EDIM654 – Exception History Update Screen EDIM654 – Exception History Update Screen Purpose The Exception History Update screen provides you with the ability to update the history for an exception. From this screen you may update the status for an exception to review, transfer, or close. You may also enter a note along with the history entry. EDIM654 __________ Type Action, Press Enter. _ 2=Update EXCEPTION HISTORY UPDATE 06/01/2011 Reference . . : 000000003 /000000003 Current Status : OPEN Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Status . . . . . R (C=Close, R=Review, T=Transfer) Update Initials: VPT TUTORIAL Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Recipient . . : __________ (F4=PROMPT) Description. . :_____________________________________________ Note . . . . . . CALLED_JOHN_SMITH_TO_REPORT_OVERDUE_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT.______ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ UPDATE COMPLETE F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel Actions 2=Update Enter 2 in the Action field and press Enter to update the current history information. The exception history is updated in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint using the current screen field values. When the action is complete, the screen is redisplayed with a message indicating that the entry has been updated. Function Keys 5-134 F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=PROMPT. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM654 – Exception History Update Screen Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request a required action for an exception. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available action for this screen. Reference Displays a reference which identifies the exception For EDI exceptions, the reference is the Envelope Reference ID. For application exceptions, the reference is the User Reference defined in mapping or the value the User Application tracking point has passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint as the User Reference. For communications exceptions, the reference is the Batch ID. Current Status Displays the current status for the exception Date-Time Displays the date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the status was assigned to the exception Status A 1-character field entered by the user to specify the status of the exception. C Close the current exception. R Review the current exception. T Transfer the current exception. Update Initials Displays the initials and surname of the user who is updating the history for the exception Date-Time Displays the date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the history entry was made for the exception Recipient A 1- to 10-character field entered by the user to specify the recipient to whom the user wants the exception transferred. Valid only if the status being entered is T (Transfer). From this field, you may use F4=Prompt to obtain a list of available recipients. Description The description for the selected recipient. Note Five (5) lines of free form text entered by the user to save information along with this history entry. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-135 EDIM662 – User Message Display Screen EDIM662 – User Message Display Screen Purpose The User Message Display screen allows you to retrieve an explanation for the exception. Create the User Message in Exception Management in the User Message Definition screen and then specify the User Message in the Capture Definition. For more details regarding User Messages, refer to the "EDIM628 – User Message Definition Screen" in this Chapter. Also, refer to Chapter 3, "Tutorial". EDIM662 __________ USER MESSAGE DISPLAY Type Action, Press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=Data 9=UserProc 10=ExcpHist 06/01/2011 Reference : 000000003 /000000003 Excp Tag : 0000000010 Description: CAPTURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS NOT ACCEPTED Message U-999999 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM PARTNER VENDOR-2 FOR PURCHASE ORDER IS OVERDUE. Explanation VENDOR-2 HAS BEEN SET UP AS A JUST-IN-TIME SUPPLIER. ANY DELAY IN THEIR DELIVERIES MUST BE RESPONDED TO IMMEDIATELY. SEE USER PROCEDURE @JIT. F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel Actions 6=Excp Enter 6 and press Enter to display the Exception Detail screen for the current exception. 7=MsgList Enter 7 and press Enter to display the Exception Message List for the current exception. 8=Data Enter 8 and press Enter to display the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Exception Data Display screen displays the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the exception. 9=UserProc Enter 9 and press Enter to display the User Procedure screen. A User Procedure may have been associated with this exception in the Exception Capture Definition which captured this exception. For more information on User Procedures, refer to "User Procedures" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features". 10=ExcpHist 5-136 Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Exception History screen for the current exception. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM662 – User Message Display Screen Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Reference Displays the reference identification of the exception. For EDI exceptions, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For application exceptions, the reference is defined in mapping. For communication exceptions, the reference is the Batch ID. Excp Tag Displays the exception tag assigned to the exception by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Description Displays the description of the exception capture definition which captured this exception Message Displays the user message Explanation Displays the explanation for the message IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-137 EDIM663 – User Procedure Display Screen EDIM663 – User Procedure Display Screen Purpose The User Procedure Display screen allows you to retrieve procedure instructions which can be used in the resolution of the exception. Create the User Procedure in Exception Management in the “User Procedure Definition” screen and then specify that User Procedure in the Capture Definition. For more details regarding the use of User Procedures refer to the "EDIM630 – User Procedure Definition Screen" in this Chapter. Also, refer to Chapter 3, "Tutorial". EDIM663 __________ USER PROCEDURE DISPLAY Type Action, Press Enter. __ 6=Excp 7=MsgList 8=Data 9=UserMsg 10=ExcpHist 06/01/2011 Procedure : @MODEL-JIT Description: PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING JUST-IN-TIME SUPPLIERS Procedure 1. INFORM PURCHASING. 2. CALL SUPPLIER. 3. IDENTIFY PO EXCEPTION. 4. UPDATE MRP FOR IMPACT. F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel Actions 6=Excp Enter 6 and press Enter to display the Exception Detail screen for the current exception. 7=MsgList Enter 7 and press Enter to display the Exception Message List for the current exception. 8=Data Enter 8 and press Enter to display the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Exception Data Display screen displays the data for the exception. For exceptions captured from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the exception. 9=UserMsg Enter 9 and press Enter to display the User Message Display screen. A User Message may have been associated with this exception in the Exception Capture Definition which captured this exception. For more information on User Messages, refer to "User Messages" in Chapter 2, "Optional Features". 5-138 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM663 – User Procedure Display Screen 10=ExcpHist Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Exception History screen for the current exception. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Procedure Displays the name of the procedure Description Displays the description of the procedure Procedure Displays the thirteen (13) line free form text procedure IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-139 Tracking Management Navigation Tracking Management Screens Tracking Management Navigation For Tracking Management installations, the Tracking Management screens are available with the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. This section contains detailed information on the Tracking Management Screens. Tracking Management provides you with Query functions to search for an item within the extended EDI environment. The purpose of each screen and how to use their fields are described in detail in this section. The navigation for Tracking Management is illustrated in Figure 5.5. Tracking Management EDIM700 Query Request EDIM702 Query Directory EDIM701 Item Status History EDIM710 Item Process Detail EDIM712 Item Message List EDIM715 Extended Search Condition EDIM703 Item Reference History EDIM711 Item Data Display EDIM716 Item Exception Status EDIM718 Figure 5.5 Tracking Management Navigation 5-140 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM700 – Tracking Management Menu EDIM700 – Tracking Management Menu Purpose The Tracking Management Menu provides you with direct access to the functions of Tracking Management. The typical users of the Tracking Management functions are the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Administrator, EDI Coordinator, or Business Users. EDIM700 9.5_______ TRACKING MANAGEMENT MENU 06/01/2011 Select one of the following. _ F1=Help 1. Query Directory 2. Query Request F3=Exit The Tracking Management Menu contains two options, which are listed below. The list of menu options, as well as a brief description of each option, follows. Menu Option Description 1. Query Directory Provides a list of Query IDs that have been defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 2. Query Request Used to define a Query ID and perform the search function. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-141 EDIM701 – Query Directory Screen EDIM701 – Query Directory Screen Purpose The Query Directory allows you to list all Query Requests that have been created. EDIM701 9.5.1_____ Type Action, press Enter. 1=Add 4=Delete 5=Select QUERY DIRECTORY 06/01/2011 Query Id @IBRTEQY__ Item Type DOCUMENT________ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Query ID @IBRTEQY @INVOICEQY @OBRTEQY @ORDERQY Item Type DOCUMENT U:INVOICE TRANSACTION U:ORDER LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd Description SAMPLE INBOUND REALTIME TRANSACTION QUERY SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE HISTORY QUERY SAMPLE OUTBOUND REALTIME DOCUMENT QUERY SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURCHASE ORDER HISTORY QUERY F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 on any line in the display list and press Enter to add a new Query ID. The Query Request screen displays with all entry fields blank. 4=Delete Enter 4 on the line of the entry to be deleted and press Enter to mark a Query ID for deletion. The Query ID is marked for deletion and will be deleted during the next run of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles Maintenance. A Query ID can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: A Query ID that has been marked for deletion displays the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION” and may not be updated from the Online Facility. 5=Select Enter 5 on the line of the Query ID to be selected and press Enter. The Query Request screen for the Query ID selected is displayed. Function Keys 5-142 F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM701 – Query Directory Screen F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. Query ID A 1- to 10-character field entered by the user. Control the entry displayed at the top of the list by entering the Query ID required. Partial names may be entered. Item Type A 1- to 16-character field entered by the user. Item Type is used to identify the classification of data that is being listed. ALL All item types will be eligible for selection during the search. Batch* • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • Sterling Connect Communications product • Sterling Connect Inbound Interface • Sterling Connect Outbound Interface *(Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) Document • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract Functional Group • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-143 EDIM701 – Query Directory Screen U:[type] Any 1- to 16-character value the user determines for classifying different data types that they wish to monitor using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. These user item types are defined in the User Tracking Points that have been created in Extended System Management. A (Action) A 1-character field entered by the user to request an action for the Query ID. Refer to Actions above for details regarding available actions for this screen. Query ID The Query ID name is displayed in this column. Item Type The Item Type is displayed in this column. Description A description of the Query ID is displayed in this column. Note: A query ID that has been marked for deletion displays the description “ENTRY HAS BEEN MARKED FOR DELETION”. 5-144 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM702 – Query Request Screen EDIM702 – Query Request Screen Purpose The Query Request allows you to search their entire extended EDI environment for items using basic search fields. A list of the items which satisfy the search fields is displayed. If the Search Fields provided on the Query Request screen do not meet your requirements, then you may select the Extended Search Condition screen to further qualify your query. This extended search condition is used with the Query Request. EDIM702 9.5.2_____ Type Action, press Enter _ 1=Add 2=Update 4=Delete 13=ItemRefs QUERY REQUEST 6=Search 06/01/2011 7=ExtCond 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl Query ID Description @INVOICEQY (F4=Prompt) Extended Condition used: SAMPLE_INBOUND_INVOICE_HISTORY_QUERY_________ Search Fields Item Type Reference Partner Date From Search limit 010000 Find limit U:INVOICE_______ (F4=Prompt) _____________________________________________ ___________________________________ 06/01/2011 To 06/01/2011 A Item Type __ U:INVOICE __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help Reference INV01 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F7=Bkwd NO 000100 Process VPIBAPPL F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 1=Add Enter 1 and press Enter to add a query. If an Extended Condition has been entered for the query it will be saved with the query. A confirmation message will be issued before this action is performed. 2=Update Enter 2 and press Enter to update a Query ID. The Query ID is updated using the current Search Fields and the Extended Search Condition, if used. The Query ID must already exist for this action to be valid. If this is a new Query ID, you should use the Add action. A confirmation message is issued for this action. 4=Delete Enter 4 and press Enter to mark a Query ID for deletion. The Query ID is marked for deletion, and will be deleted during the next run of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles Maintenance. A Query ID can be restored from the archive file after maintenance has deleted it from the file. For more information on Profiles Maintenance, refer to “File Maintenance Procedures” in Chapter 2, “Operational Procedures”. Note: A Query ID that has been marked for deletion, may not be updated from the Online Facility. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-145 EDIM702 – Query Request Screen 6=Search Enter 6 and press Enter to request that Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint start searching for items matching the search fields you have entered. The Search function tries to find all items in your entire extended EDI environment that satisfy the search field values. If an extended search condition has been entered, the items must also match the extended condition. Enter 6 and press Enter to further reduce the current list by changing the search fields and Extended Condition. 7=ExtCond Enter 7 and press Enter to display the Extended Search Condition screen. From this screen, you may add to your search criteria specified on the Query Request screen. You should use this screen when the Query Request screen search fields are not sufficient for specifying your query condition. The Extended Search Condition is saved, updated, and deleted with the Query Request it is associated with. The following actions are only valid for the Action column beside the item list. 8=ItemHist Enter 8 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 9=ItemDtl Enter 9 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Process Detail screen for the item. 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item, based on the processes that processed the item. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=Prompt. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. If changes have been made then a confirmation message is issued. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. 5-146 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM702 – Query Request Screen (Action) A 1-character field where you may enter actions that apply to the entire Query Request. Actions that apply to individual items in the list must be entered beside the item in the list's A(action) column. The actions that may be entered in the screen-level Action field are: 1 2 4 6 7 = = = = = Add Update Delete Search ExtCond Query ID A 1- to 10-character field entered by the user. Use of this field is optional. If you simply wish to perform a one-time search for an item, you do not need to use this field. The F4=Prompt function may be used when the cursor is on this field. With the cursor on the Query ID field, press F4=Prompt to view the available Queries on the selection list. You can retrieve a Query ID in one of these ways: • When using the F4=Prompt function, type the number of the Query you want to view, and press Enter. • Type the Query ID in this field, and press Enter. Extended Condition used: This is an informational field only, used to indicate whether or not the search criteria includes an extended search condition. Yes An Extended Search Condition has been entered for this Query. Type a 7 in the Action field to view the extended search condition. No An Extended Search Condition has not been entered for this Query. If additional search conditions are required, type a 7 in the Action field to add an extended search condition. Description A 1- to 45-character field entered by the user to describe the Query ID. Search Limit Specifies the maximum number of items the search action will evaluate for items matching the search criteria. When this screen is displayed initially, the value defined in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint configuration record is displayed. When the number of items that match the search criteria exceeds the specified value, the message "SEARCH LIMIT ENCOUNTERED" is displayed. You can increase the value and enter an action 6 to perform the search again. Note that a large value in this field slows down response time. Find Limit Limits the number of items that satisfy the search criteria that will be displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-147 EDIM702 – Query Request Screen When this screen is displayed initially, the value defined in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint configuration record is displayed. When the number of items that match the search criteria exceeds the specified value, the message "FIND LIMIT ENCOUNTERED" is displayed. You can increase the value and enter an action 6 to perform the search again. Note that a large value in this field slows down response time. Search Fields Enter search fields as the criteria you wish use to find items in the extended EDI environment. This means that for an item to be listed, the item must satisfy all of the search fields specified. If an Extended Search Condition has been entered, the item must also match the extended condition. Item Type A 1- to 16-character field that you must enter. Item Type is used to identify the classification of data for which you are searching. The F4=Prompt function may be used to display a list of valid item types. The item type is attached to the item by the Tracking Point (process) that passed the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Item types are established in the Tracking Point Definitions. For more information on “EDIM603 – Sterling Tracking Point Definition Screen” and “EDIM611 – User Tracking Point Definition Screen” descriptions, refer to this Chapter. Valid item types are: 5-148 ALL All item types will be eligible for selection during the search. Batch* • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • Sterling Connect Communications product • Sterling Connect Inbound Interface • Sterling Connect Outbound Interface *(Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) Document • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract Functional Group • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM702 – Query Request Screen U:[type] Any 1- to 16-character value you determine for classifying different data types you wish to monitor using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. These user item types are defined in the User Tracking Points created in Extended System Management. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: Reference A 1- to 45-character field used to identify an item based on the item type. Examples: In mapping, the item type is Document and a document is identified by the User Reference defined by the mapping process. For Sterling Connect Items in communications, the item type is Batch and a batch is identified by the assigned Batch ID. A user application refers to its items using the assigned User Item Type and the 1- to 45character user reference assigned by the user application. Partner A 1- to 35-character ID used to find items that have the same Trading Profile Partner ID. For Sterling Gentran Items this ID was defined in Sterling Gentran Partner maintenance and is attached to the item during translation. Based on the Trading Profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran, this field may be a 1- to 15- character field (Relationship mode) or a 1- to 35-character field (Partner Qualifier mode). For Sterling Connect Items, the trading partner is identified by the Remote ID/Mailbox ID. The Remote ID was defined in the Sterling Gentran:Plus Communications Profile Maintenance subsystem. (Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) For User Items, this value was passed by the user application to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in the Partner Field of the User Gateway. Date An 8-character field to restrict the items that are found to be within a specific date range. From Specifies the start of the date range in the format MM/DD/YYYY. To Specifies the end of the date range in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Display List All items that match the search criteria, specified in both the search fields and the extended search condition, are displayed in this list. From this list a number of actions may be performed against the individual items. A (Action) A 1- to 2-character field where you may enter actions that apply to individual items. You must enter actions that apply to the entire Query in the screen level action field in the top left corner of the screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-149 EDIM702 – Query Request Screen The actions that may be entered in the item-level Action field are: 8 9 13 = = = ItemHist ItemDtl ItemRef Item Type A 1- to 16-character field that identifies the classification of data that was found. The item type is attached to the item by the Tracking Point (process) that passed the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Valid item types are: Batch* • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • Sterling Connect Communications Product • Sterling Connect Inbound Interface • Sterling Connect Outbound Interface *(Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) Document • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract Functional Group • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor U:[type] Any 1- to 16-character value you determine for classifying different data types you wish to monitor using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. These user item types are defined in the User Tracking Points that have been created in Extended System Management. Reference A 1- to 45-character field displayed to identify the item. The Reference is used to identify an item based on the item type or how a process uniquely identifies the item. Examples: In mapping, the item type is a Document and a document is identified by the User Reference that is defined by the map process. 5-150 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM702 – Query Request Screen For Sterling Connect Items in communications, the item type is Batch and a batch is identified by the assigned Batch ID. A user application would refer to items using the assigned User Item Type and the 1- to 45-character user reference assigned by the user application. Process A 1- to 8-character field name of the process which passed the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-151 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Purpose The Extended Search Condition may be used to further qualify a query request. The Extended Search Condition is used when the Search Fields provided on the Query Request screen are insufficient for searching the items. For example, Partner=ABC is specified in the Search Fields on the Query Request and Application=PURCHASING is specified in the extended condition. Since the Application field cannot be specified on the Query Request screen, Search will evaluate this condition as follows: PARTNER=ABC AND APPLICATION=PURCHASING EDIM703 __________ Type Action, press Enter __ 6=Search 14=Query Query ID : @INVOICEQY EXTENDED SEARCH CONDITION SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE HISTORY QUERY Query Request Search Fields Item Type: U:INVOICE Reference: Partner : Date From: 06/01/2011 To 06/01/2011 Extended Condition (F4=Prompt) Field Op APPLICATION DATA ID______ EQ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ _________________________ __ F1=Help F3=Exit 06/01/2011 F4=Prompt Value Connector INVFILE____________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ ___ ___________________________________ F12=Cancel Actions 6=Search Enter 6 in the Action field and press Enter to initiate a search using the extended search condition and all search fields that were entered on the Query Request screen. The Query Request screen is displayed, listing all of the items that were found. The items found match the criteria from both the search fields on the Query Request screen and the Extended Search Conditions on this screen. The Extended Search Conditions may be saved on the Query Request screen. 14=Query Enter 14 in the Action field and press Enter to return to the Query Request screen without initiating a search. The Query Request screen is redisplayed with the original search fields and the original list of items found prior to entering the Extended Search Condition screen. You must initiate a search on the Query Request screen to find items which match both the search fields on the Query Request screen and the Extended Search Conditions entered on this screen. The Extended Search Conditions may be saved on the Query Request screen. 5-152 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F4=Prompt Displays a selection list of values available for the field on which the cursor is currently located. The prompt function is only available on fields marked with F4=Prompt. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Update is not performed on the current object. If changes were made, a confirmation message is issued. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user where actions are provided with the Extended Search Condition function. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Query ID Displays the Query ID for which the extended search condition is used. This field will be blank if the Query ID was not entered or saved from the Query Request screen. A blank Query ID implies that you only want to request this query once. If you wish to use this query again, type the Query ID on the Query Request screen to add this Query to the Profiles file. (description) Displays the description for the Query entered on the Query Request screen. Query Request Search Fields Item Type Displays the Item Type entered on the Query Request screen. Reference Displays the Reference entered on the Query Request screen. Partner Displays the Partner entered on the Query Request screen. For Sterling Connect item types, the trading partner is identified by their Remote ID/Mailbox ID. Date From To Displays the start of the date range that was specified on the Query Request screen in the format: MM/DD/YYYY Displays the end of the date range that was specified on the Query Request screen in the format: MM/DD/YYYY IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-153 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Extended Condition The Extended Condition allows you to extend your Query Request search fields when these search fields do not sufficiently identify the items for which you are searching. The extended condition can be a 1- to 7-expression condition using full boolean logic and connectors of AND or OR. The F4=Prompt function can be used for the search condition. Refer to the "Extended Search Condition Reference Chart" for a complete list of all the fields and values that may be used. The information for each of the following fields is entered by the user: Field A 1- to 25-character field to specify the field to be used in the expression. The valid fields which can be entered vary by the Item Type specified. You may use function key F4=Prompt when the cursor is on this field to display a selection list of valid selection criteria for the Item Type specified. Op A 2-character field used to specify the operator for the expression. Valid operators vary by field, as described in the Extended Search Condition Reference Chart. EQ Equal. NE Not Equal. GT Greater Than. LT Less Than. LE Less Than or Equal To. GE Greater Than or Equal To. Value A 1- to 35-character field that specifies the value which should be used to test against the data value for the field. For valid values refer to the "Extended Search Condition Reference Chart". Connector A 2- to 3-character field used to Sterling Connect multiple expressions for completing the desired selection criteria. The order of precedence is ANDs before ORs (that is, ANDs are evaluated, then ORs are evaluated, then the condition is tested for truth). For example, A and B or C and D would be evaluated as: (A and B) or (C and D). 5-154 AND Both expressions must be true. OR Either one of the expressions must be true. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Extended Search Condition Reference Chart Purpose The Extended Search Condition Reference Chart provides you with a quick reference to the fields that may be used in an extended condition. The chart also provide the valid values, item types, and item direction that can be used with the fields. Structure Field This column is used to specify the field to be used in the expression. The valid fields which can be entered vary by the Item Type specified. Ops This column is used to specify valid operators that can be used with the field in an expression. Item Type This column specifies the item types to which the query field may apply. In cases where the field is valid for the item in only one direction, the direction is shown. This is shown as (in) for inbound only and (out) for outbound only. Item Type is based on the tracking points that are able to process the item(s) being searched for. The Item Type is defined in the Tracking Point Definition. Value This column specifies the value which should be used to compare against the data value for the field. Some values are valid in one direction only, as indicated in the value description. This is shown as (in) for inbound only and (out) for outbound only. When direction dependent queries are used in a search, items will only be searched if they match the direction associated with the value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-155 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Using the Extended Search Condition Reference Chart 1. Locate the desired field on the Extended Search Condition Reference Chart. 2. Confirm item type specified is valid for the field. 3. Choose from the valid values for the field. 4. Ensure that a valid operator value is being used. Item Type Legend 5-156 any Any All item types will be eligible during the search. B Batch • Sterling Connect Communications data (Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) D Document • • Mappers data Inbound Application Extract data F Functional Group • • • Editors data Outbound EDI Extract data Acknowledgment Reconciliation data I Interchange • • • • Editors data Outbound EDI Extract data Acknowledgment Reconciliation data Network Reconciliation data T Transaction • • • Editors data Outbound EDI Extract data Acknowledgment Reconciliation data U U:[type] 1- to 16-character value. The first 2 characters must be entered as "U:". User Item Types are user defined on User Tracking Points they have defined for systems other than Sterling Gentran and Sterling Connect. These tracking points are defined for user applications that are accessing Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint user gateways. You may use the F4=Prompt function in the Item Type field on the Query Request to get a complete list of valid Item Types. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Extended Search Condition Reference Chart Field Item Type Ops Value The following conditions apply to Sterling Gentran and user item types Acknowledg ment Status I, F, T, D(in) EQ,NE The current acknowledgment status for the item. • A – Accepted • E – Accepted with Errors • I – Indeterminate (out) • O – Overdue (out) • P – Partial • R – Rejected • W – Waiting for Acknowledgment Application Data ID D, T(out), U EQ, NE 1- to 10-character value. Sterling Gentran Item Types Application Data ID used by Sterling Gentran for mapping the document. User Item Types The value that is passed through the gateway by the user application for identifying the user application. Compliance Status T(in) any The current compliance status for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered. • 04 – One or more errors were encountered. • 08 – One or more missing or misplaced segments were encountered. • 12 – The transaction set was incomplete. Databank System Ind D, I, F, T EQ, NE The Databank System which processed the item. • G – Sterling Gentran • R – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Deferred Enveloping I, F, T EQ, NE 1-character code. • Y – Yes, is a deferred enveloping item. • N – No, is not a deferred enveloping item Sterling Gentran Item Types This item is a deferred enveloping item on the databank. Direction any EQ, NE A 1-character field you enter to specify that the query should only search for items travelling in a certain direction. Direction should be thought of as being relative to traffic that moves through the Extended EDI System. That is, items coming to you from a partner are inbound and items you send to a partner are outbound. • I Only search for inbound items. • O Only search for outbound items. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-157 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value Division any EQ, NE 1- to 3-character value for identifying the division the item belongs to. Note: Only items belonging to a division to which your Sterling Gentran user ID has access are returned by the search function. Sterling Gentran Item Types The division is resolved from the partner profile used to process the item. User Item Types The value passed through the gateway by the user application for identifying the division to which the item belongs. Duplicate Indicator D, I, F, T, U EQ, NE 1-character code. • Y – Yes is a duplicate. • N – No is not a duplicate. Sterling Gentran Item Types This item is a duplicate of another item on the Databank. User Item Types The value passed through the gateway by the user application for identifying that the item is a duplicate. Envelope Status I, F, T, D(in) any The status from Envelope Validation for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered in the document. • 04 – One or more errors (other than authorization and sequence errors) were encountered in processing the Transmission Envelope, or one or more errors (other than unknown user or unknown partner) were encountered in processing the Functional Group Envelope. • 08 – Either no Partner ID/Qualifier or User/Partner was found corresponding to the sender/receiver codes contained in the Functional Group or the segment count contained in the Transaction Set Trailer was found to be in error. Functional Group ID F, T EQ, NE The functional group ID from the EDI data. 1- to 6-character value Mapping Status D any The current mapping status for the item. • 00 – No errors were encountered during the mapping process. • 04 – One or more non-fatal mapping errors were detected. • 12 – An outbound document could not be translated. 5-158 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value Network I(out), U EQ, NE 1- to 15-character value. Sterling Gentran Item Types The network ID from the trading profile used to process this item. User Item Types The value passed through the gateway by the user application for identifying the network to which the item belongs. Network Status I(out) EQ, NE The current network status for the item. Must be running Network Reconciliation(EDID850) for this status to be available. • E – Error on receive, sorting, or pickup. • N – Network Tracking not active. • P – Picked up. • R – Received. • S – Sorted. • U – Manual network complete. • W – Waiting. Partner D, I, F, T, U EQ, NE Partner ID from the Trading Profile that processed this item. • 1- to 15-character value (If trading profile mode is Relationship or User/Partner.) • 1- to 35-character value (If trading profile mode is Partner-Qualifier.) Note: This field may not be specified if already specified on the Query Request screen. Partner Qualifier D, I, F, T, U EQ, NE Partner Qualifier for the Partner (Only valid if trading profile mode is Partner-Qualifier.) 1- to 4-character value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-159 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value Process any EQ, NE The process is defined as part of all tracking points defined in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. 1- to 8-character value. Sterling Gentran processes • EBDI001 – Inbound Editor • EBDI002 – Outbound Editor • EBDI041 – Inbound Mapping • EBDI042 – Outbound Mapping • EDID205 – Outbound EDI Databank Extract • EDID255 – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound EDI Databank Extract • EDID405 – Inbound Application Databank Extract • EDID455 – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Application Databank Extract • EDID510 – Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor • EDID515 – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Reconciliation/Monitor • EDID850 – Network Reconciliation • EDIR001 – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Editor • EDIR002 – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Editor • EDIR041 – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Inbound Mapper • EDIR042 – Sterling Gentran:Realtime Outbound Mapper User processes Any processes defined as User Tracking Points in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Extended System Management. Process Status 1 U any A 1- to 10-character field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for an item by a User tracking Point. The Process Status 1 field can be any value you wish to pass to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item. The name or label used for the Process Status 1 field is user assigned when defining the User Tracking Point in Extended System Management. For each process, two other Process Statuses may be passed for each item. The labels for these process statuses are defined in the same manner. Process Status 2 U any A 1- to 10-character field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for an item by a User tracking Point. The Process Status 2 field can be any value you wish to pass to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item. The name or label used for the Process Status 2 field is user assigned when defining the User Tracking Point in Extended System Management. For each process, two other Process Statuses may be passed for each item. The labels for these process statuses are defined in the same manner. 5-160 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value Process Status 3 U any A 1- to 10-character field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for an item by a User tracking Point. The Process Status 3 field can be any value you wish to pass to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item. The name or label used for the Process Status 3 field is user assigned when defining the User Tracking Point in Extended System Management. For each process, two other Process Statuses may be passed for each item. The labels for these process statuses are defined in the same manner. Processed Date D, I, F, T, U any An 10-character value must be entered in the format MM/ DD/YYYY. The date the item was processed by a Tracking Point. Note: This field may not be specified if already specified on the Query Request screen. Processed Time D, I, F, T, U any A 5-character value must be entered in the format HH:MM. The time the item was processed by a Tracking Point. Reference any any Displays the 1- to 45-character reference identification for an item based on the item type. For EDI items, the reference is the Envelope Reference ID. For Application items, the reference is defined in the mapping process. For User Application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. Note: This field may not be specified if already specified on the Query Request screen. Sequence Status D(in), I, F, T any The status from Sequence Checking for the item. • 00 – No errors. • 04 – Sequence errors detected. Set D, F, I, T, U EQ, NE Set is a 1- to 6-character field you enter to request that a specific set of data for an item type be searched for. Examples: • My item type is Transaction but I only want to search for 850s (purchase orders). • When my purchasing application passes item information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for purchase orders it passed, the value of "10" in the "Set" field in the Gateway because this is how my purchasing users refer to purchase orders. They may now request "Set=10" when searching for all purchase orders for the application. • An example of a 6-character set is an EDIFACT Remittance Advice message – REMADV. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-161 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value System any EQ, NE 1- to 10-character value. The system is defined as part of all tracking points defined in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Valid systems are Sterling Gentran and any user system defined as a User Tracking Point. System Message D, I, F, T any The System Message ID generated for the item by the tracking point. 6-digit number (leading zeroes required) Test/ Production D, I, F, T, U EQ, NE The test/production indicator for the item. • P – Production. • T – Test. Trace ID any any A 10-character field that is a unique value for any and all items being tracked by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID is assigned to the item by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint when the items status is first passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID is carried forward to each process that the item travels through. The Trace ID is used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to track the complete history of an item. Format of the Trace ID is @@######## where @@ are the letters and ######## is an 8 digit number. User Field 1 U any 1- to 15-character field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for an item by a User tracking Point. The User Field 1 can be any value the user wishes to pass to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item. The name or label used for the User Field 1 field is user assigned when defining the User Tracking Point in Extended System Management. For each process, two other User Fields may be passed for each item. Define the labels for these User Fields in the same manner. User Field 2 U any A 1- to 15-character field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for an item by a User tracking Point. The User Field 2 can be any value you wish to pass to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item. The name or label used for the User Field 2 field is user assigned when defining the User Tracking Point in Extended System Management. For each process, two other User Fields may be passed for each item. Define the labels for these User Fields in the same manner. 5-162 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value User Field 3 U any A 1- to 15-character field passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for an item by a User tracking Point. The User Field 3 can be any value you wish to pass to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item. The name or label used for the User Field 3 field is user assigned when defining the User Tracking Point in Extended System Management. For each process, two other User Fields may be passed for each item. Define the labels for these User Fields in the same manner. User D, I, F, T U EQ, NE A 1- to 15-character value. Sterling Gentran Item Types The User ID assigned to the item from the trading profile used to process the item. (Only valid if Trading Profile mode is Relationship or User/Partner) User Item Types The value passed through the gateway by the user application for identifying the user to which the item belongs. User Reference T any 1 – 45 character user reference identification for the transaction item type. This field is only valid for transaction item types. User Error Number D any The User Error Number generated for the item by the Tracking Point. 6-digit number (leading zeros required) The following extended conditions apply to Sterling Gentran processes (Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only) CICS Task Number D, I, F, T any The CICS Task Number which processed the item. 7-digit value CICS Transaction ID D, I, F, T EQ, NE The CICS Transaction ID which processed the item. 4-character value Option D, I, F, T any The Option number which processed the item. 3-digit value Path ID D, I, F, T any The Path ID which processed the item. 3-digit value Queue File Number D, I, F, T any The Queue File Number which contained the output data for the item. 3-digit value The following extended conditions apply to Sterling Connect item types (Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-163 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value Added Flag B EQ,NE A 1-character indicator. Y – Yes, batch has been added offline. Indicates whether the batch has been added offline. Batch ID B any A 1- to 24-character identifier assigned to the communications batch. Note: This field may not be specified if already specified on the Query Request screen. Batch Number B any A 7-digit value assigned by Sterling Connect to the communications batch. Collected Flag B EQ,NE A 1-character indicator. Y – Yes, batch has been collected online. Indicates whether the batch has been collected online. Communication Protocol B EQ,NE A 1-character indicator. • B – BSC originated batch. • S – SNA originated batch. • H – Host originated batch. Indicates whether the batch originated from a BSC, SNA, or Host source. Direction B EQ,NE A 1-character field you enter to specify that the query should only search for items travelling in a certain direction. Direction should be thought of as being relative to traffic that moves through the Extended EDI System. That is, items coming to you from a partner are inbound and items you send to a partner are outbound. • I – Only search for inbound items. • O – Only search for outbound items. Extracted Flag B EQ,NE A 1-character indicator. Y – Yes, batch has been extracted. Indicates whether the batch has been extracted offline. Failure Code B any A 3-digit failure code associated with the batch. Incomplete Flag B EQ,NE A 1-character indicator. • Y – Yes, batch is incomplete. • N – No, batch is complete. Indicates whether the batch has been completely received. Process B EQ,NE A 1- to 8-character value. The process is defined as part of all tracking points that are defined in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. • STOUTL – Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • MAILBOX – Sterling Connect Communications product • EDIR314 – Sterling Connect Outbound Interface • EDIR316 – Sterling Connect Inbound Interface 5-164 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value Processed Date B any An 10-character value must be entered in the format MM/ DD/YYYY. The date the item was processed by a Tracking Point. Note: This field may not be specified if already specified on the Query Request screen. Processed Time B any A 5-character value must be entered in the format HH:MM. The time the item was processed by a Tracking Point. Record Count B any A 9-digit value for the number of records in the batch. Remote ID B any A 1- to 8-character remote ID. Note: This field may not be specified if already specified on the Query Request screen. Requestable Flag B EQ,NE A 1-character indicator. • Y – Yes, batch is available for requests. • N – No, batch is not available for requests. Indicates whether the batch is available for system requests. System B EQ,NE A 1- to 10-character value. The system is defined as part of all tracking points that are defined in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The valid system is Sterling Connect for communications batch items. Trace ID B any A 10-character field that is a unique value for any and all items being tracked by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID is assigned to the item by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint when the items status is first passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID is carried forward to each process that the item travels through. The Trace ID is used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to track the complete history for an item. Format of the Trace ID is @@######## where @@ are the letters and ######## is an 8-digit number. Transmitted Flag B EQ,NE A 1-character indicator. Y – Yes, batch has been transmitted. Indicates whether the batch has been transmitted. The following extended conditions apply to Sterling Connect processes (Sterling Gentran:Realtime users only) CICS Task Number B any The CICS Task Number which processed the item. 7-digit value CICS Transaction ID B EQ, NE The CICS Transaction ID which processed the item. 4-character value Option B any The Option number which processed the item. 3-digit value IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-165 EDIM703 – Extended Search Condition Screen Field Item Type Ops Value Path ID B any The Path ID which processed the item. 3-digit value Queue File Number B any The Queue File Number which contained the output data for the item. 3-digit value 5-166 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM710 – Item Status History Screen EDIM710 – Item Status History Screen Purpose The Item Status History screen lists all of the processes by which an item has been processed, as long as the process is defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint as a tracking point and the tracking option is enabled for the tracking point. The status, date, and time of the process are listed with the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. If any exceptions are detected by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management, they are also listed. EDIM710 __________ ITEM STATUS HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 15=Excps Reference: INBOUND BATCH 4125 Process VPIBCOMM A Item Process Description __ U VPIBCOMM SAMPLE INBOUND COMMUNICATION __ I EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ F EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ T EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ D EBDI041 INBOUND MAPPER __ U VPIBAPPL SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE APPLI __ __ __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Status RECEIVED 04 04 OK Date 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 Time 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 Excp 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 F12=Cancel Actions 9=ItemDtl Enter 9 on the line of the item to be selected, and press Enter to display the Item Process Detail screen for the item. 10=MsgList Enter 10 on the line of the item to be selected, and press Enter to display the Item Message List screen. This screen lists all messages that were issued for the item. For Sterling Gentran processes, all messages issued by the process are listed. For Sterling Connect processes, the explanation text associated with a communications failure code is displayed. For User processes, only the messages that were passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item by the user application are displayed. 11=DataDisp Enter 11 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the data for the item. For items originating from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Item Data Display screen displays the data for the item. All messages for the item are inserted into the data in the appropriate places. To use this action, the Sterling Gentran Databank Message Store must be implemented. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-167 EDIM710 – Item Status History Screen For items originating from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the item. 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item, based on the processes that handled the item. 15=Excps Enter 15 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Exception Status screen. This screen lists all recipients that captured the item in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. Reference A 1- to 45-character field reference identification for the item, based on the item type. For EDI items, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For application items, the reference is defined in the mapping process. For communication items, the reference is the assigned Batch ID. For user application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. Process A 1- to 8-character field entered by the user to control which process is positioned at the top of the list. A (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for an item. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. 5-168 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM710 – Item Status History Screen Item A 1-character field which displays the Item type of the item. B Batch* • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • Sterling Connect Communications product • Sterling Connect Inbound Interface • Sterling Connect Outbound Interface *(Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) D Document • • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract F Functional Group • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor I Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation T Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor U U:[type] 1- to 16-character value. User item types have been defined by the user on the User Tacking Point Definition screen. Process A 1- to 8-character field that displays the process ID that processed the item at the date and time shown. Description A 1- to 28-character field that displays the description of the process, as defined in the Tracking Point Definition. Status A 1- to 10-character field that displays the status that was issued for the item by the process. Mapping Status • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract Compliance Status Inbound Editor (Transactions only) IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-169 EDIM710 – Item Status History Screen Acknowledgement Status • • Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Network Status Network Reconciliation Communications Status* • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • Sterling Connect Communications product • Sterling Connect Inbound Interface • Sterling Connect Outbound Interface *(Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) Process Status 1 User Applications Date An 8-character field that displays the date the item was processed in the format MM/DD/ YYYY. Time A 5-character field that displays the time the item was processed in the format HH:MM. Excp Displays the number of exceptions that are currently being tracked by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management for the item. 5-170 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM711 – Item Reference History Screen EDIM711 – Item Reference History Screen Purpose The Item Reference History screen lists all of the processes that an item has been processed by, as long as the process is defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint as a tracking point, and the tracking option is enabled for the tracking point. The primary purpose of this screen is to list all the different references that are used for an item as it travels from process to process. Processes are listed in chronological order. EDIM711 __________ ITEM REFERENCE HISTORY Type Action, press Enter 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl 10=MsgList 11=DataDisp Reference: Process 15=Excps INBOUND BATCH 4125 VPIBCOMM A Item Process Description __ U VPIBCOMM SAMPLE INBOUND COMMU __ T EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ F EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ I EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR __ D EBDI041 INBOUND MAPPER __ U VPIBAPPL SAMPLE INBOUND USER __ __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help 06/01/2011 F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd Reference INBOUND BATCH 4125 000000001 /000000001 000000001 /000000001 000000001 INV01 INV01 /000000001 F12=Cancel Actions 8=ItemHist Enter 8 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 9=ItemDtl Enter 9 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Process Detail screen for the item. 10=MsgList Enter 10 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Message List screen. This screen lists all messages that were issued for the item. For Sterling Gentran processes, all messages issued by the process are listed. For Sterling Connect processes, the explanation text associated with a communications failure code is displayed For User processes, only the messages that were passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item by the user application are displayed. 11=DataDisp Enter 11 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the data for the item. For items originating from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Item Data Display screen will display the data for the item. All messages for the item will be IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-171 EDIM711 – Item Reference History Screen inserted into the data in the appropriate places. To use this action, the Sterling Gentran Databank Message Store must be implemented. For items originating from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) will display the data for the item. 15=Excps Enter 15 on the line of the item to be selected and press Enter to display the Item Exception Status screen. This screen lists all recipients that captured the item in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. Reference A 1- to 45-character field that displays reference identification for the item, based on the item type. For EDI items, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For application items, the reference is defined in the mapping process. For communication items, the reference is the assigned Batch ID. For user application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. Process A 1- to 8-character field entered by the user to display the process ID to control which process is positioned at the top of the list. A (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for an item. Refer to Actions above for detailed information. 5-172 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM711 – Item Reference History Screen Item A 1-character field where the Item type of the item is displayed. B Batch* • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • Sterling Connect Communications product • Sterling Connect Inbound Interface • Sterling Connect Outbound Interface *(Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) D Document • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract F Functional Group • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor I Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation T Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor U U:[type] 1- to 16-character value. The user item types have been defined by the user on the User Tracking Point Definitions. Process A 1- to 8-character field which displays the process ID that processed the item at the date and time shown. Description A 1- to 20-character field which displays the description of the process as defined in the Tracking Point definition. Reference A 1- to 40-character field which displays the reference for the item used by the process. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-173 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Purpose The Item Process Detail – Sterling Gentran Item screen displays detailed item information for a single Sterling Gentran tracking point that processed the item. The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Item Process Detail screen in Partner/ Qualifier mode. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 14=Query 15=Excps Item Identification Item Type . . : TRANSACTION Reference . . : 000000005 /000000007 /000070001 Trace ID . . : IE00000001 To/From: IE00000002 User Reference: INV01 System/Process: GENTRAN /EBDI001 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 – 12:00 Direction/Set : INBOUND /810 Application . : Network . . . : Partner . . . : VENDOR-1 Qual . . . . : Databank . . : GENTRAN Process Statuses Ack Status . . : ERROR Comp Status. . : 04 Env Status . . : 00 F1=Help 5-174 F3=Exit Recip/Action: @EDITORS / Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: OPEN Mapping Status : Network Status : Seq Status . . : 00 F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Item Process Detail screen in Relationship mode. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 14=Query 15=Excps Item Identification Item Type . . : TRANSACTION Reference . . : 000000005 /000000007 /000070001 Trace ID . . : IE00000001 To/From: IE00000002 User Reference: INV01 System/Process: GENTRAN /EBDI001 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Direction/Set : INBOUND /810 Application . : Network . . . : User . . . . : VENDOR-1 Partner . . . : Databank . . : GENTRAN Process Statuses Ack Status . . : ERROR Comp Status. . : 04 Env Status . . : 00 F1=Help F3=Exit Recip/Action: @EDITORS Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: OPEN / Mapping Status : Network Status : Seq Status . . : 00 F12=Cancel The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Item Process Detail screen in Partner/Qualifier mode. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 14=Query 15=Excps Item Identification Item Type . . : TRANSACTION Reference . . : 000000006 /000000008 /000080001 Trace ID . . : EI00000001 To/From: EI00000002 User Reference: INV01 System/Process: GENTRAN /EDIR001 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 – 12:00 Direction/Set : INBOUND /810 Application . : Network . . . : Partner . . . : VENDOR-1 Qual . . . . : Databank . . : REALTIME Process Statuses Ack Status . . : ERROR Comp Status. . : 04 Env Status . . : 00 F1=Help F3=Exit Recip/Action: @EDITORS / Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: OPEN Trans. ID/Task: EDIT/0000189 Path ID/Option: 203/203 Queue File: Mapping Status : Network Status : Seq Status . . : 00 F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-175 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item The following is an example of the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Item Process Detail screen in Relationship mode. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 14=Query 15=Excps @EDITORS / Item Identification Item Type . . : TRANSACTION Reference . . : 000000006 /000000008 /000080001 Trace ID . . : EI00000001 To/From: EI00000002 User Reference: INV01 System/Process: GENTRAN /EDIR001 Date-Time . . : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 Direction/Set : INBOUND /810 Application . : Network . . . : User . . . . : VENDOR-1 Partner . . . : Databank . . : REALTIME Process Statuses Ack Status . . : ERROR Comp Status. . : 04 Env Status . . : 00 F1=Help F3=Exit Recip/Action: Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: Trans. ID/Task: Path ID/Option: OPEN EDIT/0000189 203/203 Queue File: Mapping Status : Network Status : Seq Status . . : 00 F12=Cancel Actions 8=ItemHist Enter 8 and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 10=MsgList Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Item Message List screen. This screen lists all messages that were issued for the item. For Sterling Gentran processes, all messages issued by the process are listed. For User processes, only the messages that were passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item, by the user application, are displayed. 5-176 11=DataDisp Enter 11 and press Enter to display the Item Data Display screen showing the data for the item. All messages for the item are inserted into the data in the appropriate places. To use this action, the Sterling Gentran Databank Message Store must be implemented. 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item, based on the processes that processed the item. 14=Query Enter 14 and press Enter to return to the Query Request screen. The search fields and any items that were displayed when entering this screen are redisplayed on the Query Request screen. 15=Excps Enter 15 and press Enter to display the Item Exception Status screen. This screen lists all recipients that captured the item in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field where you may enter actions for the item displayed. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Item Identification Item Type The 1- to 16-character field where the Item type of the item is displayed. Document • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract Functional Group • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Reference A 1- to 45-character field which displays the reference identification for the item, based on the item type. For EDI items, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For Application items, the reference is defined in the mapping process. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-177 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item For User Application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. Trace ID Tracking Management assigns and manages a Trace ID for items being tracked by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID provides a link for an item between processes and also provides a means for you to reference an item. Tracking Management assigns a Trace ID to an item when the initial process for an item passes the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. That Trace ID is passed back to the initial process, which then passes it along with the items data to subsequent processes. Subsequent processes use the Trace ID when passing process information for the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint user gateway. To/From: If the item being viewed belongs to a larger item, then the Trace ID for the larger item is displayed. For example, an outbound transaction belonging to a functional group. In this case, the Trace ID assigned to the functional group is displayed in the To/From field. User Reference A 1- to 45-character field which displays the User Reference identification for the Transaction Item Type. This field is only displayed for transaction item types. System/Process The system and process which processed this item. Date-Time The date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the item was processed by this system/ process. Direction/Set The direction of the item and the set ID value used by the process to identify the type of document. Inbound From partner to user. Outbound From user to partner. 1- to 6-character value for the set. Application For Sterling Gentran item types, the Application Data ID is displayed. For user item types, the application ID passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from the user application is displayed. Network For Sterling Gentran item types, the Network ID as defined to Sterling Gentran for the item is displayed. For User item types, the Network ID passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from the user application is displayed. User (Partner) For Sterling Gentran item types, the Trading Profile User ID used by (Partner) translation for the item is displayed. Based on the trading profile mode defined, this field may be displayed as either the User ID or the Partner ID. For User item types, the User value that was passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint by the user application is displayed. 5-178 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Partner (Qualifier) For Sterling Gentran item types, the Trading Profile Partner ID used by (Qualifier) translation for the item is displayed. Based on the trading profile mode defined, this field may be displayed as either the Partner ID or the Qualifier ID. For User item types, the Partner value that was passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint by the user application is displayed. Databank The Databank System used to process the item, is displayed in this field. Recip/Action The recipient/action fields identify who/how notification for the exception was delivered by Exception Management. Note: The exception information provided here is for the last exception that was detected for the item by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. You may use the 15=Excps action to view detailed exception information for the item. Action Dt-Tm If an action was initiated for the exception, this field displays the date and time the action was initiated. The formats used are MM/DD/YYYY and HH:MM. Excp. Status The current Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint exception status is displayed here. Possible values are: Open The exception is currently open. Closed The exception has been closed. Purged The exception has been purged. Review The exception is in review. Transfer The exception has been transferred. Trans ID/Task The CICS Transaction ID and Task Number used to process the item are displayed in this field. This is only available for Sterling Gentran:Realtime items. Path ID/Option The Path ID and Option Number used to process the item are displayed in this field. This is only available for Sterling Gentran:Realtime items. Queue File The Queue File Number which contained the output data for the item, is displayed in this field. This is only available for Sterling Gentran:Realtime items. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-179 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Process Status Statuses generated by the process for the item are displayed. For User item types, up to three process statuses may be displayed. For Sterling Gentran item types, there will be six status fields displayed. Ack Status The acknowledgment status for the item. Accepted The item has been accepted. Accepted/ Error The item contained error(s), but was accepted. Indeterminate The item status could not be determined. Overdue The item acknowledgment is overdue. Partial The item was partially accepted. Rejected The item was rejected. Waiting The item status is not yet determined. Comp Status The compliance status for the item (Only for Inbound transactions). 00 No errors were encountered. 04 One or more element errors were encountered. 08 One or more missing or misplaced segments were encountered. 12 The transaction set was incomplete. Env Status The envelope status for the item. 5-180 00 No errors encountered in the document. 04 One or more errors (other than authorization and sequence errors) were encountered in processing the Transmission Envelope, or one or more errors (other than unknown user or partner) were encountered in processing the Functional Group Envelope. 08 Either no Partner ID/Qualifier or User/Partner was found corresponding to the sender/receiver codes contained in the Functional Group, or the segment count contained in the Transaction Set Trailer was found to be in error. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Gentran Item Mapping Status The current mapping status for the item. 00 No errors were encountered during the mapping process. 04 One or more non fatal mapping errors were encountered. 12 An outbound document could not be translated. Network Status The network status for the item. Errors The transmission contained errors. Picked Up The transmission was picked up by your trading partner. Processed The transmission was processed by the network. Received The transmission was received by the network. Manual Network The transmission status was manually determined. Waiting The transmission status is not yet determined. Seq Status The sequence status for the item. 00 No errors. 04 Sequence errors were encountered. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-181 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item Purpose This screen is only available for Sterling Gentran:Plus users who have enabled communications monitoring in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Item Process Detail – Sterling Connect Item screen displays detailed item information for a single Sterling Connect tracking point that processed the item. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 14=Query 15=Excps Item Identification Item Type . . : BATCH Reference . . : 00000000000070 Trace ID . . : BA00000009 To/From: System/Process: CONNECT Date-Time . . Batch # . . . Remote ID . . Direction . . Failure Code : : : : : /STOUTL 06/01/2011 0000185 REMOTE1 OUTBOUND – 12:00 Process Statuses Added . . . . : Y Collected . . : Comm Protocol : F1=Help F3=Exit Recip/Action: Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: Extracted. . . : Incomplete . . : Transmitted : F12=Cancel Actions 8=ItemHist Enter 8 and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 10=MsgList Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Item Message List screen. This screen lists all messages issued for the item. For Sterling Connect processes, the explanation text associated with a communications failure code is displayed. 11=DataDisp Enter 11 and press Enter to display the data for the item. The Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the item. 5-182 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item, based on the processes that processed the item. 14=Query Enter 14 and press Enter to return to the Query Request screen. The search fields and any items displayed when entering this screen are redisplayed on the Query Request screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item 15=Excps Enter 15 and press Enter to display the Item Exception Status screen. This screen lists all recipients that captured the item in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field where the you may enter actions for the item displayed. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Item Identification Item Type The 1- to 16-character field where the Item type of the item is displayed. Batch • • • • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities Sterling Connect Communications product Sterling Connect Inbound Interface Sterling Connect Outbound Interface Reference A 1- to 45-character field which displays the reference identification for the item based on the item type. For Communication items, the reference is the assigned Batch ID. Trace ID Tracking Management assigns and manages a Trace ID for items being tracked by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID provides a link for an item between processes and also provides a means for the user to reference an item. Tracking Management assigns a Trace ID to an item when the initial process for an item passes the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. That Trace ID is passed back to the initial process, which then passes it along with the items data to subsequent processes. Subsequent processes use the Trace ID when passing process information for the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint user gateway. To/From: If the item being viewed belongs to a larger item, then the Trace ID for the larger item is displayed. For example, an outbound transaction belonging to a functional group. In this case, the Trace ID assigned to the functional group will be displayed in the To/From field. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-183 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item System/Process The system and process which processed this item. Date-Time The date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the item was processed by this system/ process. Batch # The Batch Number assigned to the communications batch by the Sterling Connect system. Remote ID The Remote ID/Mailbox associated to the communications batch. Direction The direction of the communications data. Inbound From partner to user. Outbound From user to partner. Failure Code The Failure Code associated with a communications error is displayed. This field is blank or zeros if no communications errors were encountered for the communications batch. To see the explanation for a failure code, enter a 10 and press Enter to display the Failure Code text on the Item Message List screen. Recip/Action The recipient/action fields identify who/how notification for the exception was delivered by Exception Management. Note: The exception information provided here is for the last exception that was detected for the item by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. You may use the 15=Excps action to view detailed exception information for the item. Action Dt-Tm If an action was initiated for the exception, this field displays the date and time the action was initiated. The formats used are MM/DD/YYYY and HH:MM. Excp. Status The current Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint exception status is displayed here. Possible values are: 5-184 Open The exception is currently open. Closed The exception has been closed. Purged The exception has been purged. Review The exception is in review. Transfer The exception has been transferred. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – Sterling Connect Item Process Status Statuses generated by the process for the item are displayed. For Sterling Connect item types, there will be six status fields displayed. Added Indicates whether the batch was added to the Sterling Connect queues by the Offline Utilities. Y Added Offline by the current process Collected Indicates whether the batch was received by Sterling Connect. Y Collected by the current process. Comm Protocol Indicates which communications protocol method was used to send/receive the data. B Bisync communications data. H Internal communications data. S SNA communications data. Extracted Indicates whether the batch was extracted from the Sterling Connect queues by the Offline Utilities. Y Extracted Offline by the current process. Incomplete Indicates whether the current function (that is, TRANSMIT) was completed successfully for this batch Y Current function completed successfully. N Current function was not completed successfully. Transmitted Indicates whether the batch was sent by Sterling Connect. Y Transmitted by the current process. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-185 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – User Item EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – User Item Purpose The Item Process Detail – User Item screen displays detailed item information for a single User tracking point that processed the item. The following is an example of the Item Process Detail screen in Partner/Qualifier mode. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 06/01/2011 13=ItemRefs 14=Query 15=Excps Item Identification Item Type . . : U:COMM BATCH Reference . . : INBOUND BATCH 4125 Trace ID . . : BA00000001 To/From: System/Process: Date-Time . . : Direction/Set : Application : Network . . . : Partner . . . : Qual . . . . : @COMMIB /VPIBCOMM 06/01/2011 - 12:00 INBOUND / Recip/Action: Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: REMOTE ID Process Statuses U:COMM. STATUS : RECEIVED U:STATUS 1 : EXTRACTED U:STATUS 2 : REXTRCT-OK F1=Help F3=Exit User Fields U:MAILBOX : BOX-4862 U:PHONE NUMBER : 1-614-793-7000 U:COMM. SIZE : 1600 BYTES F12=Cancel The following is an example of the Item Process Detail screen in Relationship mode. EDIM712 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 10=MsgList ITEM PROCESS DETAIL 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 14=Query 15=Excps Item Identification Item Type . . : U:COMM BATCH Reference . . : INBOUND BATCH 4125 Trace ID . . : BA00000001 To/From: System/Process: Date-Time . . : Direction/Set : Application : Network . . . : User. . . . . : Partner . . . : @COMMIB /VPIBCOMM 06/01/2011 - 12:00 INBOUND / REMOTE ID Process Statuses U:COMM. STATUS : RECEIVED U:STATUS 1 : EXTRACTED U:STATUS 2 : REXTRCT-OK F1=Help 5-186 Recip/Action: Action Dt-Tm: Excp. Status: F3=Exit User Fields U:MAILBOX : BOX-4862 U:PHONE NUMBER : 1-614-793-7000 U:COMM. SIZE : 1600 BYTES F12=Cancel IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – User Item Actions 8=ItemHist Enter 8 and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 10=MsgList Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Item Message List screen. This screen lists all messages that were issued for the item. For Sterling Gentran processes, all messages issued by the process are listed. For User processes, only the messages that were passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item, by the user application, are displayed. 11=DataDisp For User processes, the data display feature is not available. 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item, based on the processes that processed the item. 14=Query Enter 14 and press Enter to return to the Query Request screen. The search fields and any items that were displayed when entering this screen are redisplayed on the Query Request screen. 15=Excps Enter 15 and press Enter to display the Item Exception Status screen. This screen lists all recipients that captured the item in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field where the user may enter actions for the item displayed. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Item Identification Item Type A 1- to 16-character field where the Item type of the item is displayed. U:[type] 1- to 16-character value. The user item type as defined by the user on the User Tacking Point Definitions. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-187 EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – User Item Reference A 1- to 45-character field that displays the reference identification for the item, based on the item type. For User Application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. Trace ID Tracking Management assigns and manages a Trace ID for items being tracked by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The Trace ID provides a link for an item between processes and also provides a means for you to reference an item. Tracking Management assigns a Trace ID to an item when the initial process for an item passes the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. That Trace ID is passed back to the initial process, which then passes it along with the items data to subsequent processes. Subsequent processes use the Trace ID when passing process information for the item to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint through the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint user gateway. To/From: If the item being viewed belongs to a larger item, then the Trace ID for the larger item is displayed. For example, an outbound transaction belonging to a functional group. In this case, the Trace ID assigned to the functional group is displayed in the To/From field. System/Process The system and process which processed this item. Date-Time The date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM) the item was processed by this system/ process. Direction/Set The direction of the item and the set ID value that is used by the process to identify the type of document. Inbound From partner to user Outbound From user to partner 1- to 6-character value for the set. Application For User item types, the application ID passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from the user application is displayed. Network For User item types, the Network ID passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint from the user application is displayed. User (Partner) For User item types, the User value passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint by the user application is displayed. Partner (Qualifier) For User item types, the Partner value passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint by the user application is displayed. 5-188 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM712 – Item Process Detail Screen – User Item Recip/Action The recipient/action fields identify who/how notification for the exception was delivered by exception management. Note: The exception information provided here is for the last exception that was detected for the item by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. You may use the 15=Excps action to view detailed exception information for the item. Action Dt-Tm If an action was initiated for the exception, this field displays the date and time the action was initiated. The format used is MM/DD/YYYY and HH:MM. Excp. Status The current Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint exception status is displayed here. Possible values are: Open The exception is currently open. Closed The exception has been closed. Purged The exception has been purged. Review The exception is in review. Transfer The exception has been transferred. Process Statuses Statuses generated by the process for the item are displayed here. Up to three statuses may be displayed for User item types. For User item types, the statuses are the value passed from the user application to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item. The possible statuses that a user may pass are defined by the user on the User Tracking Point Definition. The Process Status labels defined on the User Tracking Point Definition are used here for the Process Status labels. The Process Status labels are a 1- to 15-character value that must have "U:" as the first 2 characters. The Process Status is any 1- to 10-character value. User Fields Up to three user fields may be passed from the user application to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The possible user fields that a user may pass are defined on the User Tracking Point Definition. The User Field labels are a 1- to 15-character value that must have "U:" as the first 2 characters. The User Field values are any 1- to 15-character value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-189 EDIM715 – Item Message List Screen EDIM715 – Item Message List Screen Purpose The Item Message List screen displays the item in context with any associated system messages. EDIM715 __________ ITEM MESSAGE LIST Type Action, press Enter. 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl 11=DataDisp 13=ItemRefs System : Process : Desc. : Item Type: Reference: 06/01/2011 15=Excps @COMMIB VPIBCOMM SAMPLE INBOUND COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATION U:COMM BATCH INBOUND BATCH 4125 A Message __ RECEIVED INBOUND DATA FROM COMMUNICATIONS __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ LAST ENTRY DISPLAYED F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 8=ItemHist Enter 8 and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the current item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 9=ItemDtl Enter 9 and press Enter to display the Item Process Detail screen for the current item. 11=DataDisp Enter 11 and press Enter to display the data for the current item. For items originating from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Item Data Display screen displays the data for the item. All messages for the item are inserted into the data in the appropriate places. To use this action, the Sterling Gentran Databank Message Store must be implemented. For items originating from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the item. 5-190 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the current item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item, based on the processes that processed the item. 15=Excps Enter 15 and press Enter to display the Item Exception Status screen. This screen lists all recipients that captured the item in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM715 – Item Message List Screen Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. System The system which processed the item is displayed in this field. Process A 1- to 8-character field which displays the process ID that processed the item. Desc. The description for the tracking point is displayed in this field. Item Type A 1- to 16-character field which displays Item type of the item. Batch* • Sterling Connect Offline Utilities • Sterling Connect Communications product • Sterling Connect Inbound Interface • Sterling Connect Outbound Interface *(Sterling Gentran:Plus users only) Document • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract Functional Group • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-191 EDIM715 – Item Message List Screen Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor U:[type] Any 1- to 16-character value the user determines for classifying different data types that they wish to monitor using Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. These user item types are defined in the User Tracking Points that have been created in Extended System Management. Reference A 1- to 45-character field which displays the reference identification for the item based on the item type. For EDI items, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For Application items, the reference is defined in the mapping process. For Communication items, the reference is the assigned Batch ID. For User Application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. A (Action) A 1- to 2-character field where you may enter actions that apply to the messages. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. Message For Sterling Gentran item types, all messages issued by the process are displayed here. For Sterling Connect item types, the explanation text associated with a communications failure code is displayed. For User item types, the message that was passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint by the user application for the item, is displayed here. 5-192 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM716 – Item Data Display Screen EDIM716 – Item Data Display Screen Purpose The Item Data Display screen allows you to view the actual data that was processed and any associated system messages. The Item Data Display screen will only display data for Sterling Gentran Item Types. EDIM716 __________ Type Action, press Enter. ___ 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl System : Process : Desc. : Item Type: Reference: ITEM DATA DISPLAY 10=MsgList GENTRAN EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR TRANSACTION 000000005 /000000007 13=ItemRefs 06/01/2011 15=Excps /000070001 Item Data ST*810*000070001? BIG*90QQ05*INV01*901101*PONUMBER-001? NTE**------------------------------------------------------? NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW? NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID? NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.? NTE**------------------------------------------------------? REF*DP*00547? REF*BC*CONTRACT42? REF*BT*000001? REF*SR*JOHN BILLING? F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Next F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel Actions 8=ItemHist Enter 8 and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 9=ItemDtl Enter 9 and press Enter to display the Item Process Detail screen for the item. 10=MsgList Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Item Message List screen. This screen lists all messages that were issued for the item. For Sterling Gentran processes, all messages issued by the process are listed. For User processes, only the messages passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item by the user application are displayed. 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item, based on the processes that handled the item. 15=Excps Enter 15 and press Enter to display the Item Exception Status screen. This screen lists all recipients that captured the item in Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-193 EDIM716 – Item Data Display Screen Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F6=Next Displays the next message within the data for the item. Skips to the next block of data that has an associated message. This function key allows you to quickly scan through the messages issued for an item within the context of the data for the item. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field entered by the user to request an action for the item. Refer to Actions above for details regarding the available actions for this screen. System The system which was processing the item is displayed in this field. Process A 1- to 8-character field which displays the process ID that processed the item. Desc. The description of the system/process as defined in the Tracking Point definition. Item Type A 1- to 16-character field which displays the Item type of the item. 5-194 Document • • • Inbound Mapper Outbound Mapper Inbound Application Databank Extract Functional Group • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Interchange • • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Network Reconciliation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM716 – Item Data Display Screen Transaction • • • • Inbound Editor Outbound Editor Outbound EDI Databank Extract Acknowledgement Reconciliation/Monitor Reference A 1- to 45-character field which displays the reference identification for the item based on the item type. For EDI items, the reference is the Envelope Reference IDs. For Application items, the reference is defined in the mapping process. For User Application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. Item Data All data for the specified item, with all of the tracking point and user messages inserted into the data, is displayed. Messages inserted in the data are marked with an asterisk (for example, *msg). IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-195 EDIM718 – Item Exception Status Screen EDIM718 – Item Exception Status Screen Purpose The purpose of Item Exception Status screen is to list all exceptions that are currently being tracked by Exception Management for the item. With this release only, Sterling Gentran and Sterling Connect item types can have their exceptions monitored by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. EDIM718 __________ Type Action, press Enter. __ 8=ItemHist 9=ItemDtl System : Process : Desc. : Item Type: Reference: 10=MsgList GENTRAN EBDI001 INBOUND EDITOR TRANSACTION 000000005 /000000007 A Recipient __ @EDITORS __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ F1=Help ITEM EXCEPTION STATUS Action F3=Exit F7=Bkwd Status OPEN F8=Fwd 11=DataDisp 06/01/2011 13=ItemRefs 16=ExcpDtl /000070001 Date 06/01/2011 Time 12:00 Capture ID @MODEL-IE F12=Cancel Actions 8=ItemHist Enter 8 and press Enter to display the Item Status History screen for the item. Processes are listed in chronological order. 9=ItemDtl Enter 9 and press Enter to display the Item Process Detail screen for the item. 10=MsgList Enter 10 and press Enter to display the Item Message List screen. This screen lists all messages issued for the item. For Sterling Gentran processes, all messages issued by the process are listed. For Sterling Connect processes, the explanation text associated with a communications failure code is displayed. For User processes, only the messages passed to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for the item by the user application are displayed. 11=DataDisp Enter 11 and press Enter to display the data for the item. For items originating from the Sterling Gentran translation system, the Item Data Display screen will display the data for the exception. All messages for the item will be inserted into the data in the appropriate places. To use this action, the Sterling Gentran Databank Message Store must be implemented. For items originating from the Sterling Connect communications system, the Sterling Gentran:Plus Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) displays the data for the item. 5-196 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM718 – Item Exception Status Screen 13=ItemRefs Enter 13 and press Enter to display the Item Reference History screen for the item. This screen provides a list of all references associated with the item based on the processes that handled the item. 16=ExcpDtl Enter 16 on the line of the exception to be selected and press Enter to display the Exception Detail screen in the Exception Inquiry functional area. This screen displays the exception detail information for the item. Note: The ExcpDtl action is only valid for the Action column beside the item list. Function Keys F1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. F3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. F7=Bkwd Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. F8=Fwd Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. F12=Cancel Back up in the dialog, one screen at a time. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. (Action) A 1- to 2-character field where you may enter actions that apply to the entire Item Exception Status screen. Actions that apply to individual items in the list must be entered beside the item in the list's A(action) column. The actions that may be entered in the screen level Action field are: 8 = ItemHist 9 = ItemDtl 10 = MsgList 11 = DataDisp 13 = ItemRefs System The system that processed the item to which the exception belongs. Process The process that processed the item to which the exception belongs. Desc. The description of the system/process as defined in the tracking point definition. Item Type The Item type of the item is displayed here. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-197 EDIM718 – Item Exception Status Screen Reference A 1- to 45-character field which displays the reference identification for the item based on the item type. For EDI items, the reference is the Envelope Reference ID. For Application items, the reference is defined in the mapping process. For Communication items, the reference is the assigned Batch ID. For User Application items, the reference is passed from the User Application with the item. A (Action) A 1- to 2-character field where you may enter actions that apply to individual items. Actions that apply to the entire Item Exception Status screen must be entered in the screen level action field in the top left corner of the screen. The action that may be entered in the item level Action field is: 16 = ExcpDtl Recipient The recipient that the exception was captured for by Exception Management. Action The exception action initiated by Exception Management for the item. Status The current status of the exception. Closed The exception has been closed. Open The exception is currently open. Purged The exception has been purged. Review The exception is in review. Transfer The exception has been transferred. Date An 8-character field which displays the date the exception was captured in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Time A 5-character field which displays the time the exception was captured in the format HH:MM. Capture ID The exception capture definition ID used by Exception Management to detect that the exception occurred. 5-198 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Log Display Navigation Log Display Screens Log Display Navigation This section contains detailed information on the Log Display screens. The purpose of each screen and how to use the associated fields are described in detail in this section. The navigation for Log Display is illustrated in Figure 5.6. Online Log Display EDIM688 Figure 5.6 Log Display Navigation IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-199 EDIM688 – Online Log Display Screen EDIM688 – Online Log Display Screen Purpose The Online Log Display screen allows you to monitor any exception situations which are encountered by the background online Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. The Online Log Display screen displays data the same way as a console log; the most recent entries display at the bottom of the screen. As new entries are added to the file, the display scrolls upwards. This screen only displays log messages generated by applications in the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint system. To view messages generated by the Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Gentran:Control, or Sterling Gentran:Realtime system, use the Online Log Display screen for the corresponding system. EDIM688 9.99______ VIEWPOINT ONLINE LOG DISPLAY Start: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Stop: Filters===> Errors Only: _ Program: ________ Position Task # TranID Time Criteria===> _______ ____ ________ Task Tran Time 00001 EDIV 12:00:00 VIEWPOINT ONLINE SCANNER 00001 EDIV 12:00:00 VIEWPOINT ONLINE SCANNER 00002 EDIZ 12:00:00 VIEWPOINT POST PROCESSOR 00002 EDIZ 12:00:00 VIEWPOINT POST PROCESSOR 00003 EDIZ 12:00:00 VIEWPOINT POST PROCESSOR 00003 EDIZ 12:00:00 VIEWPOINT POST PROCESSOR Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Date 06/01/2011 BEGINS . . 06/01/2011 ENDS . . . 06/01/2011 BEGINS . . 06/01/2011 ENDS . . . 06/01/2011 BEGINS . . 06/01/2011 ENDS . . . XXX Last: 12:00:00 Date __________ 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Scan: 0005 Max Count 3000 Term . . . . . . Program Error Code EDIX690 EDI-50302-T 00 , DATE: 06/01/2011, TIME: 12:00:00 EDIX690 EDI-50303-T 00 , DATE: 06/01/2011, TIME: 12:00:00 EDIX691 EDI-50100-I 00 EDIVSF1 EDIX691 EDI-50101-T 00 EDIVSF1 EDIX691 EDI-50100-I 00 EDIVSF2 EDIX691 EDI-50101-T 00 EDIVSF2 PF3=Exit Function Keys Enter Displays the most current message on the screen. PF1=Help If the cursor is not on a field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a field, field level Help for that field is displayed. PF3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. PF7=Bwd Scroll backward through the messages on the current screen. PF8=Fwd Scroll forward through the messages on the current screen. Field Descriptions (Jump Code) A 10-character alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen automatically appears in the jump code field for that screen. To "jump" to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, "Jump Codes" for further information on using jump codes. 5-200 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM688 – Online Log Display Screen Start (Protected) A 10-position field that displays the starting date and an 8-position field that displays the starting time for the most recent start of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner. If the CICS system has been brought up without starting the scanner, this field is blank. The format is MM/DD/YYYY and HH:MM:SS. Stop (Protected) A 10-position field that displays the stop date and an 8-position field that displays the stop time for the most recent cycle of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner. This field is completed only when the system status is disabled (on the System Options screen). This field is left blank when either the scanner is running, or the CICS system is brought up and the scanner is not yet started. The format is MM/DD/YYYY and HH:MM:SS. Last (Protected) An 8-position field that displays the time of the last scanner run. This field is left blank if the scanner is not running. Scan (Protected) A 4-position field that displays the current scan interval. The scan interval (set on the System Options screen) determines the time between runs of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner. The format is HHMM. Filters (Optional) Filters restrict Error and message display for a specific program. If you enter values in combination with Position Criteria, the Position Criteria is processed first. When values are not entered, the filters are not active. Errors Only: (Optional) A 1-position alphanumeric field that indicates whether the system should display errors. The errors display starts with the last error message on the screen and processes backwards through a file. If no error message is currently on the screen, error messages display as they are found processing backwards through the file. You may use PF7=Bwd or PF8=Fwd to scroll through error messages. When you use this in conjunction with the Program Filter, errors display for the specific program entered. Valid values are: Y = Only severe errors, and fatal errors display (error values E, F, S). N = All log information displays. Space = All log information displays. Program (Optional) An 8-position alphanumeric field. After a valid value is entered, only messages for the specified program display. Messages for the specified program display starting with the last message on the screen and processing backwards through the file. If no message is currently displayed, messages display for that program as they are found processing backwards through the file. You may use PF7=Bwd or PF8=Fwd to scroll through the messages for the program. When you use this in conjunction with the Errors Only Filter, error messages display for the specified program. Position Criteria A group of five fields that are used to position the display of the Online Log file at a specific point in the file, based on the criteria in these fields. You can use any combination of position criteria, or leave all these fields blank. When you do not specify position IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-201 EDIM688 – Online Log Display Screen criteria (all five fields are blank), the last (most recent) record in the file is the last entry on the screen. When you press ENTER, the system searches for log entries matching the position criteria, beginning with the last record on the Online Log file. When you press either PF7 or PF8, the system searches for entries, beginning with the last record displayed on the screen. Task # A 7-digit numeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file at the most recent entry of a specific CICS task number. Valid values are any valid CICS task number. The system searches for an exact match of the task number in this field. TranID A 4-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file at the most recent entry of a specific CICS transaction ID. Valid values are any valid CICS transaction ID. The primary Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint transaction IDs are: EDIV = Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Scanner EDIW = Toggle Program EDIY = Communications Post Processor EDIZ = Post Processor Note: If you are using a system image other than EDI, replace the first three characters of the TranID with your system image characters. Time An 8-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file. The list begins with entries where the Time field is equal to or less than this value. The time is formatted in the 24-hour format HH:MM:SS. Date A 10-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file. The list begins with entries where the date field is equal to or less than the value in the Date field (in the Position Criteria group). The date is in the century format MM/DD/YYYY. Max Count (Required) A 4-position numeric field used to indicate the maximum number of Online Log file entries to read during a search for position criteria. When the system initially displays this screen, the Max Count field contains the default value as defined on the Configuration Maintenance screen for the Online Options, Record Type 0. If the system finds no records that match the selection criteria, the system displays the message EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT. You can either press PF7 to continue the search or increase the value in the Max Count field. An extremely large number in this field may slow down response time. Task (Protected) A 7-position alphanumeric field that displays the CICS task number of the task issuing the log entry. Tran (Protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field that displays the CICS transaction ID of the task issuing the log entry. 5-202 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM688 – Online Log Display Screen Time (Protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the current time of the task issuing the log entry. The time format is HH:MM:SS. Date (Protected) A 10-position alphanumeric field that displays the current date of the task issuing the log entry. The date format is MM/DD/YYYY. Term (Protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field that displays the terminal ID of the task issuing the log entry. If this field is blank, the task was executed in background CICS. Program (Protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint program issuing the log entry. Error Code (Protected) A 14-position alphanumeric field that displays the error/informational number, severity indicator, and completion code generated by the task issuing the log entry. The valid format is: EDI-XXXXX-Y-ZZ Where: EDI-XXXXX= The message number. See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message Guide for information about the indicated message. Y ZZ = = The severity indicator. The return code value. Severity indicator values are: I = Informational. Usually these are trace messages. T = Trace. Produced by the Trace facility. W = Warning. Some action may be required. E = Severe error. Controlled termination of processing. F = Fatal error. Results in immediate termination of processing. Completion code values are: 00 = Normal. No warnings or errors occurred. 04 = Warning. At least one warning level occurred. 08 = Error. Invalid data was encountered. Some user action to correct data may be required. 12 = Severe error. Processing was terminated. 16 = Severe error. Processing was terminated. See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message Guide for more information on these codes. (Error Message) (Protected) A 73-position alphanumeric field that displays the error/informational message generated by the task issuing the log entry. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-203 Sterling Gentran:Plus Navigation Sterling Gentran:Plus Screens Sterling Gentran:Plus Navigation This section contains detailed information on the Sterling Gentran:Plus screens that can be accessed directly from Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. The purpose of each screen and how to use the associated fields are described in detail in this section. The navigation for Sterling Gentran:Plus is illustrated in Figure 5.7. Interchange Detail EDIM402 Interchange Line Detail EDIM403 Figure 5.7 Sterling Gentran:Plus Navigation 5-204 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM402 – Interchange Detail Screen EDIM402 – Interchange Detail Screen Purpose The Interchange Detail screen enables you to view data on the communications data queues. How to Access You can access the Interchange Detail screen from the following screens: • • • • • • • • • • • • Exception List (EDIM648) Exception Detail (EDIM649) Exception Message List (EDIM650) Exception History (EDIM652) Exception History – 2 (EDIM653) User Message Display (EDIM662) User Procedure Display (EDIM663) Item Status History (EDIM710) Item Reference History (EDIM711) Item Process Detail (EDIM712) Item Message List (EDIM715) Item Exception Status (EDIM718) Screen Example The following illustrates the Interchange Detail screen for outbound. Select EDIM402 6.3_______ Mailbox Id........: Batch Number......: Batch Id..........: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ INTERCHANGE DETAIL TESTSNA_ 0000315 SNA TUTORIAL XXX Inbound/Outbound..: Line Number.......: Nbr Blocks/Records: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 O 000001 000000100 $$ADD ID=TESTSNA BATCHID='SNA TUTORIAL' ISA*00* *00* *ZZ*513666666 *ZZ*6147937000 *901 0*U*00200*000000004*0*P*>?GS*FA*121212*654321*920306*0948*7*X*002002?ST*9 70001?AK1*IN*1314?AK9*A*1*1*1?SE*6*000070001?GE*1*7?IEA*1*000000004? ISA*00* *00* *ZZ*5136666666 *ZZ*6147937000 *901 0*U*00200*000000005*0*P*>?GS*IN*121212121*987654321*901105*1200*7*X*00204 0*000070001?BIG*901105*INV01*901101*PONUMBER-001?NTE**-----------------------------------------------?NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELO DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID?NTE** IN FULL BY T OUNT DUE DATE.?NTE**----------------------------------------------------- Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Viewpoint PF5=Line Dtl IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-205 EDIM402 – Interchange Detail Screen The following illustrates the Interchange Detail screen for inbound. Select EDIM402 6.3_______ Mailbox Id........: Batch Number......: Batch Id..........: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ INTERCHANGE DETAIL TESTFTP_ 0000340 FTP TUTORIAL XXX Inbound/Outbound..: Line Number.......: Nbr Blocks/Records: SNA/BSC/FTP.......: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 I 000001 000000100 FTP $$ADD ID=TESTSNA BATCHID='FTP TUTORIAL' ISA*00* . *00* *ZZ*513666666 *ZZ*6147937000 *901 0*U*00200*000000004*0*P*>?GS*FA*121212*654321*920306*0948*7*X*002002?ST*9 70001?AK1*IN*1314?AK9*A*1*1*1?SE*6*000070001?GE*1*7?IEA*1*000000004? ISA*00* *00* *ZZ*5136666666 *ZZ*6147937000 *901 0*U*00200*000000005*0*P*>?GS*IN*121212121*987654321*901105*1200*7*X*00204 0*000070001?BIG*901105*INV01*901101*PONUMBER-001?NTE**-----------------------------------------------?NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELO DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID?NTE** IN FULL BY T OUNT DUE DATE.?NTE**----------------------------------------------------- Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Viewpoint PF5=Line Dtl Screen Actions The screen action is displayed on the top line of the Interchange Detail screen. The following table describes the screen action and gives instructions on performing that action. Associated with this screen action ... To perform this action ... View additional line details for a particular line (record) of interchange/batch data. Select Do this ... Type S in the A (Action Code) field for the line of data you want to select, then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions PF1=Help If the cursor is not on a label or field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a label or field, specific Help for that label or field is displayed. PF3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. PF4=Viewpoint:Returns to the previous Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint dialog screen. PF5=Line Dtl: Displays the Interchange Line Detail screen for a batch/record when you have typed an S in the A (Action Code) field next to the interchange/batch record for which you want to view line details. 5-206 PF7=Bwd: Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. PF8=Fwd: Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM402 – Interchange Detail Screen Field Descriptions (Jump Code): (Optional) A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. The jump code for a screen is automatically displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, “Jump Codes” for further information on using jump codes. Mailbox Id: (Required) An 8-position alphanumeric field. This value is the same as the Communications subsystem Remote ID. It is a part of the key for both the Communication Profile and Remote files. Inbound/Outbound: (Protected) A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether an inbound or outbound batch is displayed. Valid values are: I = Displays outbound batch data details O = Displays outbound batch data details Batch Number: (Optional) A 7-position numeric field. The value entered in the field sets the display to begin with the batch whose number is greater than or equal to the value entered. This batch number is the same batch number used by Sterling Connect. Line Number: (Optional) A 6-position numeric field used to designate a specific line number (record) from which to display the interchange or batch details. You can use this field as a browsing feature to further specify your display by typing a number in the field and pressing Enter. This displays details for that line and the next 10 lines. Entering a value of 999999 in the field displays the last lines of the interchange or batch. Batch Id: (Protected) Displays either the system-generated outbound interchange number or the inbound Batch ID for which you want to view data details. The outbound interchange number or inbound Batch ID is displayed if you have navigated from another screen. Nbr Blocks/Records: (Protected) A 9-position numeric field that displays the number of records or blocks for this batch. SNA/BSC/FTP: (Inbound only) (Protected) This field indicates which protocol was used during the collection of a batch from a remote site. A (Action Code): (Optional) A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates the action you want to perform for a particular data record. See the Screen Actions table previously in this section for the valid action codes for this screen and information on performing the actions. (Data Display): (Protected) Displays first 73 characters of up to 10 data records stored on the communication data queues. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-207 EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen Purpose The Interchange Line Detail screen enables you to view the individual data records on the communications data queues. How to Access You can access the Interchange Line Detail screen from the Interchange Detail screen by placing an S in the A (Action Code) field next to the record for which you want to view detail, then press PF5. Screen Example The following illustrates the Interchange Line Detail screen for Inbound Character mode. EDIM403 __________ Mailbox Id.........: Batch Number.......: Batch Id...........: ISA*00* 120 *00* Enter PF1=Help PF2=Hex PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 5-208 INTERCHANGE LINE DETAIL TESTFTP_ 0000340 FTP TUTORIAL XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Inbound/Outbound..: Line Number.......: Nbr Blocks/Records: SNA/BSC/FTP.......: I 000001 000000001 FTP *ZZ*6147937000 *010105* *ZZ*5136666666 PF3=Exit PF4=IntchgDtl PF6=Nxt IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen The following illustrates the Interchange Line Detail screen for Outbound Character mode. EDIM403 __________ Mailbox Id.........: Batch Number.......: Batch Id...........: INTERCHANGE LINE DETAIL TESTSNA_ 0000317 SNA TUTORIAL XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Inbound/Outbound..: Line Number.......: Nbr Blocks/Records: O 000001 000000100 $$ADD ID=TESTSNA BATCHID='SNA TUTORIAL' BEGINNING OF LINE DETAIL Enter PF1=Help PF2=Hex PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=IntchgDtl PF6=Nxt The following illustrates the Interchange Line Detail screen for Inbound Hexadecimal mode. EDIM403 __________ Mailbox Id.........: Batch Number.......: Batch Id...........: INTERCHANGE LINE DETAIL TESTFTP_ 0000340 FTP TUTORIAL XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Inbound/Outbound..: Line Number.......: Nbr Blocks/Records: SNA/BSC/FTP.......: I 000001 000000001 FTP Pos 001-064 ISA*00* *00* *ZZ*5136666666 *ZZ*6147937000 CEC5FF544444444445FF544444444445EE5FFFFFFFFFF444445EE5FFFFFFFFFF 921C00C0000000000C00C0000000000C99C513666666600000C99C6147937000 Pos 065-128 *010105*120 444445FFFFFF5FFF444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 00000C010105C120000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Pos 129-192 4444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Chars PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=IntchgDtl IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Nxt 5-209 EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen The following illustrates the Interchange Line Detail screen for Outbound Hex mode. EDIM403 __________ Mailbox Id.........: Batch Number.......: Batch Id...........: INTERCHANGE LINE DETAIL TESTSNA_ 0000317 SNA TUTORIAL XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Inbound/Outbound..: Line Number.......: Nbr Blocks/Records: O 000001 000000100 Pos 001-064 $$ADD ID=TESTSNA BATCHID='SNA TUTORIAL' 55CCC4CC7ECEEEDC4CCECCCC77EDC4EEEDDCCD74444444444444444444444444 BB144094E352325102133894ED251034369913D0000000000000000000000000 Pos 065-128 4444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Pos 129-192 4444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Chars PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=IntchgDtl PF6=Nxt Function Key Descriptions PF1=Help If the cursor is not on a label or field, screen level Help information is displayed. If the cursor is on a label or field, specific Help for that label or field is displayed. PF2=Hex: Displays the interchange/batch line details in hexadecimal mode. PF2=Chars: Displays the interchange/batch line details in character mode. PF3=Exit Returns to the previous menu. PF4=IntchgDtl:Redisplays the Interchange Detail screen, which displays up to 10 lines in the interchange/batch. PF6=Nxt: Displays the next batch listed on your Queue file. PF7=Bwd: Scroll backward through the list on the current screen. PF8=Fwd: Scroll forward through the list on the current screen. Field Descriptions (Jump Code): (Optional) A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. If a screen has a jump code, the jump code is automatically displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, then press Enter. Refer to Chapter 4, “Jump Codes” for further information on using jump codes. Mailbox Id: (Required) An 8-position alphanumeric field, the value of which is the same as the Communications subsystem remote ID. This value is a part of the key for both the Communication Profile and Remote files. 5-210 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen Inbound/Outbound: (Protected) A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether an inbound or outbound batch is displayed. Valid values are: I P = = Displays inbound batch line details Displays outbound batch line details Batch Number: (Optional) A 7-position numeric field. The value entered in the field sets the display to begin with the batch whose number is greater than or equal to the value entered. This batch number is the same batch number used by Sterling Connect. Line Number: (Optional) A 6-position numeric field used to designate a specific line number (record) from which to display the interchange or batch details. You can use this field as a browsing feature to further specify your display by typing a number in the field and pressing Enter. This displays details for that specific line. Entering a value of 999999 displays the details of the last line in the interchange or batch. If you have navigated from the Interchange Detail screen, where you must select a line number, the line number displays in this field. If you have navigated from the menu, the value in this field is the default line number 000001. Batch Id: (Protected) Displays either the system-generated outbound interchange number or the sequential, system-generated inbound batch ID for which you want to view details for a particular line. Nbr Blocks/Records: (Protected) A 9-position numeric field that displays the number of records or blocks for this batch. SNA/BSC/FTP: (Inbound only) (Protected) This field indicates which protocol was used during the collection of a batch from a remote site. (Data Display): (Protected) In “Character” mode, for both inbound and outbound, the screen will display up to 8 lines of 77 bytes each for a total of 616 bytes. In “Hex” mode: • • Outbound will only display ONE screen of 192 bytes. Inbound will display up to THREE screens of 192 bytes for a total of 576 bytes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-211 EDIM403 – Interchange Line Detail Screen 5-212 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 6 Report Descriptions This chapter provides a description of the reports produced by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page Reporting Structure ................................................................................................................ 6-2 User Reports .......................................................................................................................... 6-3 Report Examples .................................................................................................................... 6-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 6-1 Reporting Structure Reporting Structure Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint has reporting capabilities for both operational activities and management reporting. The Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint reports provide a detailed account of all information you require at both the summary level and detail level. 6-2 SUMMARY REPORT The Summary report • contains run options and process counts. • provides first-level verification of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint program processing. • is generated by all Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint batch programs. PROCESSING LOG The Processing log • contains program start and end times, and any severe or fatal conditions. A severe or fatal condition is a condition that caused the program to terminate before successful completion. • provides second-level verification of Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint program processing. • is generated by all Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint batch programs. USER REPORT User reports • provide both operational and business information. User report information may be requested at the Statuslevel and/or Detail-level. For detailed information regarding User reports setup and requests, refer to “EDIM609 - Maintenance/ Inquiry Options Definition Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions”. • provides a Report-Level field on the Maintenance/ Inquiry Options Definition Screen to specify the level of User report to be generated. The following levels of User Reports are available: • Status: provides a summary list of all objects that match the specified selection criteria. • Detail: provides detailed information for each object that matches the specified selection criteria (Repository Only). • Both: generates both Status and Detail-level reports. (Repository only). • None: generates no User reports. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User Reports User Reports To generate User reports, you must run the batch program Maintenance/Inquiry (EDIN140). See the “Batch Program Descriptions” chapter in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/ OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for complete details on the use of this program. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides User reports for the following information: • Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles • Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository PROFILES REPORTING User Reports for Profiles may be requested at the Status report level only. They provide inquiry reporting and maintenance based on selection criteria. Refer to the “EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions” for details about the selection criteria options available for Profiles reporting. REPOSITORY REPORTING Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint provides both maintenance and inquiry reporting for the Repository. • Maintenance reporting is provided for programs where a mode of purge, archive, or restore has been requested. • Inquiry reporting is provided for programs where a mode of inquiry has been requested. You may request Status-level and Detail-level reporting for Repository User Reports. Refer to the “EDIM609 – Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition Screen” in Chapter 5, “Screen Descriptions” for details about the selection criteria options available for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Repository reporting. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 6-3 Report Examples Report Examples Purpose This section contains examples of the following Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint reports: • Maintenance/Inquiry Processing Summary report • Repository Status-Level User report - Exceptions • Repository Status-Level User report - Recipients • Repository Detail-Level User report • Profiles Status-Level User report Tracking Management only 6-4 • Maintenance/Inquiry Processing Summary report • Repository Detail-Level User report • Repository Status-Level User report • Profiles Status-Level User report IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Report Examples Maintenance/Inquiry Processing Summary Report REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI154 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY SUMMARY REPORT PAGE : 00001 VERSION: 6.6 OPTIONS USED THIS RUN --------------------REQUESTED-OPERATION DEFINITION CLASS MODE = = = = FILE REPORT LEVEL = REPOSITORY = BOTH FIELD PARTNER PROCESS @MODEL-R EXCEPTIONS INQUIRY OPERATOR EQ VALUE VENDOR-1 CONNECTOR PROCESSING SUMMARY -----------------EXCEPTIONS ON FILE EXCEPTIONS SELECTED : : 7 1 RECIPIENT ON FILE RECIPIENT SELECTED : : 4 0 TOTAL ENTRIES SELECTED : 1 NUMBER OF ERRORS THIS RUN HIGHEST RETURN CODE THIS RUN : : 0 0 Repository Status-Level User Report – Exceptions REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI157 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT REPOSITORY INQUIRY STATUS REPORT CAPTURE TIME RECIPIENT NAME SYSTEM PROCESS DATE REFERENCE @ACKREC GENTRAN EDID510 106/01/2011 12:00 000000001 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PAGE : 00001 VERSION: 6.6 STATUS /000000002 OPEN 6-5 Report Examples Repository Status-Level User Report – Recipients REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID PAGE : 00001 MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT : EDI160 REPOSITORY INQUIRY STATUS REPORT LAST VERSION: 6.6 ACTIVITY RECIPIENT NAME DESCRIPTION DATE TIME @ACKREC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCILIATION ERRORS 06/01/2011 12:00 Repository Detail-Level User Report – Partner/Qualifier mode REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI156 RECIPIENT DESCRIPTION @ACKREC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCILIATION ERRORS *SYSTEM/PROCESS: GENTRAN PAGE REPOSITORY INQUIRY DETAIL REPORT /EDID510 06/01/2011 - 12:00 VERSION: 6.6 EXCEPTION STATUS: OPEN USER REFERENCE: EDI ENVELOPE : 00001 MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT EXCEPTION TAG: 0000000010 : INTERCHANGE: 000000001 GROUP: 000000002 TRANS: DIRECTION/SET : OUTBOUND/ PARTNER . . . : VENDOR-1 APPLICATION: EXCP. ACTION: PARTNER QUAL. : NETWORK ACTION DT-TM: CAPTURE ID : @MODEL-AR : CAPTURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS NOT ACCEPTED Repository Detail-Level User Report – Relationship mode REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI156 RECIPIENT DESCRIPTION @ACKREC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECONCILIATION ERRORS *SYSTEM/PROCESS: GENTRAN PAGE REPOSITORY INQUIRY DETAIL REPORT /EDID510 06/01/2011 - 12:00 VERSION: 6.6 EXCEPTION STATUS: OPEN USER REFERENCE: EDI ENVELOPE : 00001 MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT EXCEPTION TAG: 0000000010 : INTERCHANGE: 000000001 GROUP: 000000002 TRANS: DIRECTION/SET : OUTBOUND/ USER . . . . : VENDOR-1 PARTNER . . . : CAPTURE ID 6-6 : @MODEL-AR APPLICATION: EXCP. ACTION: NETWORK ACTION DT-TM: : CAPTURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS NOT ACCEPTED IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Report Examples Profiles Status-Level User Report REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI157 TYPE EXCEPTION EXCEPTION EXCEPTION EXCEPTION EXCEPTION EXCEPTION EXCEPTION EXCEPTION EXCEPTION ACTION CAPTURE CAPTURE CAPTURE CAPTURE PROFILE PROFILE PROFILE PROFILE GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY EXCEPTION MANAGEMENT PROFILE INQUIRY STATUS REPORT PAGE : 00001 VERSION: 6.6 NAME DESCRIPTION @MODEL-FAX @MODEL-IE @MODEL-IM @MODEL-OM @MODEL-AR @MODEL-AR @MODEL-IE @MODEL-IM @MODEL-OM GENERAL FAX EXAMPLE INBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS CAPTURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS NOT ACCEPTED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT ERRORS INBOUND COMPLIANCE ERRORS INBOUND MAPPING ERRORS OUTBOUND MAPPING ERRORS Maintenance/Inquiry Processing Summary Report REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID PAGE : 00001 MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY : EDI154 SUMMARY REPORT VERSION: 6.6 OPTIONS USED THIS RUN --------------------REQUESTED-OPERATION = PROCESS DEFINITION = @MODEL-TP CLASS = TRACKING MODE = INQUIRY FILE = PROFILE REPORT LEVEL = STATUS FIELD CONNECTOR OPERATOR VALUE QUERY ID EQ ALL PROCESSING SUMMARY ------------------ QUERY DEFINITIONS ON FILE : 2 QUERY DEFINITIONS SELECTED : 2 TOTAL ENTRIES SELECTED : 2 NUMBER OF ERRORS THIS RUN : 0 HIGHEST RETURN CODE THIS RUN : 0 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 6-7 Report Examples Repository Detail-Level User report – Partner/Qualifier mode REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI158 *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: DIRECTION/SET : PROC STATUS 1 : USER FIELD 1 : PARTNER . . . : PARTNER QUAL. : @POSYSTEM /VPOBAPPL 06/01/2011 - 12:00 ITEM PONUMBER-057 /850 DIVISION OK PROC STATUS 2 110190 USER FIELD 2 VENDOR-2 APPLICATION NETWORK *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: EDI ENVELOPE : DIRECTION/SET : GENTRAN /EBDI042 PONUMBER-057 INTERCHANGE: OUTBOUND/ PARTNER . . . : VENDOR-2 PARTNER QUAL. : 06/01/2011 - 12:00 GROUP: DIVISION APPLICATION NETWORK @POSYSTEM /VPOBAPPL 06/01/2011 - 12:00 ITEM PONUMBER-058 OUTBOUND/850 DIVISION OK PROC STATUS 2 110190 USER FIELD 2 VENDOR-2 APPLICATION NETWORK *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: EDI ENVELOPE : DIRECTION/SET : GENTRAN /EBDI042 PONUMBER-058 INTERCHANGE: OUTBOUND/ 06/01/2011 - 12:00 TYPE: U:ORDER : : ORDER GOOD : 111590 : POFILE : ITEM TYPE: DOCUMENT *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: DIRECTION/SET : PROC STATUS 1 : USER FIELD 1 : PARTNER . . . : PARTNER QUAL. : PARTNER . . . : VENDOR-2 PARTNER QUAL. : 6-8 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY TRACKING MANAGEMENT REPOSITORY INQUIRY DETAIL REPORT APPLICATION NETWORK : 00001 VERSION: 6.6 TRACE ID : BB00000003 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT : DUPLICATE IND : PROC STATUS 3 : EXCEEDED USER FIELD 3 : 614-793-70 COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : TRACE ID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT : TRANS: : 000 DUPLICATE IND : N : POFILE : COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : TYPE: U:ORDER TRACE ID : BB00000004 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT : DUPLICATE IND : PROC STATUS 3 : EXCEEDED USER FIELD 3 : 614-793-70 COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : : : ORDER GOOD : 111090 : POFILE : ITEM TYPE: DOCUMENT GROUP: DIVISION PAGE : BB00000003 TRACE ID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT : BB00000004 : TRANS: : 000 DUPLICATE IND : N : POFILE : COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Report Examples Repository Detail-Level User report – Relationship mode REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI158 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY TRACKING MANAGEMENT REPOSITORY INQUIRY DETAIL REPORT *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: DIRECTION/SET : PROC STATUS 1 : USER FIELD 1 : USER . . . . : PARTNER . . . : @POSYSTEM /VPOBAPPL 06/01/2011 - 12:00 ITEM PONUMBER-057 /850 DIVISION OK PROC STATUS 2 110190 USER FIELD 2 VENDOR-2 APPLICATION NETWORK *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: EDI ENVELOPE : DIRECTION/SET : GENTRAN /EBDI042 PONUMBER-057 INTERCHANGE: OUTBOUND/ 06/01/2011 - 12:00 USER . . . . : VENDOR-2 PARTNER . . . : : : ORDER GOOD : 111590 : POFILE : ITEM TYPE: DOCUMENT : 00001 VERSION: 6.6 TRACE ID : BB00000003 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT : DUPLICATE IND : PROC STATUS 3 : EXCEEDED USER FIELD 3 : 614-793-70 COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : GROUP: DIVISION : 000 TRACE ID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TRANS: DUPLICATE IND APPLICATION NETWORK : POFILE : COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : TYPE: U:ORDER TRACE ID : BB00000004 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT : DUPLICATE IND : PROC STATUS 3 : EXCEEDED USER FIELD 3 : 614-793-70 COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: DIRECTION/SET : PROC STATUS 1 : USER FIELD 1 : USER . . . . : PARTNER . . . : @POSYSTEM /VPOBAPPL 06/01/2011 - 12:00 ITEM PONUMBER-058 OUTBOUND/850 DIVISION OK PROC STATUS 2 110190 USER FIELD 2 VENDOR-2 APPLICATION NETWORK *SYSTEM/PROCESS: USER REFERENCE: EDI ENVELOPE : DIRECTION/SET : GENTRAN /EBDI042 PONUMBER-058 INTERCHANGE: OUTBOUND/ 06/01/2011 - 12:00 USER . . . . : VENDOR-2 PARTNER . . . : TYPE: U:ORDER PAGE : : ORDER GOOD : 111090 : POFILE : ITEM TYPE: DOCUMENT : BB00000003 : : N GROUP: DIVISION : 000 TRACE ID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TRANS: DUPLICATE IND : BB00000004 : APPLICATION NETWORK : POFILE : COMPLIANCE STATUS: NETWORK STATUS : : N Repository Status-Level User Report REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI159 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY TRACKING MANAGEMENT REPOSITORY INQUIRY STATUS REPORT TRACE ID ITEM TYPE SYSTEM PROCESS DATE TIME REFERENCE BB00000003 BB00000003 BB00000004 BB00000004 OE00000006 OE00000006 OE00000006 OE00000008 OE00000008 U:ORDER DOCUMENT U:ORDER DOCUMENT FUNCTIONAL GROUP FUNCTIONAL GROUP FUNCTIONAL GROUP INTERCHANGE INTERCHANGE @POSYSTEM GENTRAN @POSYSTEM GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN GENTRAN VPOBAPPL EBDI042 VPOBAPPL EBDI042 EBDI002 EDID205 EDID510 EBDI002 EDID205 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 PONUMBER-057 PONUMBER-057 PONUMBER-058 PONUMBER-058 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PAGE : 00001 VERSION: 6.6 6-9 Report Examples Profiles Status-Level User Report REPORT DATE: 06/01/2011 REPORT TIME: 12:00:00 REPORT ID : EDI157 GENTRAN:VIEWPOINT MAINTENANCE/INQUIRY TRACKING MANAGEMENT PROFILE INQUIRY STATUS REPORT TYPE NAME QUERY ID QUERY ID @INVOICEQY @ORDERQY 6-10 PAGE : 00001 VERSION: 6.6 DESCRIPTION SAMPLE INBOUND INVOICE HISTORY QUERY SAMPLE OUTBOUND PURCHASE ORDER HISTORY QUERY IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Appendix A Jump Codes The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint screens. The screens are listed by screen number within the subsystem. Screen Number Screen Title EDIM600 Viewpoint Main Menu Numeric Jump Codes Alphabetic Jump Codes 9 9.0 VP System Options Screens EDIM685 System Options 9.1 VP.SYS EDIM686 Staging TSQ Directory 9.1.8 VP.TSQ Extended System Management Screens EDIM601 Extended System Management Menu 9.2 VP.EXT EDIM602 Sterling Tracking Point Directory 9.2.1 VP.STPDIR EDIM603 Sterling Tracking Point Definition 9.2.2 VP.STPDEF EDIM607 Functional Area Control 9.2.3 VP.FUNC EDIM608 Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory 9.2.4 VP.MNTDIR EDIM609 Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition 9.2.5 VP.MNTDEF EDIM610 User Tracking Point Directory 9.2.6 VP.UTPDIR EDIM611 User Tracking Point Definition 9.2.7 VP.UTPDEF Exception Management Screens EDIM620 Exception Management Menu 9.3 VP.EXCP EDIM621 Exception Profile Directory 9.3.1 VP.PROFDIR EDIM622 Exception Profile Definition 9.3.2 VP.PROFDEF EDIM623 Exception Capture Directory 9.3.3 VP.CAPDIR EDIM624 Exception Capture Definition 9.3.4 VP.CAPDEF EDIM625 Exception Action Directory 9.3.5 VP.ACTDIR EDIM626 Exception Action Definition 9.3.6 VP.ACTDEF IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide A-1 Screen Number Numeric Jump Codes Screen Title Alphabetic Jump Codes Exception Management Screens (Continued) EDIM627 User Message Directory 9.3.7 VP.MSGDIR EDIM628 User Message Definition 9.3.8 VP.MSGDEF EDIM629 User Procedure Directory 9.3.9 VP.PROCDIR EDIM630 User Procedure Definition 9.3.10 VP.PROCDEF EDIM631 Usage Cross Reference 9.3.11 VP.USAGE Exception Inquiry Screens EDIM645 Exception Inquiry Menu 9.4 VP.INQ EDIM646 Recipient Directory 9.4.1 VP.RECPDIR VP.RECDIR EDIM648 Exception List 9.4.2 VP.EXCPLST Tracking Management Screens EDIM700 Tracking Management Menu 9.5 VP.TM EDIM701 Query Directory 9.5.1 VP.QDIR EDIM702 Query Request 9.5.2 VP.QREQ 9.99 VP.LOG Log Display Screens EDIM688 A-2 Online Log Display IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Notices Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A. For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to: Intellectual Property Licensing Legal and Intellectual Property Law IBM Japan Ltd. 1623-14, Shimotsuruma, Yamato-shi Kanagawa 242-8502 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide N-1 FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact: IBM Corporation J46A/G4 555 Bailey Avenue San Jose, CA__95141-1003 U.S.A. Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee. The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only. N-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to change before the products described become available. This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are ficticious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. The sample programs are provided "AS IS", without warranty of any kind. IBM shall not be liable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample programs. Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work, must include a copyright notice as follows: © IBM 2011. Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp. Sample Programs. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2011. If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear. Trademarks IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at “Copyright and trademark information” at www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml. Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries. IT Infrastructure Library is a registered trademark of the Central Computer and Telecommunications Agency which is now part of the Office of Government Commerce. Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino logo, Celeron, Intel Xeon, Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide N-3 ITIL is a registered trademark, and a registered community trademark of the Office of Government Commerce, and is registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom. Linear Tape-Open, LTO, the LTO Logo, Ultrium and the Ultrium Logo are trademarks of HP, IBM Corp. and Quantum in the U.S. and other countries. Connect Control Center®, Connect:Direct®, Connect:Enterprise, Gentran®, Gentran:Basic®, Gentran:Control®, Gentran:Director®, Gentran:Plus®, Gentran:Realtime®, Gentran:Server®, Gentran:Viewpoint®, Sterling Commerce™, Sterling Information Broker®, and Sterling Integrator® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sterling Commerce, Inc., an IBM Company. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. N-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Glossary Glossary Definition A set of options you may create, save, and reuse. Definitions allow you to easily and selectively build your Extended EDI System and Profiles from a wide range of criteria. You can create the following types of definitions: • Tracking Point • Maintenance/Inquiry Options • Exception Profile • Exception Capture • Exception Action • User Message • User Procedure Error User Exit A user program initiated by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in a fatal system condition. Exception An event or combination of events that resulted from a process for which you want some action to be performed. An exception is not restricted to an error condition. For example, a simple exception could be a purchase order that has just been received from partner XYZ. Exception Capture Definition The set of user defined options used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in an Exception Profile to capture exceptions being processed by tracking points. Exception Action Definition The set of user defined options used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint in an Exception Profile to initiate user automated systems for responding to captured exceptions. Exception Inquiry A functional area that provides the online functions to manage and resolve captured exceptions. Exception Management An option from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu that provides the online functions to define definitions, profiles, user messages, and user procedures. Exception Profile A profile that combines a capture definition and recipient, and optionally a user message, a user procedure, and an exception action. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint uses the exception profile to automate the handling of an exception for the user. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide G-1 Glossary Extended Search Conditions For queries that cannot be performed using the basic query criteria, this feature allows you to extend the search condition up to a 7-expression condition with full boolean logic and AND/OR connectors. Extended System Management An option from the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu that provides the online functions you need to define and administer the Extended EDI System. Find Limit A 1- to 6-digit number set by the user on the Configuration File Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint record. This number limits the number of items the search function will find to satisfy the search criteria before terminating the search. Gateway An Application Program Interface (API) that provides Tracking Points access to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. Item Term used by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint to refer to a logical grouping of data and information. The item types currently recognized by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are: • Application Document • Batch (Sterling Gentran:Plus only) • Interchange • Functional Group • Run • Transaction Set • U:[type] (Tracking Management only) Object Selection Field Most screens provide fields at the top of the screen for selecting the object or objects on which you wish to work. These fields are called Object Selection fields. Process Status The status associated with an item passed from a user application to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management. Query ID The name you define for a set of search criteria by which you may create, save, and reuse. The search query finds items that have been processed by Tracking Management using preset criteria. The criteria available for a basic query are Item Type, Reference, Partner, and Date/Time. Recipient Any person or group that receives notification for an exception captured by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. G-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Glossary Search Limit A 1- to 6-digit number set by the user on the Configuration File Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint record. This limits the number of items the Query search function will evaluate before terminating the search. Trace ID A unique number assigned to each item being tracked by Tracking Management. The trace ID provides a link for an item between processes and also provides a means to reference the item. Tracking Management A functional area that provides end-to-end tracking of an item travelling through the Extended EDI system. Tracking Point A system/process that has been included in your Extended EDI System (for example, Sterling Gentran Outbound Mapper). Tracking User Exit Allows you to pass information to your database for subsequent inquiry. This feature can be optionally invoked by Tracking Management when an item has been processed for a tracking point. User Action A user batch procedure or online transaction that you have defined to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint as an Exception Action. The User Action is automatically initiated by Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Profiles. An example of a User Action is E-Mail. The user may define, in an Exception Profile, that a person should receive an E-Mail when errors are encountered for a purchase order received. User Field Any value you pass to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for an item by a User tracking Point. You assign the name or label used for the User Field 1 field when you define the User Tracking Point in Extended System Management. Three User Fields may be passed for each item for each process. User Tracking Point User system and/or processes such as applications or communications systems that invoke the User Gateway to pass information to Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. This feature is currently available for Tracking Management only. IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide G-3 Glossary G-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Index A Ad Hoc Query Requests 3-64 Archive File (EDIVA) 2-12 B Batch Inquiry 1-18 Batch Maintenance 1-18 block/record count for a batch 5-207,5-211 Business Scenario 3-51 C Capture/Tracking 1-20 CICS PLT Entries 2-14 Communications Queue File (EDIVCQ) 2-13 completion code values error codes 5-203 Concepts 1-12 Configuration File (EDICFG) 2-12 Connect Cross Reference File (EDICXRF) 2-13 Connect Failure Codes File (EDICFC) 2-13 console log 5-200 D Definition Exception Action Definition 1-14 Exception Capture Definition 1-7,1-13 E error codes completion code values 5-203 severity indicator values 5-203 Error User Exit 1-6 Exception 1-6,1-10 Define Exception 1-13 Event-Driven Exception Capture 1-7 Exception Action Directory (EDIX625) 5-86 Exception Capture Definition (EDIX624) 1-7,1-13,5-73 Exception Capture Directory (EDIX623) 5-70 Exception Data Display 5-126 Exception Detail (EDIX649) 5-113,5-119 Exception History - 2 (EDIX653) 5-132 Exception History (EDIX652) 5-129 Exception History Update (EDIX654) 5-134 Exception Inquiry 1-8,1-18,1-20 Exception Inquiry Menu (EDIX645) 5-104 Exception List (EDIX648) 5-109 Exception Management 1-13,2-8 User Defined Automated Response 1-8 User Defined Notification 1-7 User-Defined Exceptions 1-7 Exception Management Menu (EDIX620) 5-63 Exception Message List (EDIX650) 5-123 Exception Profile 2-16 Disabling an Exception Profile 2-22 Exception Profile Definition (EDIX622) 5-67 Exception Profile Directory (EDIX621) 5-65 Extended EDI System 1-2,4-2 Extended Query Requests 3-64 Extended Search Condition (EDIX703) 5-145,5-152 Extended Search Conditions 1-11 Extended System Management 1-6,1-13,1-18 Extended System Management Menu (EDIX601) 5-14 F Features 1-5 Exception Management 1-6,1-10 System Management 1-6 System-Wide Features 1-5 Tracking Management 1-10 File Resource Definitions 2-14 Filtering 1-20 Find Limit 1-11 Functional Area Control (EDIX607) 5-36 Exception Action 1-8,1-14 Exception Action Definition (EDIX626) 5-89 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide IX - 1 Index G N Gateway 1-2,1-20,2-6,2-22 Notification 1-20 H O Housekeeping 3-79 How To Get Help 1-22 Online Facility 1-18 Actions 4-5 Function Keys 4-4 Main Menu 4-2 Options 4-2 Users 4-4 Online Log Display I Implementation Process 2-2 Developing a Configuration Strategy 2-4 Setting Up the Sterling Gentran Viewpoint System 2-11 Interchange Detail screen (EDIM402) 5-205 Interchange Line Detail screen (EDIM403) 5-208 Item Data Display (EDIX716) 5-193 Item Exception Status (EDIX718) 5-196 Item Message List (EDIX715) 5-190 Item Process Detail (EDIX712) 5-174,5-182,5-186 Item Reference History (EDIX711) 5-171 Item Status History (EDIX710) 5-167 J JCL File (EDIJCL) 2-12 L Using the Online Log Display 2-20 Online Log Display (EDIMOLD) 4-2,5-200 Online Trace ID File (EDIVTO) 2-13 P Process Status 5-160,5-189 Profile File (EDIVP) 1-17,2-12 Program and Mapset Resource Definitions 2-14 Prompt File (EDIPRMP) 2-12 Q Query Directory (EDIX701) 5-142 Query ID 5-147 Query Request (EDIX702) 5-145 Query Requests 3-57 R line of data, viewing 5-206 line number for detail display 5-207,5-211 Log Display 4-2 M Maintenance/Inquiry 1-21 Maintenance/Inquiry Options Definition (EDIX609) 5-41 Maintenance/Inquiry Options Directory (EDIX608) 5-38 Master Index File (EDIVM) 1-18,2-12 IX - 2 Recipient 1-8,2-8 Recipient Detail (EDIX647) 5-107 Recipient Directory (EDIX646) 5-105 Report Examples 6-4 Report Types Processing Log 6-2 User Report 6-2 Reports Profiles Reporting 6-3 Repository Reporting 6-3 Repository File (EDIVR) 1-18,2-12 Requesting Reports 3-77 Resolution/Query 1-20 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Index S Search Limit 1-11 Security 2-4 Set Up Instructions 3-52,3-80 Setup 1-20 severity indicator values 5-203 Staging Area 1-17 Staging File (EDIVSF) 2-6,2-12 Staging Temporary Storage Queue Directory (EDIM686) 5-10 Sterling Gentran Tracking Points 2-7,2-9,2-15 Sterling Tracking Point Definition (EDIX603) 5-19 Sterling Tracking Point Directory (EDIX602) 5-16 System Options (EDIX685) 5-6 T User Message 2-26 User Message Definition (EDIX628) 5-94 User Message Directory (EDIX627) 5-92 User Message Display (EDIX662) 5-136 User Procedure 2-26,2-27 User Procedure Definition (EDIX630) 5-99,5-101 User Procedure Directory (EDIX629) 5-97 User Procedure Display (EDIX663) 5-138 User Reports 6-3 User Tracking Point 1-14,2-7,2-9,2-15 User Tracking Point Definition (EDIX611) 5-59 User Tracking Point Directory (EDIX610) 5-56 V viewing data in data queues 5-205 data records 5-208 Terminology 1-12 Trace ID 1-10,5-162,5-178,5-183 Trace ID Cross Reference File (EDIVPPX) 2-13,2-15 Trace ID File (EDIVT) 2-12 Tracking Management 1-10,1-14,2-8 Tracking Management Menu (EDIX700) 5-141 Tracking Point 1-2,1-13,1-17,2-15 Disabling Tracking Points 2-15 Enabling Tracking Points 2-15 Tracking Point Mailbox/Remote ID Control Panel (EDIX606) 5-34 Tracking Point Status Control (EDIX605) 5-32 Tracking Point System Message Control (EDIX604) 5-30 Tracking User Exit 1-18 Transaction Resource Definitions 2-14 Tutorial Exception Inquiry 3-31,3-57 Housekeeping 3-47,3-79 Requesting Reports 3-45,3-77 Reset Instructions 3-48,3-80 Sample Business Requirements 3-5,3-51 Set Up Instructions 3-8,3-48,3-52,3-80 U User Action 1-13,1-18 User Field 5-162,5-189 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide IX - 3 Index IX - 4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows) Create Date : 2011:04:13 09:20:53Z Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.2 Modify Date : 2011:04:20 14:42:17-04:00 Metadata Date : 2011:04:20 14:42:17-04:00 Format : application/pdf Creator : IBM Information Development Title : IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® User Guide Document ID : uuid:df5310a4-280f-48b8-8806-f315adacd3eb Instance ID : uuid:ce7e0922-18d5-490b-b5b2-a6672db2fc0d Page Count : 384 Author : IBM Information DevelopmentEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools